CP2 Technical Specifications

SECTION IX
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
This Section contains the references to the Standard Specifications and
supplementary information (Special Provisions) that describes the Works
to be
procured.
Contract Package (CP) 2

Rehabilitation of Roads from Barangay Tinani to Barangay
Del Remidio, Samar and Eastern Samar, Philippines
(Km 843+500 - Km 907+283.741)
Technical
Specifications:
Rehabilitation/Construction
Samar Road Ref 330200 - CP2 Package
of
Section IX - Technical Specifications
IX
Table of Contents
PART A FACILITIES FOR THE ENGINEER...................................................3

PART A SP
FACILTIES FOR THE ENGINEER.......................................... 3
PART B OTHER GENERAL REQUIREMENTS..............................................23
B.1 SP Contractors Facilities...............................................................23
SPL B.5 Supplemental General Requirements.....................................26
SPL B.6 Compliance with Environmental and Social Management Plan 36
SPL B.7 Traffic Management................................................................55
SPL B.8 Occupational Health and Safety............................................60
SPL B.9 Mobilization and Demobilization.............................................63
PART C
EARTHWORK..............................................................................66
ITEM 100 SP Clearing and Grubbing.................................................66
ITEM 101 SP Removal of Structures and Obstructions.....................68
ITEM 102 SP Excavation.....................................................................72
ITEM 103 SP Structure Excavation.....................................................75
ITEM 104 SP Embankment.................................................................78
ITEM 105 SP Subgrade Preparation....................................................81
PART D
SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES................................................82
ITEM 200 SP Aggregate Subbase Course..........................................82
ITEM 202 SP Crushed Aggregate Base Course.................................83
PART E
SURFACE COURSES...................................................................85
ITEM 300 SP Aggregate Surface Course............................................85
ITEM 311 SP Portland Cement Concrete Pavement...........................85
SPL E1 Unbonded Concrete Overlays of Concrete Pavement............88
SPL E2 Woven Geotextile....................................................................92
PART F BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION..............................................................94
ITEM 400 SP Piling..............................................................................94
ITEM 404 SP Reinforcing Steel.........................................................102
ITEM 405 SP Structural Concrete.....................................................103
ITEM 406 SP Prestressed Concrete Structure...................................106
ITEM 411 SP Paint............................................................................126
ITEM 412 SP Elastomeric Bearing Pad.............................................127
SPL F1 Pile Integrity Test...................................................................130
SPL F2 Pile Dynamic Test..................................................................132
SPL F3 Temporary Detour at Bridge Sites........................................134
SPL F4 GI Drain Pipe.........................................................................136
Technical
Specifications:
of
SPL
SPL
SPL
SPL
SPL
SPL
SPL
SPL
SPL
SPL
SPL
SPL
SPL
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
IX
Concrete Stair with G.I. Pipe Railings...................................137

Non-Seismic Repairs of Existing Bridges..............................138
Concrete Shear Keys at Abutment - Seismic Retrofit..........149
Concrete Shear Keys at Pier - Seismic Retrofit...................150
Slab Strengthening.................................................................151
Rod Restrainer - Seismic Retrofit........................................153
Column Strengthening - Seismic Retrofit............................154
Girder Strengthening - Seismic Retrofit...............................157
Approach Slab - Seismic Retrofit........................................159
Removal of Existing Concrete Structure - Seismic Retrofit 162
Installation of New Bearing Pad..........................................163
Footing Retrofit.....................................................................166
Steel Shoe Bumper..............................................................168
PART G
DRAINAGE AND SLOPE PROTECTION STRUCTURES...............170
ITEM 500 SP Pipe Culverts and Storm Drains.................................170
ITEM 501 SP Underdrains..................................................................172
ITEM 502 SP Inlet/Outlet Headwalls, Manhole, Inlets and Catch Basins 175
ITEM 504 SP Cleaning and Reconditioning Existing Drainage Structures 176
ITEM 505 SP Riprap and Grouted Riprap.........................................177
ITEM 506 SP Stone Masonry............................................................177
SPL G1 Slope Remediation Measures................................................178
SPL G2 Composite Turf Reinforcement Matting.................................182
SPL G3 Micropiling..............................................................................184
SPL G4 Ground Anchor......................................................................192
SPL G5 Soil Nailing............................................................................202
PART H
MISCELLANEOUS STRUCTURES.............................................210
ITEM 601 SP Sidewalk.......................................................................210
ITEM 602 SP Monuments, Markers and Guide Posts.......................210
ITEM 603 SP Guardrail......................................................................210
ITEM 612 SP Reflective Thermoplastic Stripping Materials (Solid Form). 211
SPL H1 Landscaping...........................................................................214
SPL H2 Seeding..................................................................................216
SPL H3 Street Lighting (Electrical Works)..........................................217
SPL H4
Contract Information Signs..................................................226
PART J
PROVISIONAL SUMS..................................................................229
SPL J1 Relocation of Affected Electric Power Utilities.......................229
SPL J2 Removal and Relocation of Existing Barangay Markers........229
SPL J3 Provisional Sum.......................................................................230
PART K
DAYWORKS..............................................................................231
Technical
Specifications:
of
SPL K1
IX
Dayworks...............................................................................231
APPENDIX A
SUPPLEMENTAL TESTING REQUIREMENTS
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
INTRODUCTION
Technical Specifications for this project are comprised of the
DPWH Standard Specifications and these Special Provisions and
Supplemental Specifications. The Supplemental Specifications are for
items not covered by the DPWH Standard Specifications while the
Special Provisions are specific clauses setting forth the conditions or
requirements applicable to this particular project.
The Technical Specifications consists of two (2) Sections:
SECTION I: - DPWH Standard Specifications for Public Works and
Highways, 2004 Edition: Volume II, Highways, Bridges and Airports,
including all Department Orders and Circulars.
SECTION II: - Special Provisions and Supplemental Specifications.
Special Provisions (SP) of this Project shall consist of modifications on
the
general
conditions or requirements of the DPWH Standard Specifications defined as
follows:
Modifications
in the specifications of standard work items of the

DPWH
Standard
Specifications are carried out with the same item number and name of
the
standard
work items, followed by SP to identify that the specifications is a
Special Provision.
Supplemental Specifications (SPL) of this Project shall consist
additions to the DPWH Standard Specifications defined as follows:
of
Specifications for additional items of work not covered in the

DPWH Standard Specifications are numbered consecutively after the
last number of each PART of the Standard Specifications, the word
SPL preceded by a number to indicate that the specifications is a
Supplemental Specification.
Wherever the word Plans is used in the General Specifications it shall
be construed to mean Drawings as defined in the Conditions of
Contract, and whenever the words Special Provisions are used they
shall be read as Supplemental Specifications and Special Provisions.
Whenever there is a conflict between Section I and Section II, Section II shall govern.
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 2
SECTION I -
DPWH Standard Specifications for Public Works and
Highway, 2004 Edition: Volume II, Highways, Bridges and
Airports including all Department Orders and Circulars.
These standard specifications have not been included in these Technical
Specifications but can be obtained from the Republic of the Philippines
Department of Public Works and Highways.
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 3
SECTION II Special Provisions and Supplemental Specifications

PART A
FACILITIES FOR THE ENGINEER
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Delete Part A FACILITIES
replace with the following:
PART A SP
FOR
THE
ENGINEER
in
its
entirety
and
FACILTIES FOR THE ENGINEER
A.1 SP
Requirements
A.1.1(a) SP
Temporary Facilities
Laboratory
Quarters Building)
for
the
Engineer (Field
and
Office,
The Contractor shall furnish and maintain one (1) combined field
office/laboratory testing facility and one (1) living quarters facility
while the permanent Engineers Facilities are being constructed.
The Contractor shall secure land to construct Temporary Facilities (office,
laborartory & living quarters) or may lease an existing structure(s)
meeting the approval of the Engineer and the following requirements:
Field Office and Laboratory
Floor space of not less than 168 square
meters Three (3) management offices
One (1) general staff office
area One (1) laboratory
area
Two (2) bathrooms
Living Quarters
Floor space of not less than 168 square
meters Kitchen/Dinning area
Living room area
Eight (8) bedrooms
Two (2) bathrooms with showers
The Contractor shall provide
electricity, telephone, internet, air
conditioning, potable water, and sanitary facilities for the Engineer and his
staff.
Temporary Facilities shall be sited no more than 10 Km from the project
area
and
shall
be sited no closer than 50 meters to a residence and/or school unless
approved
by
the
Engineer.
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 4
The Contractor shall make all arrangements they deem necessary

with land and/or building owners regarding the use of land/building for
the purpose of providing these Temporary
Facilities. All costs incurred in
connection with the purchase or lease of such land and/or building is
included in this work Item.
If the Contractor chooses to construct the Temporary Facilities on
undeveloped
land
the
Contractor shall be solely responsible for securing the Environmental
Compliance
Certificate (when applicable) along with all Government/local permits,
licenses
and
related fees required for the Engineers Temporary Facilities structures. All
structures
(temporary and/or permanent) shall meet all Government and local
building
codes
and
requirements.
Temporary Facilities shall include parking for a minimum of 8 vehicles.
Temporary
Facilities
shall
have
24
hour
security.
If
separate
office/laboratory and living quarters facilities are provided the Contractor
shall provide separate 24 hour security at each location.
The Contractor shall furnish, deliver and setup all equipment,
furniture, apparatus, appliances and supplies specified in Schedules C, D,
E, F and G of this Special Provision in the Temporary Facilities.
The Contractor shall furnish and install signage identifying the Engineers
Facilities to the public meeting the Engineers approval.
All Temporary Facilities for the Engineer shall be fully furnished, stocked
and ready for occupancy for the Engineer within forty-five (45) days
from the Notice to Proceed (NTP) and prior to commencement of the
Works.
All temporary buildings, sites, and/or facilities shall be restored to
pre-project conditions meeting the approval of the Engineer upon
completion of the Project.
A.1.1(a-1) SP
Construct Facilities for the Engineer (Field Office, Laboratory

and Quarters Building)
The Contractor shall construct one (1) combined field office/laboratory

testing facility and one (1) living quarters facility meeting the requirements
of the Drawings.
The Facilities for the Engineer will be constructed on land provided by
the
Employer.
The Contractor shall be responsible for completing the site engineering
and
securing
the
Environmental
Compliance
Certificate (when
applicable)
along
with
all
Government/local
permits,
licenses,
fees
required
to
construct
Engineers Facilities structures and related site features.
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 5
All structures shall be constructed meeting all Government and local building codes
and
requirements.
Engineers Facilities shall be fenced with at least3-m high inter-link wire with
necessary gates as approved by the Engineer.
Driveways, parking areas, sidewalk, curb and gutters shall be constructed
from Class A concrete. Disturbed areas within the fence line shall be
seeded.
Exterior lighting shall be furnished and installed around the Engineers
Facilities with a minimum of 10 lux (ft) candles
The Contractor shall provide
electricity, telephone, internet, air
conditioning, potable water, and sanitary facilities for the Engineer and staff.
In the absence of sufficient sewage disposal system, a septic tank shall
be constructed conforming to the details shown on the Drawings
and the requirements of the Department of Health for septic vaults
including drain outlets.
In the event that adequate municipal electric power is not available at the
location of the Engineers Facilities the Contractor shall furnish and
install
a
generator
cabable
of furnishing electrical power to the
Engineers Facilities at full load.
The Contractor shall furnish and install a backup generator of
sufficient capacity capable of furnishing electrical power to the Engineers
Facilities at full load.
The generator(s) shall be positioned remotely on the site
surrounded by
CMU block walls to minimize noise as approved by the Engineer.
The
Contractor shall relocate, deliver and setup all equipment,

furniture,
apparatus,
appliances and supplies specified in Schedules C, D, E, F and G of this
Special
Provision
from the Temporary Facilities to the Constructed Facilities for the Engineer
in
a
manner
not to imped daily operations of the Engineer. The Contractor shall
schedule
and
coordinate this office/living quarters relocation as approved by the
Engineer.
The Contractor shall furnish and install signage identifying the Engineers
Facilities to the public meeting the Engineers approval.
Engineers Facilities buildings and permanent site features shall be turned
over to the Philippine Government and shall become the property of the
Philippine Government at the completion of the Project.
A.1.1(b) SP
Operate and Maintain Facilities for the Engineer (Field Office,

Laboratory and Quarters Building)
The Contractor shall provide the following personnel to assist in the

operation and maintenance of the Facilities for the Engineer (Field
Office, Laboratory and Quarters Building) both temporary and constructed
for the duration of the Contract:
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 6
Provision of Office, Laboratory and Quarters Personnel

For Field Office:
1 - Secretary
1 - Clerk/Encoder
For Laboratory:
1 - Clerk/Encoder
2 - Certified Laboratory
Technician
2 - Utility person
4 - Security
Guard
4 - Laboratory Aides
1 - Utility person
For Quarters:
1 - Cook/Maid
2 - Laundry person
The Conractor is shall be responsible for making minor repairs to both
temporary and constructed
office/laborartory/quarters
space due to
normal use.
This Contractor shall be responsible for all monthly costs associated
with providing potable water, sanitary, electric, telephone and internet
services.
The Contractor shall provide adequate stock of all expendable items, such
as
laboratory
equipment accessories, light bulbs, light tubes, floor wax, brooms,
floor
mats,
insect
sprays, tissue paper and other building maintenance accessories and
supplies,
etc.,
at
all
times to ensure proper and continuous functioning of all the Engineers
Facilities.
The Contractor shall provide adequate firefighting equipment in
Engineers Facilities buildings meeting all Government and local fire safety
regulations.
The Contractor shall provide within forty five (45) days after receipt
of Notice to Proceed (NTP) a sufficient supply of all normal stationary
printing papers, laboratory and testing materials and consumable items, as
required and at the discretion of the Engineer. If the Contractor cannot
provide the articles as described or intends to supply unacceptable
substitutes, the Engineer may secure the specified articles from available
sources. The Contractor shall be duty bound to pay the expenses
incurred in the purchase of the articles or the Engineer shall have the right
to deduct the sums from any money due or which will become due to the
Contractor.
All testing and quality control works shall be done by the Contractors
Materials
Testing
and Laboratory Staff under the direct supervision of the Engineer. The
Contractor
shall
also provide qualified and experienced laboratory staff, to carry out all
materials
quality
control and all the tests specified in the Contract or as required by the
Engineer.
The
person so appointed by the Contractor to manage the laboratory
shall
be
well
experienced in the type of work to be undertaken and shall be subject to
the
approval
of
the Engineer.
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 7
A.1.1(c) SP Provision of Furniture, Fixtures, Office Equipment and

Appliances for
the Office, Laboratory and Quarters Building for the Engineer,
Schedules C and D.
The Office and Laboratory facilities shall be provided with the minimum
requirements of furniture, equipment, publications, etc., specified in
Schedule C.
Schedule C - Provision of Furniture,

Engineer's Office and Laboratory
Equipment and
Supplies
Furniture
UNIT
for
the
QTY.
1. Executive Desk, 75cm x 150cm, KD tanguile dark brown,

Each 1
non-gloss varnished with glass top, 3 drawers on right
side and center drawer provided each with locks and keys
2. Office desks, standard, 70cm x 120cm with 3 drawers on Each 12
each side and center drawer provided with locks and keys
3. Clerical desk with a master drawer, 2 side drawers and
Each 3
one open box drawer
4. Jr. Executive Revolving chair, screw type with pneumatic
Each 3
height adjustment
5. Standard Revolving chairs, screw type with pneumatic
Each 13
height adjustment
6. Steel storage cabinet, 4 adjustable shelves, fire resistant
Each 4
with locks and keys
7. Steel modular vertical filing cabinet, 4 drawers, fire Each
6
resistant with locks and keys
8. Steel horizontal plan file chest, 5 drawers with non-gloss
Each 2
paint
9. Bookshelf, KD tanguile, dark brown non-gloss varnish,
Each 4
140 cm long with 3 shelves, 32 cm deep.
10. Drafting table, KD tanguile, dark brown non-gloss varnish, Each 1
80cm x 120cm with adjustable height and drafting stool
with padded seat synthetic leather upholstery
11. Conference table for 10 person, boat design beech wood
Each 1
finish, 120 cm x 245 cm with 10 chairs, padded seat of
dark brown synthetic leather upholstery
Equipment and Supplies
1. Electronic and battery operated scientific calculator
2. Set of highway curves, metric
3. Fire extinguisher (Carbon Dioxide Type, 10 lbs)
Technical
Specifications:
of
Each
16
Set
Each
IX - 8
4. First aid kits
Set
5. Photo copier A3 & A4 sizes, 50% - 200% reducer/enlarger

capability, with complete standard provided accessories
6. Desktop computer, Intel Core Duo 2GHz, IBM compatible
with minimum 250 GB hard disk drive, 4 GB RAM
memory, DVD-ROM Drive and writer, Serial, Parallel
and
USB ports, Voltage Regulator and UPS, with ready
internet
with Original Windows 7 and MS Office. (Latest
Edition)
7. Desktop computer Intel Core Duo 2 GH2 1BM compatible
250GB Hard Disk Drive, 8 GB Ram, DVD-Rom writer,
serial
parallel and USB ports, voltage regulator UPS
internet
with ready and licensed AutoCADD and MS Office
Software
8. Portable printer DeskJet or equivalent compatible with Set
the personal computer, for both A4 and A3 paper
9. Portable Flatbed Scanner A3 size capable, high resolution
quality
10. Telefax Machine
Each
11. Digital Camera of high resolution capability (14
Each
megapixels) with 1GB memory
12. One complete set of the latest edition of the following
software complete with manuals CDs, installers, and/or
Drivers of type compatible with the PC: AutoCAD
13. Refrigerator, 10 cu. Ft.
Each
14. Telephone Land Lines (1 Phone and 1 Fax)
Line
15. Internet Wifi, modem (Office area)
Each
Each 2
16. Waste Basket
16
Each
Set3
Each 1
3
Set1
1
1
Set1
1
2
1
Publications (AASHTO)
1. Standard Specification for Transportation Material and
Method of Sampling and Testing Part I
Specification (Original)
2. Standard Specification for Transportation Materials and
Method of Sampling and Testing Part II (Original)
Each 1
Each 1
Provision of Furniture, Appliances and Supplies for Engineers Quarters

The Engineers living quarters shall be provided with the minimum
requirements of furniture, appliances, cooking wares, dinning ware, etc.
specified in Schedule D.
Schedule D - Provision
Engineers Quarters
of
Furnitures,
Appliances
and
Supplies
for
Living Room
UNIT QTY.
1. Sofa chair, 730 x 900 x 2100 mm all padded with dark Each 2
brown synthetic leather upholstery
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 9
2. Lounge Chairs, 635 x 840 mm all padded with dark brown Each2
synthetic leather upholstery
3. Center Table, 430 x 584 x 1150 mm tanguile, non-gloss
Each2
varnish
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Dining Room and Kitchen

Dining Table, 720 h x 1200 w x 3658 1mm
Each
Standard chair-padded with high back rest and arm,
tanguile, non-gloss varnish
Gas Stove, two burners, with LPG tank
Each
Ironing Table
Each
Electric Flat Iron
Each
Refrigerator, 10 cu ft.
Each
Wall Clock
Each
8. Kettles, Aluminum
Set
1
Each 10
1
1
1
1
1
2
9. Frying Pans, Stainless Steel (Big and Small)

Set
2
10. Casseroles, Aluminum (Big and Small)
Set
2
11. Set of kitchenware for at least 16 persons consisting of the Set1
following: spoons, forks, knives, drinking glass, cup and
saucers, serving plates, placemats, table cloths,
rice plates, pitchers, canisters, serving bowls,
bolos, dust pans, waste baskets and others.
Bedroom and Bathroom
1. Single Bed with spring boxers and mattress, 920 x 1800 Each 14
mm
2. Bed Side Tables, 640 x 600 x 600 mm, tanguile non-gloss Each 8
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Bed Pillows, at least 800 mm long

Pillow cases
Bed Sheets (set of two)
Blankets
Fire Extinguisher
Each
Each
Each
Each
Units
14
28
28
28
3
All furniture and equipment listed in Schedules C and D is the property of

the Contractor and shall be returned to the Contractor upon completion of
the Project.
A.1.1(d) SP
Engineer,
Provision of Office Supplies and Consumable Stores for the

Schedule E
Office supplies and consumable stores to be provided by the Contractor

shall
be,
but
not
limited to the items and quantities listed under Schedule E. Deliveries of
items
listed
in
Schedule E shall be based on estimated monthly consumption as
directed
by
the
Engineer.
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 10
Schedule E - Provision of Office Supplies and Consumable Stores

1.
Office
Bond Paper, A4
UNIT
Ream
QTY.
50
2.
Bond Paper, A3
Ream
50
3.
Bond Paper, Long
Ream
20
4.
Yellow Paper, Rule
Pad
100
5.
Brown Envelope, Long
Each
180
6.
Brown Envelope, Short
Each
180
7.
Letter Envelope, white
Box
10
Letter Envelope, brown
Box
10
9.
Record Book, 200 pages
Each
20
10. Record Book, 100 pages
Each
12
11. Mini Correction Roller, 6 m
Each
60
12. Magic Tape (18 mm x 50 mm)
Roll
100
13. Scotch Tape (3/4)
Roll
60
14. Masking Tape
Roll
60
Each
40
Box
30
17. Mechanical Pencil
Each
30
18. Ballpen (Black, Blue, Red)
Each
200
19. Paper Clip
Box
40
20. Fastener
Box
40
21. Stapler, Max HD 50, uses standard #35 staple Each
10
15. Glue Stick, 20 grams

16. Pencil Lead, 0.5mm, 2B, HB, F
22. Stapler, Max HD 12N/70, Capacity 30 to 170 sheets for Each 1

bookbinding
23. Staple Wire, Normal size #35
Each
20
24. Staple Wire, special
Each
25. Staple Wire Remover, ordinary
Each
12
26. Staple Wire Remover, special
Each
27. Puncher
Each
28. Scissors
Each
29. Technical Pen (Pt. 0.1 to 1.2)
Set
30. Technical Pen (Pt. 0.1 to 0.6)
Each
Technical
Specifications:
of
50
Office
31. Technical Pen (Pt. 0.8 to 1.0 & 1.2)
IX - 11
UNIT
Each
QTY.
40
Pair
12
33. Protractor, 360, 8 in. dia.
Each
34. Triangular Metric Scale
Each
35. Stainless Erasing Shield
Each
36. Pencil (28, HB & F)
Box
37. Marker, (assorted colors)
Box
20
Bottle
10
39. Pencil Sharpener (table mounted)
Each
40. Inkjet Cartridge, Black 42 ml
Each
60
41. Inkjet Cartridge, Tri-colour 19 ml
Each
60
42. Toner Replacement for Copier: Toner
Each
20
Pad
50
44. Waste Paper Bins (Plastic)
Each
15
45. Desk Paper Organizer Trays
Each
20
46. Whiteboard, 1200 mm x 1200 mm
Each
47. Whiteboard Marker, assorted colors
Each
30
48. Whiteboard Eraser
Each
10
49. CD Rewritable
Each
150
50. Cross-section Paper
Rolls
51. Engineers Field Book
Each
25
Each
Each
Set
Each
60
15
6
8
Each
60
32. Plastic Triangles, 45, 30 x 60
38. Technical Pen Ink
43. Squared Paper (3 x 5 mm / 5 x 5 mm)
Other Consumables
52.
53.
54.
55.
Insect Spray
Heavy Duty Flashlights
Floor Mop (Set Handle with Mophead)
Broom
56. Toilet Deodorant
All un-used office supplies and related materials listed in Schedule E is the
property
of
the Contractor shall be returned to the Contractor upon completion of the
Project.
A.1.1(e) SP
Provide Laboratory Equipment and Apparatus, Schedule F
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 12
The Contractor shall provide at site approved Laboratory Equipment

as listed under Schedule F. Equipment shall be recalibrated by approved
technician on annual basis or as required by the Engineer.
Schedule F - List of Laboratory Equipment
I
Mechanical Sieve Analysis of Soil and Analysis of Fine

and Course Aggregate
UNIT QTY.
Sieve Analysis Set, 203 mm dia. X 51mm depth, Brass,

AASHTO M92
1. 3
8 dia. Brass Sieve
Each
2. 2 8 dia. Brass Sieve
Each
3. 2
8 dia. Brass Sieve
Each
4. 1 8 dia. Brass Sieve
Each
5. 1
8 dia. Brass Sieve
Each
6.
8 dia. Brass Sieve
Each
7. "
8 dia. Brass Sieve
Each
8. 3/8
8 dia. Brass Sieve
Each
9. #4
8 dia. Brass Sieve
Each
10. #8
8 dia. Brass Sieve
Each
11. #10
8 dia. Brass Sieve
Each
12. #12
8 dia. Brass Sieve
Each
13. #16
8 dia. Brass Sieve
Each
14. #20
8 dia. Brass Sieve
Each
15. #30
8 dia. Brass Sieve
Each
16. #40
8 dia. Brass Sieve
Each
17. #50
8 dia. Brass Sieve
Each
18. #100 8 dia. Brass Sieve
Each
19. #200 8 dia. Brass Wash Sieve
Each
20. #200 8 dia. Brass Wash Sieve, 4 deep for washing
Each1
21. Brass Pan, 8 diameter x 2 deep
Each
22. Brass Cover with ring
Each
23. Galvanized Steel Pan, 24 x 24 x 2
Each
24. Galvanized Steel Pan, 24 x 24 x 4
Each
25. Volumetric Flask, 500 ml with top
Each
26. Hand operated shaker for 8 diameter sieve
Each
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 13
27. Mechanical Shaker
Each
28. Balance, sensitive to 0.50 gm, 20kg capacity with set of

weights to accommodate capacity of balance
Each 2
29. Triple Beam Balance, 2610 grams / 0.10 gr
Each
30. Volumetric Flask, 500 ml with top
Each
Bottl
e
10
Box
10
Bottl
e
Box
Bottl
e
Laboratory
31. Sodium Hydroxide Solution
32. Capping Compound
33. Sodium Sulfate
34. Calcium Carbide Reagent
35. Sand Equivalent Stock Solution
36. Color Standard Chart
Set
10
37. Distilled Water
Gal
10
38. Plastic Bags 8 x 14
II
III
Each
1200
Atterberg Limits
31. Liquid Limit Set
Set
32. Plastic Limit Set
Set
33. Balance sensitive to 0.001 gm., 1.0 kg capacity with set

weights
Each1
34. Moisture cans 150 mm dia
Each
35. Evaporating Disk
Each
Set
37. Disk, for Mercury, 150mm dia.
Each
38. Spatula
Each
39. Shrinkage Disk, 45 mm dia.
Each
40. Straight Edge, 300mm
Each
41. Glass Container, 50 mm dia.
Each
42. Glass Plate, 2 mm x 80 mm x 80 mm
Each
43. Glass Plate with Prongs
Each
Shrinkage Factor Test

36. Shrinkage Limit Set
Technical
Specifications:
of
IV
IX - 14
44. Graduated Cylinder, 25 ml
Each
45. Mercury, 500 cc
Bottl
e
46. Compaction Mold, 4 dia.
Each
47. Compaction Rammer, 5.5 lbs.
Each
48. Compaction Mold, 6 dia.
Each
49. Compaction Rammer, 10 lbs.
Each
50. Sample Extruder
Each
51. Steel Straight Edge
Each
52. Mixing Pan, 24 x 24 x 3
Each
53. Moisture Cans, 3 oz.
Doze
n
Moisture Density
Specific Gravity Test

54. Analytical Balance; 200 grams capacity, sensitive 0.001 gm Each1
55. Pycnometer Top and Jar
Each
56. Volumetric Flask, 100ml
Each
57. Thermometer, range 0 - 100 oC graduated, 1 oC
Each
Fine Aggregate Specific Gravity Test Set
Each
58. Balance, capacity 1 kg. sensitivity 0.10 gm with set of Set1

weights
59. Volumetric Flask, 500 ml
Each
60. Conical Mold, Metal
Each
61. Tamping Rod
Each
Course Aggregate Specific Gravity Test Set
Each
62. L.A. Abrasion Machine Model
Each
63. Balance, capacity 5 kg. sensitivity 0.50 gm with set of Each1

weights
64. Basket, mesh opening 3.35 or 2.86 mm dia., height 20 mm Each1
65. Steel container for wire basket
Each
66. Steel stand with rubber plate covering upper surface

VI
Sand Equivalent Value

67. Sand Equivalent Base Set compose of:
Sand
indicator
tube
Technical
Specifications:
Each1
Set
reading
Irrigator
of
IX - 15
Measuring
graduated
cylinder Siphon assembly
Measuring tin 90ml, 60mm
dia.
Funnel
Bottle, 4 liter Enamel Tray, 345mm x 265mm x 60mm
68. Sieve 4.75 (No. 4)
Each
Reagents
VII
VIII
Each
69. Anhydrous, Calcium Chloride. 500 gm
Each
70. Glycerin
Each
71. Formaldehyde
Each
California Bearing Ratio (CBR)

72. Mechanical CBR Loading Apparatus with strain gauge
proving ring and penetration piston
Set 1
73. CBR mold, 6 x 7 with perporated base plate and collar
Each6
74. Spacer Disk
Each
75. Filter Screen
Each
12
76. Swell Plate
Each
77. Dial Gauge
Each
78. Tripod attachment
Each
79. Slotted surcharge weights
Each
80. Surcharge Weight, circular
Each
81. Cutting edge
Each
82. Sand Density Apparatus
Each
83. Sand Cone and Jug
Each
84. Density Plate
Each
85. Replacement Jug
Each
86. Sampling Spoon
Each
87. One - Gallon Field Cans
Each
88. One - Inch Steel Chisel
Each
89. Sand Scoop
Each
90. Ball Hammer
Each
91. Field scale, 16 kg., 20 gm sensitivity
Each
92. Spoon Sampling
Each
Density of Soil In-place by Sand Cone Method
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX
Specific Gravity and Absorbtion Test

93. Sand Absorption Cone and Tamper
Each
94. Triple Beam Balance, 2610 grams/0.10 gr
Each
95. Micro Poise Balance; 100 grams/0.10 grams
Each
96. Density Basket
Each
97. Bucket for immersing aggregates
Each
98. Pycnometer Top and Jar
Each
Each
Each
101. Tin Pans, Rectangular, 4 x 4 x 16
Each
Compression Strength of Molded Concrete Cylinder

102. Compression Machine, Hydraulic Operated with
Set
changeable head for flexural testing
103. Air Entrapment Meter
Each
104. Capping set for Capping of Specimen
Set
XI
Making and Curing Concrete Compression and

Flexural Test Specimen The Field
105. Molds for Compression Test Specimen
Each
106. Tamping Rod, 5/8 in dia., 24 long having one
end Each
hemispherical
IX - 16
1
T
e
e
107. Small Tools

Set
Two each of shovels, pails trowels wood
float, blunted trowels, straight edge, feeler gage,
scoops, rubber mallet and rulers
108. Beam Molds for Flexural Strength Test Specimen

(per Each
AASHTO T 23)
1
R
o
Third Point (per AASHTO T 27)

Each
113.
27)
Sampling Vessel / Mixing Receptacles (See AASHTO T

1
1
Each
1
Technical
Specifications: Rehabilitation/Construction
of
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
10
1
1
16
4
2
1 (min.) or
as necessary
1 (min.) or
as necessary
1 (min.) or
IX - 17
as necessary
114. Burlap and Plastic covering for initial beam curing
Each
115. *Data logger with humidity and temperature sensors for Each 3
initial cure
XII
XIII
Concrete Coring and Saw Cutting

116. Core Drill Machine with 150 mm dia. with two drill bit
Each1
117. 4 dia., drill bit for concrete cored sample
Each
118. Concrete Saw Cutter
Each
Set
Each
121. Cement Trowel
Each
122. Armoured Thermometer
Each
123. Yield Bucket, 1/10 cu. ft.
Each
124. Yield Bucket, 1/2 cu. ft.
Each
Slump
119. Slump
Slump
120. Mixing
XIV
of Portland Cement Concrete

Test Apparatus
Cone w/ Base & graduated Tamping Rod
Pan 24 x 24 x 3
Miscellaneous Equipments
125. Laboratory Oven, Double Wall Gravity connection, 220 / 60 Each1
cy.
A.C. Cap 1 cu.m.
126. Hot Plate, 12 x 12, 220 volts
Each
127. Speedy Moisture Tester
Each
Set
each
128. Organic Impurities Test Set

129. Sand Equivalent Test Set
All laboratory equipment listed in Schedule F shall be turned over to

the
Philippine
Government and shall become the property of the Philippine
Government
at
the
completion of the Project. Laboratory equipment shall be delivered
to
the
DPWH
Regional Office.
A.1.1(f) SP
Provide and Maintain Communication Equipment - Cellular Phone
The Contractor shall furnish and deliver to the Engineer cellular phone,
Nokia brand (open line) or its equivalent within forty five (45) days
from the notice to Proceed (NTP) and prior to Commencement of the
Works.
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 18
All expenses relative to the supply, delivery and use of cellular phones
shall be borne by the Contractor until the completion of the Contract.
All cell phones are the property of the Contractor and
returned to the Contractor at the completion of the Project.
A.1.2(a) SP
shall
be
Provide 4x4 Pick-up for the Engineer
The Contractor shall provide and maintain brand new 4 x 4 - 4 door Pick-
up Crew Cab Type, 4 cylinder with engine displacement of not less than 2500
cc, diesel powered, air- conditioned, 4-wheel drive or equivalent.
The Contractor shall provide comprehensive insurance for the
vehicles to cover accident, loss or damage of the vehicle, Third
Party Liability (TPL) coverage, duly registered and complying in all
aspects to other legal requirements. The documents evidencing
registration and insurance initially and succeeding years, as they
become due and renewable shall be handed over to the Engineer.
Vehicle(s) shall be delivered within forty five (45) days from the Notice
to Proceed (NTP) and prior to the commencement of the Works.
All vehicles shall be turned over to the Philippine Government and shall
become the property of the Philippine Government at the completion of
the Project. Vehicles shall be delivered to the DPWH Regional Office.
A.1.2(b) SP
Operate and Maintain 4x4 Pick-up for the Engineer
The Contractor shall operate, maintain and provide a professional

driver for each vehicle for the exclusive use of the Engineer. All
drivers
shall
have
a
professional drivers license, be experienced,
competent and subject to the approval of the Engineer. Operation and
maintenance of the vehicle shall include fuel, oil, car wash and expenses
for the wear, tear and repairs for the duration of the project.
The Contractor shall provide a substitute vehicle when a vehicle is taken
out of service for repairs.
A.1.3(a) SP
Assistance to the Engineer - Provision of Survey
Equipment, Schedule G
Add the following at the end of this Subsection:
The Contractor shall provide the following survey
exclusive use of the Engineer and his representatives.
Technical
Specifications:
equipment
of
for
the
IX - 19
The surveying instruments shall be brand new, of the latest design and
manufactured
by
a reputable manufacturer acceptable to the Engineer. The Contractor shall
submit
to
the
Engineer for approval the proposed manufacturer, type and models
with
parts
performance catalogues and manufacturers warranty prior to
purchase of the
instruments.
Schedule G - Provision of Survey Equipment
Electronic Total Station, complete set
(w/ tripod,
2 prism), 30X2Each
telescope magnification with 2x plug-in camcorder NIMH GEB
111, GKL 111 charger, RS232 interface cable for date
transfer, GDF 111 Tribrach, laser plummet incorporation
Automatic level complete with tripod 3x magnification, +/-0.80 mm 2Each
standard deviation, erect image telescope, 0.50 m
shortest focusing distance, with built-in compensator of less
than
0.3
setting
accuracy, fully waterproof and dust
resistant with a horizontal circle that can be in grads or
degrees and aluminum tripod.
Leveling rod (5 m. ht.) aluminum
Each
50 m Fiberglass tape
Each
5 m Carpenters Tape
Each
Survey Umbrellas
Each
Range Pole
Each
This item shall also include the required periodic maintenance of provided
survey
instruments.
The survey equipment listed in Schedule G shall be turned over to
the
Philippine
Government and shall become the property of the Philippine
Government
at
the
completion of the Project. Survey equipment shall be delivered to the
DPWH
Regional
Office.
A.1.3(b) SP
Assistance to the Engineer - Provision of Survey Personnel
Add the following at the end of this Subsection:

The Contractor shall provide the survey personnel who shall be working
for and under the direct supervision and control of the Engineer and his
representatives.
The survey personnel shall be competent, qualified and experienced in
their position and shall be consist of the following:
Provision of Survey Personnel

2 - Instrument man (Licensed professional surveys and/or Civil Engineer)
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 20
2 - Levelman
1 - CADD Operator
8 - Survey Aides
The Contractor shall provide his separate team to assist his own operation.
A.1.4 SP
Progress Photographs
Monthly Progress Photographs, Proof prints and Electronic file.

The
Contractor
shall provide a set of proof prints for each colored

photograph
taken.
The Engineer will select from the proof print copies to be included in
the
monthly
progress report of the Engineer. Twenty (20) copies of the photographs
selected
shall
be printed by the Contractor in A4 bond paper or any paper and in the
arrangement
as
directed by the Engineer. Electronic file in CD shall also be submitted
together
with
the
proof prints.
The Contractor shall follow these standard procedures for taking progress
photographs:
1. Baseline photographs shall be taken at intervals approved by the
Engineer with a
signboard indicating the name of the project, station and date taken.
These shall be
taken prior to commencement or any work
2. Photographs shall be taken at an angle showing the longitudinal axis
of the roadway
with as much as possible a distinguishing landmark (permanent)
in the picture
periphery.
3. Photographs shall be taken on the same points at the same angle
before, during and
after the completion of the particular stretch. The During
photographs shall
include equipment being used.
4. These
shall
apply also
and
miscellaneous items.
to
Bridges,
Culverts,
Protection
other
Works
5. The Engineer shall designate the points where the photographs are to be taken.
6. The before, during and after photographs shall be properly labeled and
arranged
in
a
page for ready comparison.
A.2 SP
Method of Measurement
The work associated with the following items shall be measured as

specified
below
completed in accordance with the drawings, specifications and as
accepted
by
the
Engineer.
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 21
Temporary Facilities for the Engineer (Field Office,

Quarters Building) shall be measured per Month.
Laboratory
and
Construct Facilities for the Engineer (Field Office,

Quarters Building) shall be measured as a Lump Sum
Laboratory
and
Operate and Maintain Facilities for the Engineer (Field Office, Laboratory
and Quarters Building) shall be measured per Month.
Provision of Furniture, Fixtures, Office Equipment and Appliances for
the
Office,
Laboratory and Quarters for the Engineer, Schedules C and D shall be
measured
per
Month.
Provision of Office Supplies and Consumable Stores for the Engineer,
Schedule E shall be measured per Month.
Provide Laboratory Equipment and Apparatus, Schedule F
measured as a Lump Sum.
shall be
Provide and Maintain Communication Equipment - Cellular Phone shall be

measured per Unit Month.
Provide 4x4 Pick-up for the Engineer shall be measured per Each vehicle.
Operate and Maintain 4x4 Pick
measured per Vehicle Month.
up
for
the
Engineer
Assistance to the Engineer - Provision of

Schedule G shall be measured as a Lump Sum.
Survey
Assistance to the Engineer

measured per Month.
Personnel
Provision
of
Survey
shall
be
Equipment
shall
be
Progress Photographs shall be measured per Month.

A.3 SP
Basis of Payment
The accepted quantities measured as specified in Method of Measurement

shall
be
paid
for at the Contract unit price at the Pay Item listed below that is
included
in
the
Bill
of
Quantities.
Payment for work items listed below shall be full compensation for
all materials, equipment, labour, delivery equipment, tools and incidentals
necessary to complete the work
and/or
furnish
the
required
equipment/apparatus/vehicles/furniture/staff as outlined under these work
Items.
Payment shall be made under the following Items:
Technical
Specifications:
of
Pay Item
Description
A.1.1(a) SP
(Field
Temporary Facilities for the Engineer
Office, Laboratory and Quarters

Building)
A.1.1(a-1) SP Construct Facilities for the Engineer
(Field
Building)
IX - 22
Unit
of
Measurement
Month
Lump Sum
Month
A.1.1(b) SP
A.1.1(c) SP
A.1.1(d) SP
Operate and Maintain Facilities for the

Engineer
(Field
Office,
Laboratory
and
Quarters
Building)
Provision of Furniture, Fixtures, Office
Equipment and Appliances for the
Building
for
the
Engineer,
Schedules C and D.
Provision of Office Supplies and
Consumable Stores for the
Engineer, Schedule E
A.1.1(e) SP
Provide Laboratory Equipment and

Apparatus, Schedule F
A.1.1(f) SP
Provide and Maintain Communication

Equipment - Cellular Phone
A.1.2(a) SP
Provide 4x4 Pick-up for the Engineer
A.1.2(b) SP
Operate and Maintain 4x4 Pick-up for the

Engineer
Assistance to the Engineer - Provision
A.1.3(a) SP
of
A.1.3(b) SP
of
A.1.4 SP
Photographs
Survey Equipment, Schedule G

Assistance to the Engineer - Provision
Survey Personnel
Progress
Month
Month
Lump Sum
Unit Month
Each
Vehicle Month
Lump Sum
Month
Month
Technical
Specifications:
of
PART B
IX - 23
OTHER GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
B1 SP
Office, Shops, Stores and Workmens Accommodation for Contractor
Insert the following after the last paragraph of Section B.1
B.1 SP
Contractors Facilities
B.1.1 SP
General
The Contractor shall provide and maintain such Contractor facilities

consisting of offices, stores, workshops, latrines, housing and mess
accommodations for his labour staff as necessary. The selection of the
site shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be located a
minimum of 50 meters from a residential area approved by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements they deem
necessary with land and/or building owners for the purpose of
erecting and/or renting the Contractors facilities including laydown,
staging, material/equipment storage, material processing, etc. and all
costs
incurred
in
connection
with
purchase or
lease
of
such
land/building(s) shall be at the Contractors expense.
The Contractors facility compound shall be located distinct and
separate from the Engineers Facilities. The Contractor shall fence off the
Contractors store area.
The Contractor shall be solely responsible for securing the Environmental
Compliance Certificate (ECC) if applicable and all permits and licenses
necessary for the Contractors facilities he deems necessary to execute
the work.
B.1.2 SP
Housing for Labour
The Contractor shall provide and maintain at his own expense living
accommodation and amenities for all staff and labour employed by
him directly or indirectly in connection with the project, except for
those recruited from the immediate vicinity of the works. Each structure
for living accommodation shall be provided with lights, potable
water, efficient sanitation and refuse disposal system, cooking areas
and equipment, and appropriate furnishings. All living accommodation
shall be maintained in a clean and sanitary condition at all times.
B.1.3 SP
Land Required for the Works
1. All necessary negotiations, agreements and payments for land

for purposes,
including that required for the Contractors facilities, shall be the
responsibility of
the Contractor.
2. Further to Clause 17.1 of the Conditions of Contract the Contractor
shall indemnify
the Employer and the Engineer against any claims or proceedings

resulting from the
occupancy and use of such areas of additional land.
Technical
Specifications:
of
B.1.4 SP
IX - 24
Temporary Structures and Facilities
All
structures
temporary
and/or
permanent
shall
Government and local building codes and/or requirements.
B.1.5 SP
meet
all
Storage of Materials
Materials shall be stored in a manner that ensures preservation of

their specified qualities and fitness for the Works. They shall be placed on
hard, clean, dry surfaces and where necessary shall be placed under cover.
The arrangements for storage of materials shall facilitate inspection by the
Engineer.
The centers of storage areas shall be raised
sides as required providing proper drainage.
B.1.6 SP
and
sloped
to
the
Working Areas
The Contractor shall make all arrangements, inclusive of payment if

necessary, for use of any land required for working areas outside the Right-of-Way and the Employer will not accept any liability in connection with the
use of such land.
Working areas provided by the Contractor for his own use shall
conform to all applicable standard and codes set by the Government of
the Philippines (GOP) including sanitary requirements of the Department of
Health.
The construction, operation and maintenance of Contractors working
area shall be subject to inspection and approval by the Engineer.
B.1.7 SP
Site for Plant and Other Uses
The Contractor shall select, arrange for and, if necessary, pay for use
of
sites
for
all
mixing plants for Portland cement concrete, for bituminous concrete, for
the
storage
of
equipment, materials for office buildings, or other uses necessary for the
execution
of
the Works.
B.1.8 SP
Screening and Crushing Plants
The Contractor shall not locate screening, crushing or similar potentially

polluting plant closer than 200 meters to any residence and/or settlement,
unless such plant is fitted with dust suppression equipment and be
operated and maintained at all times in conformity with the
manufacturers specifications, instruction and manuals or as approved
by the Engineer.
B.1.9 SP
Operation of Crushing Plant and Stock Yard
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 25
The Contractor shall locate plants and stock yard away from
residential
and environmentally sensitive areas. Provide adequate
pollution control devices, air filters, etc. and the equipment shall be
operated during daytime only.
Before any land belonging to the Government or to a private landowner
is used for any purpose in connection with the prosecution of the Works,
the Engineers approval shall be obtained.
B.1.10 SP
Removal and Reinstatement of Land
On completion of the Contract, or earlier, all plant and any other

encumbrances shall be removed, the site properly cleaned, and restored
to pre-project conditions meeting the Engineers approval.
1. Upon Completion of the Project the Contractor shall remove all temporary
facilities
including but not limited to offices, buildings, camps, trash, spoils,
latrines,
storage
and holding yards, workshops, so that the land is returned to at least
its
previous
original pre-project condition and, in the case of agricultural
land,
potential
productivity. Clearance and reinstatement shall include but not be
limited
to
tasks
such as the removal and disposal of all wastes, disinfection of
sewage
disposal
systems, demolition and removal or unwanted structures, removal of
metallic
and
concrete debris, removal and disposal of any soil contaminated by
diesel,
bitumen
or
other polluting materials, ripping to relieve compaction, grading,
replacement
of
topsoil, and establishment of vegetative cover, as approved by the
Engineer.
2. Where improvements have been made such as land filling or installation
of
boreholes or construction of buildings these may be retained
subject
to
the arrangement with the landowner if it is privately
owned.
3. The Employer reserves the right to inspect the site of any facilities established
or
used by the Contractor in connection with the Works and to
undertake any corrective measures necessary to reinstate the land,
and to cover the cost from monies due or to become due to the
Contractor.
4. Payment of any retention monies shall be dependent on the Engineers
confirmation
that clearance and reinstatement have been carried out satisfactorily.
B.3
Measurement and Payment
Add the following before the first paragraph:

The work associated with B.1 SP Contractors Facilities shall not be
measured and paid for separately and is considered subsidiary and
included in other pay items in the Contract listed in the Bill of
Quantities.
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 26
SUPPLEMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS
SPL B.5
Supplemental General Requirements
This Supplemental General Requirements shall be in addition to Part B Other General

Requirements of the DPWH Standard Specifications, 2004 Edition; Volume
II - Highway,
Bridges and Airports as amended by Department Orders. It shall consist
of providing
the following:
SPL B.5.1
Stipulation Relating to Contract Documents
In connection with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall observe

and comply with the following stipulations:
1. All information is for the exclusive use of the Employer, Engineer and the
Contractor
and shall be treated as private and confidential.
2. The data in the Contract Documents shall be obtained, recorded and
interpreted in
accordance with accepted Engineering principles, practices and
methodology for purposes of design and shall be considered as the
basis and reference in securing bids and/or determining working
activities and construction operations. It is to be assumed that
conditions different to those shown in the Contract Documents may be
encountered, and it is the Contractors responsibility to conduct
his own field examination and investigations to determine the
nature and extent of the works required. The submission of a Bid
shall be construed as sufficient evidence that the Contractor has
performed such examination and investigations.
3. It shall be anticipated that minor revisions to alignment, location, section and
details
may be made during the work. The Contractor shall perform the work
in
accordance
with the intent of the Drawings and Specifications and, shall take no
advantage
of
any error or omission in the Drawings or discrepancy between the
Drawings
and
Specifications. The Engineer shall make such corrections and
interpretations
deemed necessary for the fulfillment of the Specifications and
Drawings.
Any
deviation from the drawings due to field conditions that is not
anticipated
shall
be
determined by the Engineer and authorized in writing. Finished surfaces,
in
all
cases,
shall conform to the lines, grades and typical sections. Dimensions
shown
on
the
Drawings are subject to adjustment by the Engineer during construction.
4. If during construction of the Works, there should exist variations from the
data
contained in the Contract Documents, it shall be the Contractors
responsibility
to
forthwith notify the Engineer in writing of such variations, who in turn
shall
issue
also in writing appropriate instructions. Unless evidenced by a written
instruction,
the Employer will not entertain any claims by the Contractor
arising
from
such
variations.
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 27
5. All drawings prepared by the Contractor and submitted to the

Engineer for his
approval shall conform to the standard format of the Contract and
shall be drawn
using Auto CADD, (latest version). Electronic files in AutoCAD shall
be submitted
together with the drawings.
SPL B.5.2
Additional Requirements Relating to the Contract Works
SPL B.5.2.1
Removal,
and Site Facilities
Relocation
and
Inclusion
of
Public
Utilities
Where removal, relocation and inclusion of public utilities and site

facilities are essential to the Works under the Contract, and when such
works are not to be executed by the Contractor but by the respective
owners of the utilities/facilities, the Contractor shall recognize the following
stipulations:
1. The programme for execution of the Works to be submitted as
required by the
Conditions of Contract shall be the basis for determination of any
negotiations or
working arrangements to be entered into by the Employer with
the particular
owners of public utilities and site facilities and it is therefore
essential that the
Contractor provides details of the priorities and sequences of his
construction
activities and operations and any particulars that may be required by
the Engineer
concerning the said programme.
2. No work shall commence on any parts, portions or sections of the
Project Site that
may affect or disturb the functions or the original condition of any
public utility or
site facility unless the Contractor has first secured written
permission from the
Engineer.
3. No expense shall be borne by the Contractor in connection with
the removal,
relocation or inclusion of public utilities and site facilities except for
the purpose of
any claims from the owners of the utilities as a result of any
damages or injuries
caused by the Contractor or any of his Sub-Contractors.
SPL B.5.2.2
Provisions on Materials Sources
Information as to the locations, availability and suitability of construction

materials as contained in the Geotechnical Report is made available
for examination, but

into consideration:
the Contractor is cautioned to take the following
1. The Geotechnical Report does not form part of the Contract

Documents. The data
contained therein is to be considered as a guide for possible material
sources. The
Contractor shall be solely responsible for making all arrangements
for obtaining
required materials including provisions for access thereto.
2. The Contractor shall determine the respective transportation
requirements from the
supply source to the work site. No additional payments shall be
allowed to cover the
cost of haulage. All haulage costs shall be included in the respective
bid items.
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 28
3. The Contractor shall determine the amount of handling and removal

of overburden
from the borrow pits or quarry sites and the cost and amount of work
required to
crush, screen stockpile and related spoil disposal in accordance with
the Contract
Documents. All such costs shall be included in the respective bid items.
4. The Contractor is permitted to obtain aggregates from approved
Government-
owned quarries, rivers and/or other sites subject to Government
and local
regulations. However, this shall not relieve him of responsibility for
charges levied, if
any, by other agencies. If payment of taxes, duties or other charges is
demanded by
such Agency the charges shall be considered included in the bid
items pertinent to
the quarried materials.
If probable sites or sources of materials are shown on the drawings, it
is
understood
that the information given is only for the purpose of indicating
their
approximate
locations and distances to the Project Site and to provide the Contractor
with
reference
locations.
SPL B.5.2.3
Other Material Sources (Contractors)
The Contractor may elect to secure materials from sources other

than those sites designated in Geotechnical Report subject to approval
by the Engineer. The granting of such approval shall be subject to all
relevant material, specifications and testing requirements outlined in
the Contract.
SPL B.5.2.4
Approval of Materials
Unless otherwise required by the Engineer prior to ordering materials or

manufactured
articles to be incorporated in the Permanent Works, the Contractor shall
submit
for
approval a complete description of the materials or articles and the
names
of
the
suppliers. The Contractor shall submit samples and certificates for
approval
by
the
Engineer in accordance with the testing requirements outlined in the
Contract.
SPL B.5.2.5
Notice of Operations
The Contractor, when required by the Engineer, shall supply in writing

all
pertinent
information regarding the locations from which materials are being
obtained
or
fabricated.
No element of the Permanent Works shall be undertaken without
the Engineers approval. Full and complete written notice shall be given
to the Engineer in advance of the operation early enough for the
Engineer to make such arrangements as he may deem necessary for
inspection of the work.
SPL B.5.2.6
Contractors Responsibility for Work
Where Engineer approval is required under the specifications, approval

shall not relieve the Contractor of his duties, obligations or responsibilities
under the Contract.
Technical
Specifications:
of
SPL B.5.2.7
IX - 29
Standard of Workmanship
All workmanship shall meet the requirements of the Contract, and shall
be carried out to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
SPL B.5.2.8
Protection of Work from the Weather
The Contractor shall, at his own expense, carefully protect all work and
materials from damage by the weather.
SPL B.5.2.9
Use of Acoustical Screens
The Contractor shall furnish and install temporary acoustical screens as

directed
by
the
Engineer to minimize noise near noise-sensitive areas such as schools
and
places
or
worship.
SPL B.5.2.10
Templates and Straight Edges
Sufficient metal templates shall be supplied by the Contractor for his own
use
and
to
the
Engineer to check the finished surfaces of the pavement structures.
These
templates
shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval. The templates used
to
control
the
work shall be maintained at all times in a condition to produce
the
correct
cross
sections, profile and shall be checked regularly and, if necessary, repaired
or adjusted.
The Contractor shall furnish sufficient straight edges, as may
specified by the Engineer, to check the surface of the pavement.
SPL B.5.2.11
be
Construction Procedures
Prior to the commencement of any work item the Contractor shall inform
the
Engineer
as to the starting date, work schedule and general procedures for this
operation.
The
Engineer shall, in turn, issue the necessary certification that permission is
granted
and
work can proceed as requested. Any variation in the sequence of work
as
proposed
in
the work programme required by the Conditions of Contract must be
called
to
the
attention of the Engineer. Contractor shall notify Engineer a minimum of
two
(2)
days
prior to any additional subsurface investigation or adjustment in design.
SPL B.5.2.12
At the
Statistical Report
end of
each month,
the
Contractor,
at no
additional
cost,
shall
furnish
the Engineer the following information in a form and
number of copies to be determined by the Engineer:
1. Physical Progress Reports for the month or period and estimated
progress
for
the
succeeding month or period.
2. Completion schedule (target/actual) based on approved construction programme.
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 30
3. A tabulation of Employees showing the superintending staff and the

number
of
each
labour classification employed by the Contractor during the month or
period.
4. A listing of the equipment utilized for performance of the Works
during
the
month
or period, detailing those operational and those under repair.
SPL B.5.2.13
Equipment
The Contractor shall furnish

exclusively for the Contract.
all
necessary
equipment
required,
All owned and/or pledged equipment shall be listed in detail to include

the number, brand, serial number, capacity and present location.
Proof of ownership or leased agreement will be required for equipment,
machinery and plant. Evidence of ownership shall be in the form of
receipts, deeds of sale, etc., without prejudice
to
inspection
and
verification of any duly authorized representatives of the Employer and the
Engineer.
The Contractor shall identify each piece of equipment, other than hand
tools, by means of an identifying number plainly stenciled or
stamped on the equipment in a conspicuous location, and shall
furnish the Engineer the list. When ordered by the Engineer, the
Contractor shall discontinue the operation of unsafe equipment and
remove it from the work site.
SPL B.5.2.14 Maintenance of Existing Roads
Upon receipt of the Notice to Proceed (NTP) and issuance of possession
of Site, the Contractor shall assume the responsibility for maintaining
the road sections scheduled for improvement under this Contract. The
Contractor shall be required to repair, at his own expense, any damage
to any roads or structures resulting from construction traffic associated
with the Contractor passing over such roads or structures. Maintenance
and repair work shall be carried out in accordance with relevant
specifications or as instructed by the Engineer. Watering of gravel roads
when necessary shall be made to reduce dust and nuisance to the
public.
In relation to construction execution, traffic regulation such as load limit,
traffic rules, etc., shall be strictly in accordance with the traffic law of
the Philippines and shall be strictly observed. In case of any damage to
existing road or structure caused by the Contractor, the Contractor shall
repair the damaged portion without delay at his own expense to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
Any
failure
of
the Contractor in complying with the obligations for

maintenance
and
traffic control of the existing road as specified above shall entitle the
Engineer
to
carry
out such works as he deems necessary and to charge the Contractor
with
the
full
costs
thereof
plus fifteen (15) percent of such cost, which shall be

deducted
from
any
expenses due or which may become due to the Contractor under the
Contract.
SPL B.5.2.15
Transport of Contractors Equipment and Materials
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 31
1. Where the Contractor intends to use a particular route for the

haulage of large
quantities of materials he shall consult well in advance with
any affected
communities and submit in advance for the Engineers approval a plan
including but
not limited to the proposed route, the existing condition of the
pavement and
bridges, the estimated number and type of vehicle movements
per day, a
programme for monitoring the condition of the pavement and
structures, and
measures for limiting vehicle speeds and dust nuisance in built-up areas.
2. The Engineer reserves the right to disallow certain haul routes should
these
in
his
opinion cause or be likely to cause unreasonable nuisance or hazards to
the public.
3. The Engineers approval will not relieve the Contractors obligations
specified in the
Contract Documents to prevent and repair damage to roads or
his liability for
compensation for any accidents caused by the Contractors work.
SPL B.5.2.16
Quality Assurance Management System
The Contractor shall be solely responsible for ensuring that the quality of
materials and workmanship is in accordance with the requirements of
this specification and the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall
carry out his own inspection of materials and workmanship and satisfy
himself that they meet the Specifications before submitting them to
the Engineer for acceptance of payment.
The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer within 30 days
of Notice to Proceed (NTP) a written Quality Assurance Management
System Manual in accordance with ISO 9000 series of standards which
shall include the following:
Project organization chart with roles, duties
responsibilities. Schedule
Equipment
selection
process
Local
staff
selection process Project
submittals
Project documentation
Manufactured
Materials
Quality
Control
Quality
Control
Plan/Procedures
Purchased materials Quality Control Plan
Procedures Field Inspections
Environmental
Conditions
Monitoring
Programmes Project produced (Manufactured
Materials)
and
This shall show the Contractors site organization with respect to quality
assurance
and
shall demonstrate the Contractors commitment to checking and
reporting
on
the
quality of materials and workmanship. It shall also show how the
system
will
be
extended to suppliers and sub-Contractors and how all elements of the
system
will
be
documented.
The Contractor shall, before placing any order for materials for incorporation in
the
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 32
Works, submit for the information of the Engineer names of the firms
from whom he proposes to obtain such materials. He shall give
descriptions, manufacturers specifications, quality, weight, strength and
origin of the materials, as applicable, and confirm the quantities to be
procured. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with samples of
materials when requested, details of the suppliers quality assurance
system and, where appropriate, manufacturers certificates of recent
tests carried out on similar materials. In accordance with the Conditions
of the Contract the Engineer may require visits to the facilities of any
manufacturer or supplier.
The Contractor shall carry out trials of all concrete mixes,
bituminous mixes and mixtures of others materials to demonstrate
that,
not
only
are
the
constituents
in compliance with the
specifications, but that the resultant mixtures also comply. He shall show
as part of the Quality Assurance system the relationship between trials
and job mixes and his proposals for maintaining the quality of all mixes on
site.
SPL B.5.2.17
Shop Drawings Material Product Submittals and Samples:
After
checking and verifying all field measurements and after

complying
with
the
applicable procedures specified in the Contract Documents, the Contractor
shall
submit
to the Engineer for review and approval in accordance with the accepted
schedule
of
Project Submittals submission six copies of all shop drawings, and/or
material/product
submittal which will bear a stamp or specific written indication that the
Contractor
has
satisfied the Contractors responsibilities under the Contract Documents
with
respect
to
the review of the submissions. The data shown on the shop drawings
will
be
complete
with respect to dimensions, specified performance and design criteria,
materials
and
similar data to enable the Engineer to review the information as required.
The
Contractor shall also submit to the Engineer for review and

approval
with
such
promptness as to cause no delay in the works, all samples required by
the
Contract
Documents. All samples will have been checked by and accompanied
by
a
specific
written indication that the Contractor has satisfied the Contractors
responsibilities
under the Contract Documents with respect to the review of the
submission
and
will
be
identified clearly as to material supplier, pertinent data such as catalog
numbers
and
the use for which intended.
Before submission of each shop drawing or sample the Contractor
shall have determined and verified all quantities, dimensions,

specified performance criteria, installation requirements, materials,
catalog numbers and similar data with respect thereto and reviewed
and/or coordinated each shop drawing material/product submittal or
sample with other shop drawings material/product submittal and samples
and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents.
At the time of each submission, the Contractor shall provide specific
written notice of each variation from the
Contract
Documents
included
in
the shop drawings material/product submittal for review
and approval of by the Engineer.
The
Engineer
will review and approve with reasonable promptness

shop
drawings
material/product submittal and samples. Engineers review and approval
will be only
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 33
for
conformance with the design concept of the Project and for

compliance
with
the
information given in the Contract Documents and shall not extend to
means,
methods,
techniques, sequences or procedures of construction (except where a
specific
means,
method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction is indicated in
or
required
by
the Contract Documents) or to safety precautions or programs
incident
thereto.
The
review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate
approval
of
the
assembly in which the item functions. The Contractor shall make
corrections
required
by the Engineer and shall return the required number of corrected
copies
of
shop
drawings and submit as required new samples for review and approval.
The
Contractor
shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the
correction
called
for
by the Engineer on previous submittals.
The Engineers review and approval of shop drawings material/product
submittals or samples shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility
for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless
the Contractor has in writing called the Engineer s attention each such
variation in writing at the time of submission and the Engineer has
given written approval of each such variation by a specific written
notification
thereof
incorporated
in
or
accompanying
the
shop
drawing material/product submittal or sample approval; nor will
any approval by the Engineer relieve the Contractor from responsibility
for errors and omissions in the shop drawings product/materials
submittal.
SPL B.5.2.18
Submittal of As-Built Drawings
As-Built drawings shall be prepared by the Contractor in AutoCAD (latest

version) on approved reproducible film for the whole of the Works. The
drawings shall be kept up- to-date as the work proceeds with details
completed for each item of the Works immediately after work has
been completed. Six copies of As-Built drawings shall be submitted by
the Contractor together with the electronic file within 14 Calendar days
after the first day of the Defects Liability Period.
As-built drawings shall denote all changes and/or deviations from the drawings.
At a minimum the As-built drawing shall denote the following:
Horizontal locations and vertical elevation of Roadway
centerline Drainage facilities locations and inverts
Utility locations
Bridge
locations
and
elevations
Slide
locations
and
elevations
SPL B.5.2.19
Record Documents
The Contractor shall maintain in a safe place at the site one record copy of
all Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Written Amendments, Change
Orders, Work Directive Changes, Field
Orders
and
written
interpretations/clarifications and submittals/shop drawings in good order.
Upon completion of the Project, these record documents shall be
delivered to the Engineer.
Technical
Specifications:
of
SPL B.5.2.20
IX - 34
Clearing the Site
Upon completion of all construction operations, the entire roadway or

roadways shall be finished as specified in these specifications. Stockpiling
of materials on the finished construction area and drifting of materials
across the pavement will not be permitted. The finished pavement shall be
cleaned of all dirt and foreign material.
The slopes of embankments, excavations, road approaches, road
connections,
ditches, channel changes, and materials sites within or
adjacent to the project boundaries shall be finished to the lines and
grades called for by the plans. Ditches and channels within or adjacent
to the project boundaries shall be cleared of debris and
obstructions. Sewers, culverts and other drainage facilities and their
appurtenant structures constructed under the contract shall be
cleaned out. All stones and other waste materials exposed on slopes,
which are liable to become loosened, shall be removed and disposed of.
All materials and debris resulting from clearing and grubbing operations
not previously remove, shall be disposed of.
All materials resulting from the above specified finishing operations shall
become the property of the Contractor and shall be disposed of
outside the project boundaries unless otherwise permitted by the special
provisions.
Disposal of materials outside the highway right of way shall be in
accordance with the following provisions. The entire roadway and right of
way shall be left in a neat and presentable condition.
1. Spoil disposal sites will fall into two categories:
a)
borrow pits and quarries, whether pre-existing or opened-up
specifically
for
the
road contract;
b) other sites where spoil disposal will not result in a potential
safety
hazard,
instability, erosion, or water management problems.
Preference shall be given to the backfilling of borrow pits and quarries as
an aid to site restoration.
Local communities must give their consent before any spoil disposal
site
shall
be
permitted.
2.
3. No spoil disposal sites shall be located:
a) on level irrigated rice fields;

b) on slopes of more than 25 degrees;
c) where geological structures are unfavorable to stability (e.g. in
fault
or
shear
zones or where structural planes are dipping out of the slope);
d) on-slopes that are being subjected to stream channels;
e) on spurs above
converging stream channels;
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 35
f) on talus slopes or in any situation where they might be expected

to
load
slope
along a failure plane;

g) in any water course or drainage line whether permanent or seasonal; and
h) in or adjacent to the Samar Island Natural Park.
Disposal sites should also avoid forest, cultivated land, active slope failure
areas,
gullies,
areas of groundwater discharge, sources of drinking or irrigation water,
areas
where
failure of the spoil tip would endanger or harm the Works or buildings
or
cultivated
land, and areas where permanent stabilization of the disposal area would be
difficult.
4. The Engineer may restrict, prohibit, or otherwise direct the Contractor to modify
the
spoil disposal proposals if, in the Engineers
likely to cause environmental damage.
opinion,
they
are
5. The Contractor shall prepare each approved disposal site by:
a) marking the boundaries of the site with white paint so that the
perimeter
is
clearly visible;
b) erecting a sign at the entrance to the site with the words Road
Project
Disposal
Area;
c) carrying out appropriate and effective drainage works to the
satisfaction
of
the
Engineer;
d) constructing spoil retention structures around the perimeter as approved by
the
Engineer.
6. The Contractor should ensure that no drainage or concentrated runoff occurs
down
the face of any spoil disposal site.
7. Spoil shall be placed in shallow layers and compacted to 90% relative density
or as
otherwise directed by the Engineer.
8. The Contractor shall monitor the condition of each disposal site and shall
submit a
report to the Engineer at least monthly and after any precipitation
event exceeding 100mm in 24 hours to include:
a) volume of materials disposed at site;
b) any signs of movement or instability;
c) any movement of spoil beyond the perimeter of the site;
d) any erosion and sediment deposition caused by runoff from the site.
9. The Contractor shall modify
his disposal practice and/or carry out remedial
works
to prevent
erosion, instability or uncontrolled runoff as directed by

the
Engineer.
The Engineer may direct that a disposal site be closed to prevent
possible
or
further
environmental damage and will then agree an alternative disposal site
or
sites
with
the Contractor.
10. When
ordered by the Engineer that any disposal site shall be

closed
to
prevent
environmental damage or, in the opinion of the Engineer, it has
reached its capacity,
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 36
the Contractor shall render the site permanently stable by

means of shaping, drainage, structural conservation measures and
planting to the satisfaction of the Engineer, and in addition restore
the area so that it satisfies any agreement with the landowner and
complies to applicable governing laws.
SPL B.5.2.21 Meetings and Conferences
As
often as possible, or as the necessity arises, meetings/conferences

shall
be
held
to
discuss matters of detail, i.e. construction sequences, progress,
materials,
procedures,
temporary works, quality control and similar subjects pertinent to the
satisfactory
execution of the Works, or to discuss problems arising out of the
implementation
of
the
Project.
Such meetings/conferences shall not be less frequent than twice a month
and shall be attended by the Project Manager of the Contractor, the
Engineer or his representative and by the Employer or his representative.
Minutes of the Meetings/Conferences shall be officially documented by
the Contractor, confirmed or concurred to by all parties, copies thereof
submitted to the Engineer and Employer, properly dated and numbered.
The Contractor shall maintain in a safe place at the site one record copy of
all Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Written Amendments, Change
Orders, Work Directive Changes, Field
Orders
and
written
interpretations/clarifications and submittals/shop drawings in good order.
Upon completion of the Project, these record documents shall be
delivered to the Engineer.
SPL B.5.3
The work associated with SPL B.5 Supplemental General Requirements shall
not be
measured and paid for separately and is considered subsidiary and included
in other
pay items in the Contract listed in the Bill of Quantities.
SPL B.6
Compliance with Environmental and Social Management Plan
Environmental and Social Safeguards

The following Environmental Protection and Social Safeguard Clauses are
to be read in conjunction with the remainder of the Contract Documents.
Technical
Specifications:
of
SPL B.6.1
IX - 37
General Provisions
The Contractor shall be required to follow the IFC Performance

Standards on Environmental and Social Sustainability, January 2012.
The
Contractor shall take all necessary measures and precautions to

ensure
that
the
execution of the Works and all associated operations are carried out in
conformity
with
statutory and regulatory environmental and social requirements of the
Government
of
the Philippines. The Contractor shall be required to develop a
Contractors
Environmental and Social Management Plan) that follows the framework
ESMP
shown
in Section XI of this bidding document, and shall comply with
the
Contract
Specifications, of which these Environmental and Social Safeguard
provisions are a part.
The Contractor will be required to develop their ESMP
based on the
ESIA, which was developed
consistent with MCC Environmental
Guidelines, MCC Gender Policy and Government of the Philippines DENR
-EMB (DAO 03-30 January 2008), to comply with site-specific
requirements and other measures identified in these assessments.
The ESMP shall also include the requirements and conditions stipulated in
the permits issued by the Department of Environment and Natural
Resources (DENR), including the Environmental Compliance Certificate
(ECC).
In the event of serious or repeated violations of the conditions stipulated
in the ECC, ESMP and the Contract Specifications, the Employer
reserves the right to withhold payments and/or stop construction.
SPL B.6.2
Environmental and Social Management Plan (ESMP)
This section
shall
contain
the Employers Environmental
& Social
Management Plan to allow Bidders to understand what will be involved
in implementing the environmental and social mitigation measures
associated with the project. This is not to substitute for the Contractors
Environmental & Social Management Plan (CESMP) that the winning
Bidder will need to draft based on the Employers ESMP, any relevant
environmental Specifications found in the Technical Specifications, Bill of
Quantities, Drawings and relevant partner country laws and regulations.
The Contractor is required to prepare and submit a Contractors
Environmental and Social Management Plan (CESMP with operational
details for review and approval by the Engineer not later than 30 days
after the receipt of the Notice to Proceed.
The ESMP shall be organized in four sections as follows:
SPL B.6.2.1
Management Acknowledgements
a) Certification and Commitment
The CESMP submitted by the Contractor shall provide a signed

statement
from
the
Contractors managing directors attesting to a commitment that all
environmental
protection, safety and industrial health aspects of the Contract shall
be given the
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 38
highest
priority in the discharge of contractual obligations and

certifying
a
commitment to the provisions specified by the ESMP as approved by
the Engineer.
b) Statutory Understanding and Compliance
The ESMP shall provide
a
statement
attesting the
firms
understanding of, and means of ensuring due compliance with,
the statutory regulations relating to construction work in the GOP,
specifically in regard to compliance with:
- All safety and industrial health legislation including, without limitation, the
Rules
and Regulations of the GOP and the authorities having jurisdiction;
- All current environmental laws and regulations - be they national or local related but not necessarily limited to:
Noise;
Air pollution;
Water contamination;
Solid waste disposal;
Liquid waste disposal;
Sanitary conditions (water supply, sewerage, etc.);
Use of explosives; and
Protection of public traffic.
The Contractor shall restore areas citing temporary plants to their original
condition on completion of Project Works. This shall include the clean-
up of spillage and debris before leaving any temporary construction site.
c) Availability of Documents
The Plan shall state where copies of safety and industrial health
regulations and documents will be available on the construction site
and verify that all regulations and documents have been or will be
available and displayed or kept.
d) Management of Sub-Contractors
The Plan shall provide a commitment that the Contractor for the work shall:
Provide subcontractors with copies of the ESMP and the ECC
and incorporate provisions of the ESMP and ECC into all sub-contract
documentation to ensure the compliance with the Plan at all tiers of the
sub-contracting.
Require all subcontractors to appoint a safety representative who shall
be
available
on the Site throughout the operational period of the respective
subcontract;
and
Ensure, as far as is practically possible, that employees of
subcontractors
of
all
tiers
are conversant with appropriate parts of the ESMP, ECC and
the
statutory
regulations.
SPL B.6.2.2
Organization and Staffing
Organization Chart.
The Plan shall include an organization chart identifying (by job title and
by
the
name
of
the individual) the personnel to be engaged solely for environmental
protection and
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 39
safety. The chart and the supporting text shall identify the designated
Environmental Manager and /Health and Safety Manager and identify
other participants and their areas of responsibility.
Identification of Responsibilities.
The Plan shall provide a description of the responsibilities of the
Environmental, Health and Safety staff appearing on the Organization
Chart.
Nomination
Safety
of
proposed
Manager. The
Environmental
Plan
shall
Manager
indicate
the
and
name
Health
of
&
theses
proposed personnel.
Certification related to the Environmental Manager and /Health & Safety
Manager. The Plan shall certify that:
- These managers will be appointed and assigned duties throughout the period
of
the Contract entirely connected with the environmental and safety
activities on the Site.
- The proposed managers shall be bilingual (Tagalog/English) and suitably
qualified and experienced to supervise and monitor compliance with
the
ESMP
and will, in particular but without limitation, carry out auditing of
the
operation
of the ESMP to be submitted, from time to time, to the Engineer for
his consent.
- These managers shall not be removed from the Site without the express,
prior
written permission of the Engineer. Within fourteen (14) days
of any such removal or notice of intent of removal, replacement
staff shall be nominated for the Engineers approval.
- These managers shall be provided with supporting staff in accordance with
the
staffing levels set out in the Plan.
- These managers will be empowered to instruct all employees of the
Contractor
or Subcontractors at any level to cease operations and take
urgent and appropriate action to make safe the Site and prevent
unsafe working practices or other infringements of the Plan or the
statutory regulations.
- These managers shall maintain a daily Site Diary in order to
comprehensively
record all relevant matters concerning Site environmental
management and safety, inspections and audits, related incidents
and the like. The Site Diary shall be available at all times for
inspection by the Engineer.
Contact Information.
Contact information for all Environmental and Health & Safety staff shall
be provided in the Plan.
SPL B.6.2.3
Communications and Reporting
Communications & Routine Reporting Procedures

The Plan shall explain the proposed interaction and communication
procedures between
construction
personnel
and
environmental
protection, safety and traffic control staff, including:
- Communication facilities; and
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 40
- Routine reporting systems

Environmental and Safety Reports
The following environmental and safety reports shall be submitted:
- Weekly Environmental and Safety Reports. Documented safety and
environmental
audits shall be undertaken on weekly basis.
- Incorporation of Summaries in the Project Monthly Report. Summaries of
the
Weekly Environmental and Safety Reports will be included in
the Projects Monthly Progress Report.
Notification of Accidents
The Plan shall verify that provisions have been made to ensure that:
- The Contractor shall notify the Engineer and Employer within 24 hours or
as
soon as reasonably possible after the occurrence of any
accident
which
has resulted in damage or loss of property,
disability or loss of human life, or which has or which could
reasonably be foreseen to have a material impact on the
environment and shall submit to the Engineer and Employer no later
than 7 days after the occurrence of such an event, a summary
report thereof.
Communications with Sub-Contractors
The Plan shall specify:
- The means by which environmental management, safety and traffic control
and
industrial
health
matters
and
requirements
will
be
communicated
to
Subcontractors at all levels and their due compliance with the
ESMP
and
all
relevant statutory regulations is ensured. Subcontractors shall be
supplied with
copies of the ESMP. Additional activities may include attendance
at
training
programs, circulation of newsletters and other means as specified by
the Plan.
- The method by which the procedures and practices proposed by
subcontractors
will be reviewed for compliance with the ESMP and statutory
regulations.
This could include, for example, the inclusion of
environmental and safety criteria as a part of daily and/or weekly
Site inspections.
SPL B.6.3 Environmental Control Provisions
Incorporating the Provisions of the ESMP - Section XI of this bidding
document
and
updated with the provisions of the approved/permitted ESMPs - the
required
project
specific ESMP shall consider amongst others, the following Environmental
Provisions:
SPL B.6.3.1
Environmental Protection during Construction
The road causes or passes close to several areas of existing or recent

instability,
and
the
Engineer shall have the power to disallow the method of construction
and/or
the
use
of
any borrow/stockpiles/spoil disposal areas if, in his opinion, the stability
and
safety
of
the Works or any adjacent features is endangered, or if there is undue
interference
with
the natural or artificial drainage, or if the method or use if the area will
promote undue
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 41
erosion. In particular, the Contractor shall note that side-casting of spoil

(down slope disposal of material from excavation) will not be permitted.
Borrow
areas
and quarries shall be sited, worked and restored in

accordance
with
Clause 102.1.4 of these Supplemental Specifications. No borrow pits or
quarries
will
be
permitted in the Samar Island Natural Park or other protected areas.
Spoil
shall
be
disposed of at approved disposal sites prepared, filled and restored in
accordance
with
Clause 102.1.5
Following excavation, the Contractor shall take all steps necessary to
complete drainage and slope protection works in advance of each rainy
season. Erosion or instability or sediment deposition arising from
operation not in accordance with the Specification shall be made good
immediately by the Contractor at his expense.
Notwithstanding approval of the intended method of working, the
Contractor shall at all times be responsible for constructing the
earthworks in accordance with the Specifications and Drawings.
The project area can experience inclement weather - fog, heavy rainfall,
monsoons and earthquakes. It will be deemed that the Contractors is
familiar with these conditions and has formulated his Works Program
considering possible loss of time due to these causes, and it shall
be the obligation of the Contractor to revise his program and
enhance his construction efforts as necessary to ensure timely completion
of the work schedule for each working season.
SPL B.6.3.2
Re-vegetation of Disturbed Ground
Where directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall establish vegetation

on
fill
slopes,
cut slopes of 1:1 (horizontal : vertical) or less, worked out borrow pits,
and
other
areas
which may include roadway shoulders and verges, spoil disposal areas,
stockpile
areas,
quarries, access tracks, plant sites, camp, land slide scars, gullies and
stream
and
river
banks. Prior to placing topsoil and/or establishing vegetation on
embankments,
all
fill
material not compacted to the required standards shall be removed
from
the
side
slopes.
The Contractor shall be responsible for supplying sufficient planting
material to carry out all re-vegetation work, and shall establish and
operate plant nurseries as necessary and shall make his own
arrangements for procuring cutting, slips and seed for growing. Re-
vegetation materials should use endemic species or plant material that is
approved by DPWH and DENR for re-vegetation.
SPL B.6.3.3
Prevention of Air and Water Pollution
The Contractor shall ensure that his activities do not result in any
contamination
of
land
or water by polluting substances. He shall implement physical and
operational
measures such as earth bunds of adequate capacity around fuel, oil and
solvent
storage
tanks and stores, oil and greases traps in drainage systems from
workshops,
vehicle
and
plant washing facilities and service and fuelling areas and kitchens, the
establishment of
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 42
sanitary solid and liquid waste disposal systems, the maintenance in

effective condition of these measures, the establishment of emergency
response procedures for pollution, events, and dust suppressions, all in
accordance with normal good practice and to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
Should
any
pollution arise from the Contractors activities including

the
improper
deposition of sediment he shall clean up the affected area immediately
at
his
own
cost
and to the satisfaction of the Engineer, and shall pay full compensation
to
any
affected
parties.
SPL B.6.3.4
Protection of Trees and Vegetation
Unless
otherwise provided in the Specifications, the Contractor shall

ensure
that
no
trees or shrubs or waterside vegetation are felled or harmed except for
those
required
to be cleared for execution of the Works. The Contractor shall
protect
trees
and
vegetation from damage to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The
Contractor
shall
be
responsible for obtaining any necessary felling permits and for ensuring
the
disposal
of
felled trees in accordance with prevailing regulations. Endangered
species
shall
be
identified, and the Contractor will follow any special provisions in the
ESMP
or
DENR
permits regarding the potential removal of endangered species. No
trees
shall
be
removed without the prior approval of the Engineer and any
competent
authorities.
Should the Contractor become aware during the period of the Contract
that
any
tree
or
trees
designated
for
clearance
have
cultural
or
religious
significance
he
shall
immediately inform the Engineer and await his instruction before
proceeding
with
clearance.
In the event that trees or other vegetation not designated for clearance
are damaged or destroyed, they shall be repaired or replaced to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
SPL B.6.3.5
Use of Wood and Fuel
The Contractor shall not use, or permit to be used, wood as fuel for the
execution of any part of the Works including, but not necessarily limited
to, the heating of bitumen and bitumen mixtures, and to the extent
practicable shall ensure that fuels other than wood are used for cooking,
space and water heating in all camps and living accommodations. Any
wood so used must be harvested legally, and the Contractor shall
provide the Engineer with copies of the relevant permits if required.
SPL B.6.3.6
Fire Prevention
In addition to the provision of adequate fire-fighting equipment at this

base camp and other facilities to the satisfaction of the Engineer,
the Contractor shall take all precautions necessary to ensure that no
vegetation along the line of the road outside area of the permanent
works is affected by fires arising from the execution of the Works.
These precautions shall include the prevention of fires for any purposes
in the vicinity of the Works except where expressly permitted by the
Engineer.
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 43
Should a fire occur in the natural vegetation or plantations adjacent to

the road for any reason, the Contractor shall immediately suppress it.
In the event of any other fire emergency in the vicinity of the Works,
the Contractor shall render assistance to the civil authorities to the best of
his ability.
Areas of forest, scrub or plantation damages by fire considered by the
Engineer to have been initiated by the Contractors staff shall be
replanted and otherwise restored to the satisfaction of the Engineer at the
Contractors expense.
SPL B.6.3.7
Environmental Protection during Construction
In undertaking the Works, the Contractor shall be aware that the Engineer
may prohibit or
restrict
the
Contractors
activities
in
other
ecologically, culturally or historically sensitive areas which become
known to him during the course of the project. The location of any
such areas shall be notified to the Contractor by the Engineer at the
earliest opportunity.
SPL B.6.3.8
Relationships with Local Communities and Authorities
In siting and operating his plant and facilities and in executing

the Works, the Contractor shall, at all times, and to the extent
possible, minimize the impact of his activities on existing communities.
Where communities are likely to be affected by major activities such
as road widening or the establishment of a camp or quarry or
extensive road closure or bypassing, he shall liaise closely with
the concerned communities and their representatives and, if so
directed, shall attend additional meetings arranged by the Engineer
or Employer to resolve issues and claims and minimize impacts on
local communities.
Any problems arising from his operations and which cannot be
resolved by the Contractor shall be referred to the Employer through
the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for any compensation
due to reinstatements necessary with respect to any damage caused by
him to areas outside the Site and no separate payment will be made in
this regard.
SPL B.6.3.9
Privately or Community-Owned Services and Structures
The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to ensure that no

public
or
private
services, utilities or similar facilities are damaged or interrupted by the
Works.
These
precautions shall include but not be limited to liaison with public and
private
service
providers, local government units, and private owners; a condition survey
of
all
affected
services; provision of a satisfactory alternative service while the works are
carried
out;
and reinstatement of a satisfactory permanent facility after completion of
the
Works
in
each area.
No service or utilities shall be disturbed or cut before arrangements have

been made for a satisfactory alternative service, or the Contractor has
obtained agreement in writing from the service provider or owner to a
temporary cessation of service.
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 44
Not less than 14 days before commencing site clearance on any

particular section of Road in accordance with his agreed Program of Work,
the Contractor shall supply to the Engineer for his prior approval, a
copy of his condition survey of all utilities and services to be
affected, copies of any agreements with service providers and owners, his
plans for providing temporary service, and his plans for reinstating
permanent service following construction of the Works.
Provision of temporary and permanent services shall be to at least the pre-
existing level of service and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
SPL B.6.3.10 Water Supply for Construction
The Contractor shall make the necessary arrangements, at his own
expense, for water supply for construction and other purposes. Only
clean water, free from deleterious materials and appropriate quality for
its intended use, shall be used. In providing water, the Contractor shall
ensure that the rights of and supply to existing users are not
affected either in quality or timing.
In the event of a dispute over the effect of the Contractors arrangement
on the water supply of others, the Engineer shall be informed
immediately and shall instruct the Contractor as to appropriate remedial
actions to be undertaken at his expense.
SPL B.6.3.11 Hot Mix, Screening and Crushing Plants
The Contractor shall not locate any hot mix, screening, crushing or
similar potentially polluting plant closer than 200m to any settlement,
unless such plant is fitted with dust suppression equipment and operated
and maintained at all times in conformity with the manufacturers
specifications, instructions, instruction and manuals.
SPL B.6.3.12 Operation of Crushing Plant and Stock Yard
The Contractor shall locate plant, equipment and stock yards away from
residential and environmentally sensitive areas, provide adequate pollution
control devices, filters, etc. and the equipment shall be operated during
daytime only.
SPL B.6.3.13 Construction and Management of Work Camp
The location of the work camp shall be far from residential areas. The
Contractor
shall
provide adequate fuel or LPG gas for both cooking and other needs. The
collection
and
treatment of solid wastes shall be maintained during construction. The
Contractor
shall
prohibit illegal fishing and hunting in the vicinity of the camp. Cutting of
trees
shall
be
avoided to the extent possible and removal of vegetation shall be
minimized.
Water
and
pit latrine facilities shall be provided for the employees. At completion of
the
project,
all
wreckage, rubbish or temporary works that are no longer required shall
be
removed
or
given to local residents. All temporary structures including office building,
shelters
and
latrines shall be removed to prevent encroachment within the road right-
of-way.
The
site shall be restored to near natural or stable conditions, including any
access
roads
and infrastructure established for the camps. The Engineer shall report in
writing that
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 45
the camp has been vacated and restored to pre-project conditions before
acceptance of the works.
SPL B.6.3.14 Borrow Pits and Quarries
The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for the supply of
any necessary aggregates including compensation for landowners and
others, the acquisition of the Environmental Compliance Certificate and
any necessary permits from the competent authorities, access, and site
clearance and restoration, subject to the provisions of these Specifications
and the Conditions of Contract. No borrow pits or quarries will be
established in the Samar Island Natural Park or other protected areas.
In
making
his
arrangements for winning and working construction

materials
the
Contractor shall bear in mind his duties and responsibilities towards the
public
and
the
environment as stipulated in the Conditions of Contract. He is reminded in
particular
of
his plans for moving large quantities of material on any particular route,
to
work
safely
and not to cause or exacerbate nuisance or health problems, not to
damage
or
interfere
with public or private property or resources, to remedy or compensate for
any
damage
or accidents caused by his actions, to leave excavated sites and related
facilities
in
a
condition fit for productive use and otherwise acceptable to the
landowner
and
the
Engineer, and to ensure that his Sub-Contractors are under identical
obligations
as
himself.
At least 14 days before he intends to commence opening up any approved
borrow pit or quarry, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer his
intended method of working and restoration. This shall include, but not
necessarily limited to:
the location, design and method of construction of any access track;
the volume and nature of materials to be removed;
the sequence and method of excavation of materials;
measures for controlling runoff and sediment from the site during operation;
proposals for site restoration including approximate finished levels,
drainage,
erosion
and
sediment
control,
slope
stabilization
and
re-
vegetation, including restoration of the access track where so directed
by the Engineer.
No borrow pit or quarry operation shall be permitted until the
method of working proposed by the Contractor for that particular pit or
quarry has been approved by the Engineer in writing. The Contractor
should note that the nature of the terrain through which the road passes
severely restricts the number of environmentally acceptable sites for
borrow pits and quarries.

The Contractor shall supply the Engineer with a copy of the relevant
quarrying
permits
(e.g.,
DENR
Environmental
Compliance
Certificate)
and
his
agreement
with
any
landowner when so directed. Notwithstanding permission from others,
such
borrow
pits and quarries may be prohibited or restricted in dimensions and
depth
by
the
Engineer where:
they might affect the stability or safety of the Works or adjacent property or land;
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 46
they might interfere with natural or artificial drainage;
they may be environmentally unsuitable; and .
where adequate health and safety procedures are not in place. .
Where the Contractor obtains his construction materials from borrow pits
and
quarries
operated by others, the Engineer reserves the right to disallow such
materials
where
the borrow pits or quarries in question are unlicensed or fall under 3 (i), (ii),
(iii)
or
(iv)
above.
The Contractor should note that all borrow pits, quarries, and associated
access
tracks
and stockpile areas shall be restored and re-vegetated, unless otherwise
directed
by
the
Engineer.
The Engineer may direct that materials be selected in borrow pits which
may include double handling, stockpiling and excavation in particular areas of
a borrow pit.
The
Contractor shall construct all accesses, clear and remove all

vegetation,
boulders
and unsuitable or oversize materials and dispose of it in an approved
manner.
The
Contractor shall provide adequate supervision in every borrow pit and
quarry
to
ensure
that suitable
materials are
not contaminated with unsuitable
material.
Unsuitable
materials shall be spoiled in accordance with Clause 102.2.10 of
these Special
Provisions.
The Engineer may permit or direct that
quarries be used as spoil disposal sites.
worked-out
borrow
pits
or
On completion of work, all excavations shall be restored in accordance

with
the
plans
approved under (4) above. The Contractor shall pay particular
attention
to
the
establishment of stable side slopes in excavations and a stable
permanent
drainage
system. Where, for any reason, a working face is to be left exposed, the
edge
shall
be
permanently fenced, as instructed by the Engineer, and measurement
and
payment
for
such fencing shall be in accordance with Part 1 of the Standard
Specifications.
The Employer reserves the right
facilities or quarries established or
with the Works and to undertake
reinstate the site, and to recover
due to the Contractor.
to
used
any
the
inspect the site of any borrow

by the Contractor in connection
corrective measures necessary to
cost from monies due or to become
SPL B.6.3.15 Spoil and Spoil Disposal

All suitable excavated materials shall be used insofar as it practicable in
constructing
the Works. Surplus and unsuitable material whether from site clearance,
excavations,
failed cut or fill slopes, landslides, or maintenance operations, shall be
known as spoil.
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer under paragraph (4), all
spoil shall be deposited at spoil disposal sites approved in advance by
the Engineer in accordance with Clause 102.1.3.
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 47
The Engineers approval of any spoil disposal site shall not in any
way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility, inter alia, for land
acquisition, provision of temporary access, works preparatory to spoiling,
management
of
the
spoiling
operation,
and making good after
completion of spoiling.
Where the alignment traverses side-long ground and spoil volumes are
low,
or where existing environmental damage is so great that the
additional impact from soil disposal would be insignificant, the Engineer
may permit limited side-casting. Permission will be granted in writing for
specific sections of roadway not exceeding 25 m in length. Where side-
casting is permitted, the volume of material side-cast shall be limited to the
surplus from the adjacent earthwork.
Unless exempted by the Engineer, in all locations where side-cast material
exceeds 250 mm average depth, the surface will be re-vegetated in
accordance with Clause B.3.5. The Engineer may direct that additional
vegetation and stabilization measures be applied to side-cast slopes.
1.
for
Spoil disposal sites will fall into three categories:

- Borrow pits and quarries, whether pre-existing or opened up specifically
the
road contract riverside sites; other sites where spoil

disposal
will
not
result in a potential safety hazard, instability, erosion, or water
management
problems.
- Preference shall be given to the backfilling of borrow pits and quarries as
an
aid to site reinstatement and to a larger number of smaller sites.
- Spoil sites should be located away from wetland areas, tributaries, and
rivers
where at all possible. If riverside sites are required, the
Contractor
shall
be
required to receive permission from the Engineer for approval
and
must
employ best practices in consultation with the Contractors
Environmental
Manager. Riverside sites shall be located only on major rivers
with
a
high
natural bed load but not their tributaries. Riverside sites should
be
chosen
such that land take is minimized and the presence of spoil
in
the
river
channel will not harmfully deflect the flow under flood
conditions.
Local
communities must have given their informed consent before
any
riverside
site shall be permitted. Riverside sites will not be permitted
in
areas
of
cultivated land if alternative sites are available in the vicinity, or
in
riverine
forest.
2.
No spoil disposal sites shall be located:
- on level irrigated rice terraces

- on slopes of more than 25 degrees
- where geological structures are unfavorable to stability (e.g. in fault or sheer
zones or where structural planes are dipping out of the slope)
- on slopes that are being undercut by stream erosion.
- on spurs above converging stream channels.
- on talus slopes or in any situation where they might be expected to
load a
slope along a failure plane.
- in any watercourse or drainage line whether permanent or seasonal
except
those permitted under paragraphs (4) and (6)
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 48
- on areas identified within the ESMP be protected areas or special

status
habitat.).
3. Disposal sites should also avoid forest, cultivated land, active slope
failure areas, and
gullies. Areas of groundwater discharge, sources of drinking or
irrigation water,
areas where failure of the spoil tip would endanger or harm the Works
or buildings
or cultivated land, and areas where permanent stabilization of the
filled disposal
area would be difficult.
4. The Engineer may restrict, prohibit, or otherwise modify the
Contractors spoil
disposal proposals if, in the Engineers opinion, they are likely to cause
unacceptable
environmental damage.
5. Except at riverside sites or where side-cast, the Contractor shall
prepare
each
approved disposal site to receive spoil by:
a. marking the boundaries of the site with white paint so that
the
perimeter
is
clearly visible;
b. erecting a sign at the entrance to the site with the words Road
Project
Tipping
Area
SPL B.6.4
Requirements for Social Management Plan (SMP)
The Contractor shall develop and implement a Social Management Plan

with four (4) constituent parts that address the issues of access and
mobility during construction, social & gender integration, trafficking in
persons and (TIP) HIV/AIDS. Contractor shall assign resources and staff to
implement and/or monitor the SMP.
SPL B.6.4.1
Mobility and Access Facilitation
Under the Mobility and Access Facilitation Plan (MAFP) the Contractor
shall ensure mitigation of negative impacts of construction related works
on the project population is planned in advance.
The Contractors MAFP shall include the items in Section XI ESMP:
SPL B.6.4.2
Integration of Social and Gender Aspects
Under the Social and Gender Plan the Contractor shall to perform
the work in accordance with the Section XI ESMP, and the following:
The Contractor is required to provide periodic training and basic
facilities to communities to develop school zone crossing safety
procedures, including the use of trained volunteer adult crossing guards
to assist children in crossing the road. This will include at a minimum:
Contractor will hire a traffic engineer with appropriate national
certifications to oversee and manage the road safety training
process.
Contractor will prepare a road safety training program, syllabus for
the training, and training materials. These will be submitted to the
Engineer for review and approval prior to start of work.
Training classes will be required at each school/barangay.
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 49
Training for trainers will include a minimum of:

- 8 hours training
- 2 training classes
Training at each school/barangay will include a minimum of:
- 16 hours training
- 4 training classes
Teachers, students, barangay officials and the public will be
informed of the training sessions in advanced.
Provide training to local communities on road safety for slow vehicles.
SPL B.6.4.3
Trafficking In Persons Plan
Under the Trafficking in Persons (TIP) Plan, the Contractor shall complete
the work in accordance with the Section XI ESMP:
SPL B.6.4.4
HIV/AIDS and STD Plan
Notwithstanding the provisions of the General Conditions of Contract,

and
Section
XI
ESMP, the Contractor shall, throughout the duration of the Contract,
include
a
program
of education for site staff and labor and their families in respect of
Sexually
Transmitted
Diseases (STD) including HIV/AIDS and prohibitions in engaging in
TIP
activities.
Information, Education and Communication (IEC) campaigns shall be
conducted
at
the
project site, at least every 3rd month, addressed to all Site staff and
labor
(including
all
the Contractors employees, all Subcontractors and consultants
employees,
and
all
truck
drivers and crew making deliveries
to site
for construction
activities)
and
to
the
avoidance behavior with respect to Sexually Transmitted Diseases (STD) in
general
and
HIV/AIDS in particular. The content for IEC will be based on the
national
STI
and
HIV/AIDS program. The Contractor shall, throughout the contract,
liaise
with
the
Department of Health (DOH) and/or their designated local representatives
or
agents:
in
drawing up the Works STD and HIV/AIDS program (including IEC).
The
Contractor
shall subcontract a competent service provider in HIV/AIDS and STD
awareness
and
prevention. The Contractor shall report progress and coordinate the
STD/AIDS
measures on Site with the national STI and HIV/AIDS program.
The above provisions shall be provided free of charge to the
participants
and
the
Contractor shall ensure that all the site staff have free access to
attend
the
IEC
campaigns.
SPL B.6.5
Multi Party Monitoring Team
It is anticipated the Contractors ESM will be requested by the Engineer to

participate in the Multi Partie Monitoring Team (MMT) which shall be
composed of the following:
Protected Areas Management Board (PAMB)
Local Government Units (LGU)
Representative from DPWH District Office concerned
Non-Governmental
Organizations/Peoples
organizations
(NGO/POs) Other Stakeholders
Other participants as deemed necessary by the Employer and Engineer
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 50
Monthly meetings shall be held at the Engineers Field Office, minutes of

which
shall
be
included in the Engineers Monthly Progress Report. The meetings
shall
cover
environmental and social issues, tests to be undertaken, compliance with
the EMP, etc.
The activities include organizing, training, meeting of the MMT;
sampling and measurement activities; site inspections of tree cutting
scheme and waste disposal management; site inspection of tree
planting scheme; and site inspection of resettlement of affected
families and procedure of land conversion.
SPL B.6.6
Multi Party Monitoring Team
The Contractor shall perform monitoring activities in the following table:
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 51
Environmental Monitoring Plan Summary

Monitoring
Monitoring Location
Workers camp site

and
staging
area
conditions.
Camp and staging

sites
Soil erosion.
Soil contamination.
Monitoring
Method
Monitoring
Frequency
At
beginning
of
Site inspection
sites
intended
use; as
necessary
during
Cut and fill areas,
Site
inspection construction
retaining
walls, and
As
necessary
test during
bridges,
and soil
information
construction
earthwork
Plant and
inspection
equipment operation Site
and
areas; oil and
test
hazardous materials soil
information
Water pollution
(Turbidity,
DO, storage areas
Suspended solids, Oil Streams and rivers
Site
inspection
and grease,
and analysis of
Total dissolved solids.)
water samples
Ground
water
pollution (Suspended Wells adjacent to
Groundwater
solids, Oil and grease, road in RROW
sample
and
Total dissolved
laboratory
solids).
analysis
As
necessary
during
construction
Before construction
at river crossings
for
establishing
baseline;
as
necessary
during
construction
Before
construction
to
establish
a
baseline; as needed
during
construction
Technical
Specifications:
of
Monitoring
IX - 52
Monitoring Location
Air
pollution/dust Work sites
(PM10, NOx, SOx CO).
Noise (Leq)
Work sites
Storage and use

of
hazardous
materials
Rehabilitation
quarry
sites
Work
sites
storage areas
Quarry site
Vehicle
pedestrian
and access
of
Roadwork site
and
safety
Each barangay/
town
Posted
information
on
project
schedule,
notices,
and
endangered species
information
Technical
Specifications:
Monitoring Method
Air sample and
laboratory analysis
of samples in an
approved
laboratory
Inspection
and
noise levels (dB);
measurement
and
Site
inspection
and
accident
reports
Site
inspection
Monitoring
Frequency
Before construction
near barangays/
towns
for baseline; as
needed
during construction
Before construction
near barangays/
towns
for baseline; as
needed
during construction
When accident
occurs
Completion of
construction or end
Inspection on
of
visibility,
supervised/
compliance
with
protected
traffic and
site
pedestrian
At
each
management
activity
plans
Site
requiring
inspection
traffic
control
Quarterly
of
IX - 53
Monitoring
Monitoring Location
Monitoring Method
Number
of
road
safety
training
sessions
Each school
Training report,
agenda, number
of
participants, and
Number
of
TIP
training sessions
attendance
At the camp site sheet
where
training signed by
takes place
participants
Training Report,
agenda, number
Number of HIV/
At the camp site of
Aids
prevention
where
training participants, and
takes place
training sessions
attendance
sheet
signed
by
Worker safety and
participants
compliance with
Roadwork site
Training Report,
health and safety
agenda, number
plan
of
participants, and
Unresolved grievances Along entire project
attendance
or complaints
sheet
signed
by
participants
Inspection
Public consultation
Monitoring
Frequency
Quarterly
Quarterly
Quarterly
Safety
audits
during
construction
After construction
completion, during
defect
liability
period
Technical
Specifications:
of
Technical
Specifications:
IX - 54
of
SPL B.6.7
IX - 55
Payment shall be made under the following Item:

Pay Item
SPL B.6
SPL B.7
Description
Compliance with
Management Plan
Unit of Measurement
Environmental
and
Social
Month
Traffic Management
The Contractor shall submit for the Engineers approval a written

Management
Plan (TMP) within thirty (30) days from the Notice to Proceed
outlining
the
Contractors methods to adequately maintain traffic (vehicular
pedestrian)
during
the course of the Works. This Plan shall include but not be limited
following:
Traffic
(NTP)
and
to the
Traffic control equipment the Contractor proposes to control and warn

traffic during the works.
Traffic control signage including location and sign
descriptions. When traffic control flagmen will be
utilized.
Traffic control means during non-work periods.
Traffic control means and devices for night and off-hour periods.
SPL B.7.1
General Traffic Management Requirements
The following conditions shall apply to traffic management:

1. Contractor shall keep a minimum of one (1) travel lane open to
traffic on existing
roads and at all times during the work or may detour traffic using
existing roads
and/or temporary detour roads as approved by the Engineer.
2.
Contractor shall keep roads and footpaths

operations
free
debris and material spillage at all times.
affected by
from
his
3. The Contractor shall keep the length of the construction areas in such
condition that
traffic will be accommodated safely. Traffic control devices and
services shall be
provided and maintained both inside and outside the Project work
limits as needed
to facilitate traffic guidance.
4. Prior to the start of construction operations, the Contractor shall erect
such signs,
barricades, and other traffic control devices as may be required or
directed by the
Engineer.
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 56
5. Traffic management devices provided which are lost, stolen, destroyed,

or deemed
unacceptable while their use is required on the Project shall be
replaced by the
Contractor without additional compensation.
6. Night-time operations
approved
Engineer. The lighting
preclude glare.
shall
be
system
illuminated by a lighting system

by
the
shall be positioned and operated to
7. Contractor shall take necessary care at all times during execution of

the works to
ensure safety of residents along and adjacent to the road, and any
public highway or
port facility that may be affected by the Works.
8. Contractor should thoroughly acquaint himself with existing traffic
conditions and
understand the importance of maintaining traffic safety and avoidance
of excessive
traffic delay.
9. Contractor shall co-operate with the pertinent agencies regarding traffic
control and
all details will be subject to the Engineers approval. The Contractors
requirements
shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, provisions of traffic
control devices
and services for the control and protection of traffic through areas of
construction.
10. Any failure of the Contractor to meet these requirements will entitle
the Engineer to
carry out such works as he deems to be necessary and to charge the
Contractor with
the full cost thereof plus ten percent of such cost, which sum will be
deducted from
any money due or which may become due to the Contractor under the
Contract.
SPL B.7.2
SPL B.7.2.1
General Traffic Management Requirements

Temporary Road Works
The following conditions shall apply to temporary works:

1. The Contractor may at their convenience construct temporary detour
roads within
the limits of the Right-of-Way shown on the drawings as approved by
the Engineer.
All additional impacted properties/structures which have not been
identified in the
Project RAP program will be subject to the Project RAP
requirements. The
Contractor shall be solely responsible for meeting the requirements
of the RAP
Program related to the additional properties/structures impacted by
their proposed
temporary detour.
2. The Contractor may at their convenience construct temporary detour
roads outside
the limits of the Right-of-Way as approved by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall be
responsible for all costs associated with acquiring and/or leasing
additional lands.
All additional impacted properties/structures which have not
already been
identified in the Projects RAP Program will be subject to the
Project RAP
requirements. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for
meeting the
requirements of the RAP Program related to the additional
properties/structures for
their proposed temporary detour.
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 57
3. The Contractor shall furnish and maintain all temporary road works
such as sleeper
tracks and temporary crossings over streams or unstable ground. Such
temporary
road works shall be constructed to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Such approval
shall not relieve the Contractor of their responsibilities under the Contract.
4. The Contractor shall submit drawings of temporary roads
detailing alignment,
profile, pavement construction, signing, lighting and the duration of
the temporary
road for the Engineers approval.
5. Any temporary roads, staging/service areas shall be immediately
removed after they
are no longer required and restored to pre-project conditions meeting
the approval
of the Engineer.
SPL B.7.2.2
Traffic Control
The Contractor shall ensure all work areas are adequately sign posted
(see
Table
B.7)
especially where width restrictions are imposed due to construction
works.
The
Contractor shall provide details in writing to the Engineer for his approval at
least seven
(7) days in advance of the works. On receipt of the Engineers
approval,
advance
warning signs (reflectorized), coning and bunding, stop and give way
(yield)
signs,
Giveway signs, other appropriate signing and lighting shall be provided
and
maintained
by the Contractor in accordance with his approved Traffic Management
Plan
and
the
effectiveness of this signing and lighting shall be constantly
monitored
by
the
Contractor.
All full and partial/temporary road closures shall be properly staffed
24 hours/7 days/week by the Contractor. All operatives shall be trained
and fully briefed by the Contractor on their responsibilities.
The Contractor shall utilize flagmen when necessary to direct the flow of
traffic for any restriction to traffic (reduction to one-lane) 24 hours/7
days/week.
Where appropriate the traffic controllers
provided with communication equipment.
SPL B.7.2.3
Table B.7
or
flagmen
shall
Traffic Signs and Safety

Traffic Control Signs, Delineators and Warning Lights
be
Item
Specification
1. General
The Contractor shall provide one-way traffic control for 200

meter or less long construction section through the
project,
except
for
the repair of small areas
of
damaged
concrete
slabs. In these areas the Contractor shall provide for
one-way
traffic control beginning and ending 50 meters
from
the
work area. Signs, delineators, warning lights and
flagmen
shall be posted and maintained as described in Items
2, 3 and
Technical
Specifications:
of
Item
IX - 58
Specification
4.
Square plywood of the dimensions, colors,
legend,
and spacing indicated on the drawing
details shall be installed in advance of the works.
The signs shall be placed on the edge of pavement
facing the traffic flow.
2. Signs
3. Delineators
4. Warning - Lights
Reflective red or orange plastic or rubber

cones 45
centimeters high shall be placed at intervals
indicated in the
drawing details along the traffic side of the
restricted area.
Amber flashing lights with 15 centimeter diameter
lens head
shall be provided at all sign locations. The
intensity of the
lights shall be at least 4 candle powers and have a
flash rate
between 50-75 flashes per minute directing
traffic
movements.
All barricades fences and such other aids that maybe required shall be
reflectorized and shall conform to the regulations of the DPWH and shall be
illuminated at night.
The Contractor shall appoint a representative, subject to the approval of
the Engineer who will be responsible for daily inspection of all traffic
aids within the site and to arrange such cleaning and repair as the
Engineer considers necessary to maintain the proper effectiveness of these
traffic aids at all times.
SPL B.7.2.4
Contractors Liability and Responsibilities
The Contractor shall be fully liable for traffic control, safety and any
damage caused to or by vehicles directly caused by the temporary
road/and or feature.
Approval by the Engineer of the Contractors traffic control and signing
proposals
in
no
way will be construed as relieving the Contractor of any of his obligations
or
liabilities.
If in the opinion of the Engineer the Contractor does not fulfill
his
duties
and
responsibilities under these Specifications, the Engineer will be forced to
carry
out
such
works as he deems to be necessary and to charge the Contractor with
the
full
cost
thereof plus fifteen (15%) percent of such cost, which sum will be
deducted
from
any
money due or which may become due to the Contractor under the Contract.
SPL B.7.3
The work associated with Traffic Management during construction in

accordance with the drawings and specifications as accepted by the
Engineer shall be measured by the unit Month.
SPL B.7.4
Basis of Payment
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 59
The accepted quantity measured as specified in Method of Measurement

shall
be
paid
for at the Contract unit price of the Pay Item listed below that is
included
in
the
Bill
of
Quantities.
Payment shall be full compensation for Traffic Management including
all
temporary
cones, drums, paint, delineators, signs, personnel, lighting, equipment,
temporary
roads,
labour, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the
work
under
this
Item.
Pay Item
SPL B.7
Technical
Description
Unit of Measurement
Traffic Management
Specifications:
Month
of
SPL B.8
IX - 60
Occupational Health and Safety
Prior to commencing work on site the Contractor shall submit a

project
specific Occupational Health and Safety Plan (OHSP) to the
Engineer for approval.
The OSHP shall clearly identify
and working on the island
HIV/AIDSs awareness to all of
working on the project
Contractors facilities.
all project specific hazards related to living

of Samar. The OHSP shall also include
the Contractors and Sub-Contractors staff
site, staging/laydown areas and/or in the
The OHSP shall follow the current Philippine DPWH Department Order
Series
2005
Guidelines for Implementation of DOLE D.O. No. 13 Series 1998,
Governing
Occupational Safety and Health in the Construction Industry.
SPL B.8.1
Occupational Health and Safety Plan
The OHSP shall include the following:

1. Welfare measures at the Site, and accommodation including access to fresh
drinking
water, washing facilities, toilets, shelters for use on breaks, etc.
2. Means of separation of working areas and trafficked areas (Speed
restrictions,
marking, fencing, etc.)
3. Handling raw materials (soils, aggregates, gravels, rock, etc.) in construction
of
Embankment, subgrade and pavement layers all entail exposure
to
dust,
noise,
vibration and heavy manual handling. The OHSP shall describe
measures
which
will
be taken to minimize exposure to dust (watering, provision of masks),
reduce
noise
and vibration the practice minimum (defining what that minimum
is)
and
what
mechanical equipment will be used to reduce manual handling. The
OHSP
should
also define what level of manual handling will be required after
all
mitigating
measures.
4. Working with more flammable materials, especially fuels similar consideration
must
be given, in addition to
adequate ventilation, etc. The OHSP shall
describe
safe
refueling procedures to be employed for all static and mobile plant and
for vehicles.
5. Handling of lime (especially quick lime), cement and other activators and
additives
is potentially hazardous. The OHSP shall describe adequate measures

which will be taken to avoid eye and skin contact and inhalation
(goggles, protective clothing and masks) and to minimize manual
handling.
6. Maintenance of vehicles and machinery frequent involves contact with solvents.
The
Plan shall describe how skin and eye contact with and inhalation of
solvents
will
be
minimized through the provision of protective clothing and good
working practices.
7. Provide suitable measures of protection from dust. Dust masks are to be
provided
and should preferably be of the type with exhaust valves, making them easier
to use.
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 61
Rubber masks with removable filters are preferable to paper

masks as they generally fit better and they can be used with
different filters for different purposes (dust, solvents, etc.).
8. To ensure workers understand occupational health and safety risks on
the work site,
and they are aware of measures available to minimize these risks,
instruction and
training must be given. The OHSP shall describe the instruction and
training to be
given and explain how it will actually be delivered to the workforce.
As a minimum, instruction and training must include dangers
vibration, dust, fumes, traffic, heavy equipment and heavy
handling and must explain what measures are available to
these dangers, including masks, protective clothing, protective
ear defenders and good working practices.
In
of noise,
manual
minimize
footwear,
addition
to the direct dangers resulting from working on a

construction
site,
the other dangers arising from living on the site shall also be
covered.
The
Plan
shall explain how information relating to everyday health
matters
will
be
comprehensively conveyed to the workforce. Information to be
disseminated
shall include, but is not necessarily limited to, warnings concerning
the
health
risks of malaria, hepatitis, meningitis, venereal diseases, HIV/AIDS,
animal
and
insect bites/dangers.
The Contractor shall acknowledge in the Plan his responsibility for
the
health and safety of his workforce and describe these
responsibilities in detail.
The Contractor shall provide at least one fully trained medical aide, nurse
or paramedic who shall be on-site full time engaged solely for medical
duties.
The Contractor shall provide first aid equipment at all camps and work
sites
to
the
satisfaction of the Engineer, and shall ensure that all camps and work sites
where forty
(40) or more persons are engaged on the Works there shall at all times
be
a
person qualified in first-aid with access to appropriate first-aid
equipment.
Location of the medical room and other medical and first-aid facilities
shall be made known to all employees by posting suitable notices at
prominent
locations
around
the site and by verbal instruction upon
recruitment.
SPL B.8.2
On-site Safety Officer
The Contractor shall provide a designated, full time on-site safety officer
qualified to promote and maintain safe working practices. This safety

officer shall have authority to issue instructions and shall take protective
measures to prevent accidents, including but not limited to the
establishment of safe working practices and the training of staff and
labour in their implementation.
The Contactor shall take precautions to ensure the safety and
protection
against accidents of all staff and labour engaged on the
Works, local residents in the vicinity of the Works, and the public
traveling through the Works.
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 62
The Contractor shall be responsible for all costs including medical

treatment, transport, accommodation etc. incurred by any member of the
public or his labour forces whether on direct contract or sub-contract as
a result of injuries or illness arising from the execution of the Works.
SPL B.8.3
Protective Clothing and Safety Equipment
The Contractor shall provide protective clothing and safety equipment to

all
staff
and
labour engaged on the Works to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Such
clothing
and
equipment shall include, at a minimum, high visibility vests for all
workers,
protective
footwear for workmen undertaking concrete mixing work, protective
footwear
and
gloves for any workmen performing bituminous paving works,
protective
footwear,
safety glasses or goggles and filter masks for workmen undertaking
screening
or
crushing or grinding or work at hotmix plant, protective footwear and
hard
hats
for
workmen engaged on bridge construction, landslide prevention, piling work
and
in
all
locations subject to rockfall, ear-protectors for workmen engaged, in
rock-drilling,
safety ropes and harness for workmen engaged on slope protection, and
otherwise
as
appropriate to the job in hand and to the Engineers satisfaction.
SPL B.8.4
Medical and First-Aid Facilities
The Contractor shall provide and maintain throughout the duration of the
Contract, a weather tight medical examining room and sick bay together
with all necessary supplies and
equipment
to
be sited
in
the
Contractors main camp. The rooms shall be used exclusively for medical
purposes and shall be of good quality construction with electric lighting
and otherwise suitable for their purpose. The sick bay shall have at least
two beds, and shall be provided with adjacent washing and
sanitation facilities. The Contractor shall have means (which may
include designated emergency evacuation vehicles) to transport injured
workers to nearby hospitals.
The Contractor shall provide at least one fully trained medical aide, nurse
or paramedic who shall be on-site full time engaged solely for medical
duties.
The Contractor shall provide first aid equipment at all camps and work
sites to the satisfaction of the Engineer, and shall ensure that at all
camps and work sites where forty (40) or more persons are engaged on
the Works there shall at all times be a person qualified in first-aid with
access to appropriate first-aid equipment.
The location of the medical room and other medical and first-aid facilities
shall be made known to all employees by posting suitable notices at

prominent locations around the site and by verbal instruction upon
recruitment. The Contractors arrangements for complying with this Sub-
Section shall be subject to the prior approval of the Engineer and also to
the approval of any qualified Medical Officer designated by the Employer
to inspect or supervise medical arrangements on the Site.
SPL B.8.5
Supply of Drinking Water, Sanitation
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 63
The Contractor shall provide on Site and at his expense an

supply
of
potable
drinking water for all staff and labour engaged on the Works,
with
sanitary
facilities (portable toilets or latrines), to the satisfaction of the
The
Contractor
shall thoroughly disinfect and fill all latrine pits, sumps and
when
no
longer
required.
SPL B.8.6
adequate
together
Engineer.
trenches

Pay Item
Description
SPL B.8
Occupationall health and Safety Plan
SPL B.9
Mobilization and Demobilization
SPL B.9.1
Description
Unit of Measurement
Month
Mobilization, the Contractor shall perform all works necessary to transport

equipment to the Works Site or related areas to complete the Project.
Demobilization; when the Contractor has moved out equipment no
longer necessary. The
work
areas
shall
be
cleaned
and
temporary
constructed
offices,
shops, accommodation, etc. of the
Contractor shall be dismantled and removed and the works areas restored
to pre-project conditions to the satisfaction of the property owner and
acceptable to the Engineer.
SPL B.9.2
Mobilization
1. The Contractor shall begin mobilizing construction equipment as soon

as
the
site(s)
of his equipment yard, plant and other areas have been formalized.
2. Mobilized construction equipment including material testing equipment,
shall mean
owned or leased equipment in good operating condition. Batching
and crushing,
screening plants completely erected and certified operational by the
Engineer fall
under this definition. Testing equipment and apparatus shall require the
Engineers
certification and approval.
3. Mobilized equipment required in the contract shall be duly listed by the
Engineer for
approval and shall not be removed from the site by the Contractor
without prior
written approval by the Engineer.
Within thirty (30) days from the Notice to Proceed (NTP), the Contractor
shall
prepare
the initial listing of the items specified in this Specification together with
his assessment
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 64
of the degree of accomplishment for the Mobilization Phase. The final

assessment or accomplishment shall be undertaken by the Engineer prior
to the start-up of critical work activities.
SPL B.9.3
Demobilization Phase
On completion of the Project, the Contractor shall dismantle all

improvements erected on the leased areas, clear all to the satisfaction of
the property owners, rentals due fully paid and approved by the Engineer.
SPL B.9.4
Transport of Contractors Equipment and Materials
1. Where the Contractor intends to use a particular route for the

haulage of large
quantities of materials and/or equipment he shall consult well in
advance with any
affected communities and submit in advance for the Engineers
approval a plan
including but not limited to the proposed route, existing condition of
pavement and
bridges, estimated number and type of vehicle movements per day, a
programme for
monitoring condition of pavement and structures, and measures for
limiting vehicle
speeds and dust nuisance in built-up areas.
2. The Engineer reserves the right to disallow certain haul routes should
these
cause
or
be likely to cause unreasonable nuisance or hazards to the public in his
opinion.
3. The Engineers approval will not remove the Contractors obligations
specified in the
Contract Documents to prevent and repair damage to roads or
his liability for
compensation for any accidents caused by his vehicles.
SPL B.9.5
Mobilization and Demolition shall be measured as a Lump Sum in

accordance with the specifications as accepted by the Engineer.
SPL B.9.6
Basis of Payment
The accepted quantities measured as specified in the Method of

Measurement section shall be paid for at the Contract unit price of the Pay
Item listed below that is included in the Bill of Quantities.
Seventy
five (75) percent

mobilization
remaining twenty five (25)
Demobilization.
shall
percent
be
paid upon completion of full

and
the
shall be paid upon completion of
Payment shall be full compensation for Mobilization and Demobilization
which includes all materials, labour, equipment, equipment transportation,

temporary works, obtaining Government licenses, permits, clearances
and any inicidentals necessary to complete the work under this Item.
Payment will be made under the following Item:
Technical
Specifications:
of
Pay Item
SPL B.9
Description
IX - 65
Unit of Measurement
Mobilization and Demobilization
Technical
Specifications:
Lump Sum
of
PART C
IX - 66
EARTHWORK
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
ITEM 100 SP
Clearing and Grubbing
100.2.1
Construction Requirements
100.2.2
The following shall be added after Subsection 100.2.2:

Any unauthorized damage or interference with private property including
trees
shall
be
made good to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the owner at the
Contractors
sole
expense.
100.2.3
Individual Removal of Trees or Stumps
Add the following provisions to Sub-Section 100.2.3:

Prior to the cutting/removal of any tree, the Contractor shall validate the tree inventory prepared by the Design
Consultants and provided by the Engineer. The Contractor shall request a copy of the Special Cutting Permit
issued by the DENR to DPWH from the Engineer prior to cutting.
Based on the validation of the tree inventory, the contractor shall prepare a straight line diagram indicating road
stationing, the trees within the RCoI and construction limits.
The Contractor shall prepare a list of trees in tabulated form showing the following information for easy
identification, as follows:
a. Station Limit and Name of Barangay
b. Description / Name / Species of Tree; diameter at breast height
c. Distance from the centerline of the road: RCoI and Construction limits;
d. Location (Left / Right).
No trees shall be cut / removed unless the Contractor has a copy of the Special Cutting Permit issued by the
DENR and the Philippine Coconut Authority (PCA) to the DPWH. Special requirements may be required to ball and
remove endangered species listed in the IUCN Red Book. The Contractor shall adhere to requirements
stipulated by the CENRO and PCA in the Tree Cutting Permit and other existing rules and regulation with
regards to the removal and cutting of any endangered species.
The Contractor shall secure license for the chain saw that will be used in the cutting of trees, both within the
RCoI and construction limits, from the CENRO. No cutting shall take place without representative from the
DENR.
Trees cut shall be disposed of in a manner conforming to the requirements of Sub-Section 100.2.2 and with the
requirements contained in the DENR permit.
Individual trees intended to be removed and relocated as ordered by the Engineer shall be removed and
relocated by the Contractor with care in the designated deposit area of the DENR.
Technical
Specifications:
of
100.4
IX - 67
Basis of Payment
Add the following before the first paragraph:

eer.
Measurement for activities under this Section shall be as follows:
Clearing and Grubbing: The work to be paid for shall be based on the total area cleared and grubbed which is
calculated in hectares within the limits defined on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer, including
adjustments that may be made to satisfy certain site requirements.
Removal of Trees: The diameter of trees will be measured at a height of 1.4m (54 inches) above the ground and trees
less than 150 mm (6 inches) in diameter will not be measured for payment. The units will be designated and
measured in accordance with the following schedule of sizes:
Payment will be made under the following Items:

Pay Item
100(1)
100(3)
Description
Unit of Measurement

Individual Removal of Trees,
(Small 0.15m - 0.90m dia)
Technical
Specifications:
Hectare
Each
of
ITEM 101 SP
101.1.1
IX - 68
Removal of Structures and Obstructions
Description
Add the following after the first paragraph:

In
addition
to what is provided in Section 101.1 of the Standard

Specifications,
this
specification covers the requirements for removing partially or totally
the
existing
portland cement concrete pavement, reinforced or non-reinforced concrete
or
masonry
structures and culverts, bridges, curb and gutter, grouted stone side
ditch,
buildings,
concrete entrance slabs, and other obstructions that are not designated to
remain.
The backfilling materials of cavities left by the structures removed shall
conform to Item 104 - Common Suitable Materials.
101.2
101.2.1
General
Add the following:

In application of the requirements of Section 101.2 the Contractor shall
remove and dispose all buildings, foundations, bridges, drainage
structures and other obstructions within the limits of the Works
except items designated to remain and utilities and obstructions to be
removed under other provisions of this Contract.
All designated salvageable material shall be removed, without damage, in
sections
or
pieces that may be readily transported, and shall be stored by the
Contractor
at
the
Department of Public Works and Highways (DPWH) District Office depots
as
directed.
Unusable perishable material shall be destroyed. Nonperishable
material,
waste
concrete and masonry shall as far as practicable be placed in slopes of
embankment.
Any broken concrete or masonry which cannot be used for construction
and
all
the
other materials not considered suitable for use elsewhere, shall be legally
disposed
by
the Contractor. In no case shall any discarded materials be left in
windrows
or
piles
adjacent to or within the site. The manner and location of disposal of
materials
shall
be
subject to the approval of the Engineer and shall not create an
unsightly
or
objectionable view.
Waste materials resulting from the demolition operation shall be loaded

and
hauled
in
such a manner and placed in such a location as not to pose a hazard
to
the
public,
domestic or wild animals or the environment and to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
When the Contractor is required to locate a disposal area outside the Site
at his expense, he shall obtain and file with the Engineer, permission
in writing from the property owner for the use of this property for the
purpose.
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 69
Basement or cavities left by structure removal shall be filled to

the
level
of
the
surrounding ground with approved granular material and, if they are
within
the
roadbed, the backfill shall be compacted in accordance with Item 104,
Embankment.
Existing utilities through at or near existing structures
protected and/or relocated as directed by the Engineer.
101.2.2
shall
be
Removal of Existing Bridges, Culverts and Other Drainage Structures
Add the following:

Bridges, culverts, and other drainage structures shall not be removed
until satisfactory arrangements have been made to accommodate traffic
and the flow of water.
Where ordered, the existing substructures shall be removed down to the
natural stream bottom and those parts outside the stream shall be
removed 300mm below natural ground surface. Portions of existing
structures within the limits of a new structure shall be removed to
accommodate the construction of the proposed structure.
Bridges designated as DPWH salvaged
without damage and match marked.
material
shall
be
dismantled
Blasting or other operations necessary to remove existing structures or

obstruction,
if
approved, and which may damage new construction, shall be completed
prior
to
placing
new work.
1. Removal of PCCP, Concrete Entrances, Curbs, etc.
All concrete pavement, curbs, channels, buildings, foundation, slabs, etc.
designated for removal shall be legally disposed of by the Contractor.
Concrete designated for use as riprap shall be broken into pieces not
exceeding 80 kg and stockpiled at designated locations for use on the project.
2. Removal of Steel Structures
Where shown on the drawings or ordered by the Engineer, existing
Bailey bridges and other steel structures shall be dismantled and stored
at suitable places as indicated by the Engineer, and handed over to the
Employer.
During and after dismantling, transporting and storing operations, all the
component of the structures shall be dismantled and stored at suitable
places as indicated by the Engineer, and handed over to the Employer.
If required in writing by the Engineer the Contractor shall dispose
non-reusable dismantled components of steel structures at suitable and
approved places.
Technical
Specifications:
of
Partial
IX - 70
or
total demolition/removal of existing bridges, culverts and

other
structures
required as shown on the drawings or ordered by the Engineer shall be
carried
out
by
the Contractor with the utmost care in order to avoid any damage to
the
part
of
the
structure or work that shall remain in place for subsequent repair,
improvement
or
upgrading.
Prior to commencement of the demolition the Contractor shall present to
the Engineer his proposed demolition strategy, methodology and timing
for the works including details of the safety precautions that he
proposed to adopt. At any stage prior to or during the demolition the
Engineer may instruct the Contractor to change his methodology
for whatever reason the Engineer may deem is necessary.
Approval of the demolition methods and timing by the Engineer in no
way relinquishes the Contractor of his responsibilities under the Contract.
3. Removal of Pipe Culvert
Sections of pipe lost from storage or damaged by negligence shall be
replaced at the Contractors expense. Pipe shown on the plans to be
plugged shall be left in place and the ends plugged with 300 mm brick
masonry.
4. Removal of Utilities
The removal of existing utilities required to permit orderly progress of
work will be accomplished by local agencies, unless otherwise shown
on the Drawings. Whenever a telephone or telegraph pole, pipeline,
conduit, sewer, electric line, or other utility is encountered and must
be removed or relocated the Contractor shall advise the proper local
authority or owner and arrange for its removal. The Contractor shall
also advise the Engineer of encountered utilities.
101.3

Measurement of partial or total demolition/removal of existing
culverts shall be according to the number or linear meter of corrugated
metal pipe or corrugated metal arch culvert of any size or of reinforced
and non-reinforced concrete pipe, as may be applicable, of any size,
acceptably removed, as directed by the Engineer.
No measurement for payment shall be made for the removal of portions
of existing RC Box Culverts ordered to be extended. The work involved
for this shall be subsidiary to the pay items for the extension of box
culverts.
Structural excavation for demolition/removal of existing culverts shall be
measured and paid for in accordance with the provisions of Item 103.
101.4
Basis of Payment
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 71
Add the following:

The quantities, determined as provided above, shall be paid at the
rate per unit of measurement, respectively, for each of the particular
pay
items
listed
below,
which price and payment shall be full
compensation for all materials, labour, equipment, tools and incidentals
necessary to complete the work of partial or total removal, including
end parts of culverts, removing, disposing or stockpiling of the
relevant portion of structure, as applicable, including supply and
compaction of the backfilling materials. The payment shall also include
hauling and delivery of salvaged materials for storage or disposal as
provided in Section 101.2.
Pay
Item
101(1)a
101(1)b
101(1)c
101(1)d
101(1)e
101(2)a
101(2)b
101(2)c
101(3)a
101(3)b
101(3)c
101(3)d
101(3)e
101(4)a
101(4)b
101(4)c
101(4)d
101(4)e
101(4)f
Meter
Description
Unit of
Measurement
Removal of Existing Cansolabao Bridge
Lump Sum
Removal of Existing Binaloan Bridge
Lump Sum
Removal of Existing Bayo Bridge
Lump Sum
Removal of Existing Burak Bridge
Lump Sum
Removal of Existing Lumatod Bridge
Lump Sum
Removal of Existing Kilometer Post (for Replacement)
Each
Removal of Existing Chevron Signs
Each
Removal of Existing Miscellaneous Road Signs
Each
Removal of Existing Asphalt Concrete Pavement
Square Meter
Breaking/Removal of Existing PCC Pavement
Square Meter
Breaking/Removal of Existing Concrete Sidewalk
Square Meter
Removal of Existing Grouted Riprap
Square Meter
Cutting/Breaking/Removal of Existing PCCP for
Square Meter
RCPC/RCBC Road Crossing
Removal of Existing Reinforced Concrete Pipe Culvert Linear Meter
610mm dia.
910mm dia.
1070mm dia.
1220mm dia.
1520mm dia.
Removal of Existing Metal Guardrail
(Metal Beam) Linear
including Posts
101(4)g Removal of Existing Concrete Guardrail including Posts Linear Meter
101(4)h Removal of Existing Reinforced Concrete Box Culvert, Linear Meter
1-0.80m x 0.80m
101(4)i Removal of Existing Reinforced Concrete Box Culvert, Linear Meter
1-1.25m x 1.00m
Technical
Specifications:
of
101(4)j
101(5)
Removal of Existing Reinforced Concrete Box Culvert, Linear Meter

1-1.80m x 1.50m
Removal of Existing Concrete Guard Blocks
Cubic Meter
ITEM 102 SP
102.1
IX - 72
Excavation
Description
Add the following:

In clarification of what is stated in Section 102.1 of the Standard
Specifications, it shall be understood that the disposal of all excavated
materials is at any distance and, therefore, no overhaul shall be paid.
Side casting shall be permitted only upon written approval by the
Engineer, in accordance with the condition specified in the Contract
Documents.
102.1.1
Roadway Excavation
Add the following:

In addition to what is provided in Section 102.1.1
Specifications, the following classification shall apply:
of
the
Standard
1. Common Excavation shall consist of all excavation including any

pavement layers of
the existing roadway including bituminous layers, but excluding
portland cement
concrete pavement, not covered by a separate item in the Bill
of Quantities
regardless of the nature of the material excavated, other than
Unclassified
Excavation, Unsuitable Excavation and Hard Rock Excavation.
Common Excavation shall include excavation for reshaping of side
ditches, drainage channels and culvert waterways in accordance
with the lines, levels and details shown on the drawings and
instruction of the Engineer.
2. Hard rock excavation shall include the excavation and removal of all
materials which
cannot be handled when worked with a well-equipped crawler tractor with
straight-
tilt bulldozer and deep penetration ripper of at least 200 horsepower,
as determined
by the Engineer and shall meet any of the following criteria.
a. Requires drilling and blasting for its removal or,
b. Requires the use of excavator with hydraulic hammer attachment or

compressed
air jack hammer for its removal.
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 73
Individual boulder greater than 1 cubic meter in volume shall be included

in this class when their nature and size are such that, in the opinion of
the Engineer, they cannot be removed without recourse to one of the
above methods.
Where a portion of excavation contains 50% or more by volume of
boulders of this order, such portion shall be considered as solid rock
excavation throughout.
3. Unsuitable excavation shall include any material containing
vegetable or organic
matter such as mulch, peat, organic silt, soil or sod which in the
opinion of the
Engineer is considered unsuitable for roadbed or embankment construction.
102.1.2
Borrow Excavation
Add the following:

In clarification of the provisions of Subsection 102.1.2 of the Standard
Specifications, the material from borrow shall have a soil classification of A-4
or better and soaked CBR not less than 7, when molded at the optimum
moisture content, as determined by AASHTO T99 and 95 percent of the
maximum dry density, as determined by AASHTO T 180, unless otherwise
permitted by the Engineer.
102.2.3
Utilization of Excavated Material
Add the following:

In addition to the provisions of Subsection 102.2.3 the Engineer shall
determine
the
suitability of the excavated materials for placement in the various areas of
the Works.
In general, the following shall apply:
Excavated materials from roadway cut, suitable for embankment, having
lower
quality
(higher Plasticity Index and lower CBR) shall be placed in the lower
layers
of
the
embankment to be constructed; excavated materials from roadway
cut,
suitable
for
embankment, having higher quality (lower Plasticity Index and higher
CBR)
shall
be
placed in the higher layers of the embankments to be constructed. The
above
provisions
apply unless otherwise shown on the drawings, specified in the Contract
Document
or
ordered by the Engineer.
The materials resulting from excavation of the windrows at the edges of
the existing roadway shall be generally considered unsuitable material
and therefore shall be disposed to waste unless otherwise permitted by

the Engineer.
Normally, the material resulting from widening of cuts shall be utilized for
construction of embankments unless otherwise ordered by the Engineer.
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 74
When sufficient materials cannot be obtained from the approved

enlargement of cuttings the Contractor shall obtain materials from
approved borrow pits outside the right of way boundary. The distance of
the borrow pits from the works sites shall not be grounds for extra
payments or revision of the contract price. In making his bid, the
Contractor shall inspect the site and make his estimate of the haulage
cost on the basis of his own survey of the possible nature and location of
the borrow pits.
The consent of the property owner for the excavation of borrow materials
and hauling along private access roads shall be secured by the
Contractor. Borrow pits shall be left in a condition acceptable to the
property owner meeting all conditions specified in this Contract and as
approved by the Engineer.
The Engineer
works
on the basis
of
fills as made
Engineer
check these
as
payment.
will decide the angles of the slope of cuts and fills as the
proceeds
of his evaluation of the soil characteristics. The actual lines
the
cuts
and
will be duly measured and recorded by the Contractor. The
will
records and will approve the measurements, if correct,
a
basis
for
Excavation and filling beyond the neat lines shown on the Drawings or
specified by the Engineer shall not be paid for.
Excess of excavation shall be backfilled, as directed by the Engineer,
with approved materials without extra payment to the Contractor.
102.2.8 Borrow Areas
Add the following:
Materials from borrow area shall normally be used for the construction of
embankment or for backfill when there is no suitable materials available
from roadway excavation, ditches and water courses, or structure
excavation. Permission to use materials from borrow areas shall first be
obtained in writing from the Engineer. Nevertheless, the total amount of
materials from roadway excavation, ditch and water course excavation
and structure excavations after deduction of the materials declared
unsuitable by the Engineer shall be considered available for use in the
work regardless of haul distances and any surplus material resulting
from the Contractor having used materials from borrow areas in its
place shall not be measured for payment.
102.2.9 Removal of Unsuitable Material
Add the following:
In general, whenever material of doubtful characteristics are discovered
in
any
area
where excavation is being performed or at places where embankment
will
be
formed
which, in the opinion of the Engineer, constitutes materials unsuitable for
use
as
backfill
or embankment, such material so discovered, shall not be used in the
works
until
the
Contractor has shown by laboratory tests, with the approval of the Engineer,
that they
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 75
satisfy the specifications requirements. If the test results show otherwise

and
if
allowed
by the Engineer to have the material treated or blended to produce the
materials
of
the
required quality, the Contractor may perform such treatment or
blending
to
the
complete satisfaction of the Engineer. Otherwise all materials declared
unsuitable
by
the Engineer shall be disposed in accordance with the relevant
provisions
of
the
specifications. In all cases, the Contractor, in electing to undertake
the
testing
and
blending operations, shall not be entitled to extra time in account of
the
delay
or
additional compensation to take care of the additional expenses incurred.
When
any material including excess or unsuitable materials from

excavation
are
to
be
disposed outside the right-of way, the Contractor shall first secure a
written
permit
from the property owner of the proposed disposal site. He shall submit to
the
Engineer
the said permit or a certified copy thereof together with a written
release
of
the
property owner absolving the Government and Employer from any
responsibility
in
connection with the disposal of materials on his property. No disposal
shall
be
made
on
the site without written permission granted by the Engineer. The disposal
of
materials
at the site shall be made in a neat and uniform manner approved by the
Engineer.
102.4
Basis of Payment
Add the following:

Pay Item
102(1)
102(2)
Description
Unsuitable Excavation
Surplus Common Excavation
ITEM 103 SP
103.1
Structure Excavation
Add at the end of this Subsection the following;

103.2.2
Excavation
Unit of Measurement
Cubic Meter
Cubic Meter
In clarification and in addition to what is provided in Section 103.2.2 of

the
Standard
Specifications, the Contractor shall carry out all excavations for bridges
and
structures
including headwalls and wing-walls, side U-ditches, seashore protection
walls,
etc.,
to
the lines, levels, dimensions shown on the Drawings or as directed by the
Engineer.
If not shown on the Drawings, the width of the excavation for pipe
culverts
shall
be
900mm greater than the horizontal inside diameter of the pipe to permit
450mm
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 76
sufficient working space on each side of the pipe for jointing and the
convenience in the compaction of backfill. For box culverts, 450 mm on
each side of the wall shall be excavated to allow sufficient working
space for the installation of steel bars and formworks. Sides of
excavation serving as formworks during the construction of box culverts
shall not be permitted.
The sides of pits, trenches and other excavations shall, where required,
be adequately timbered and supported to the satisfaction of the
Engineer, and all such excavations shall be of sufficient size to enable
the pipes and concrete to be laid accurately and proper refilling and
compaction to be carried out.
The Contractor shall take every precaution, and use the most
appropriate method of excavation, to avoid the loosening of materials or
the breaking of rock beyond the lines and grades shown on the
Drawings.
Should excavations be effected to a greater depth or width than is
necessary; then the Contractor shall at his own expense backfill the
excess excavation with approved materials, compacted to the density of
the adjacent ground, to the correct levels and dimension to the approval
of the Engineer.
Trenches shall be kept clean and free from water during excavation,
concreting, laying of pipes and backfilling, and the Contractor shall
dig diversion channels, erect cofferdams or otherwise de-water the trench.
Where, in the opinion of the Engineer, any invert has become soft or
unsuitable
to
receive the culvert or concrete bed due to the Contractors method of
working,
the
Contractor shall remove and replace the materials with non-structural
concrete
or
other
approved materials at his own expense, as instructed by the Engineer.
Where
concrete
is specified; the mix shall consist of ordinary Portland cement and
aggregate,
both
complying with the Specifications, Item 405. The weight of cement mixed
with
0.3
m3
of
aggregate shall not be less than 50 kg. The quantity of water shall
not
exceed
that
required to produce a smooth cement paste which coat evenly the
whole
of
the
aggregate.
For
culverts
which are to be constructed under trenched or

negative
projection
conditions, where the pipes are laid in a trench excavated below existing
ground
level
or
in a trench excavated in a previously constructed embankment the top
150
mm
in
the
trench invert shall be compacted to a dry density of 95% MDD (AASHTO T
99)
or
to
the
density of the adjacent ground, whichever is the greater, such that the
foundation
of
the
culvert or bedding is true to grade and of uniform density over the
whole
length
of
the
culvert.
The Engineers approval of all excavation for bridges, structures and
culverts shall be obtained prior to commencing any bedding for the
bridges, structure or culvert foundation or for installation of the culvert
itself.
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 77
Where excavation for structures is to be made through water bearing

strata that require dewatering, the Contractor shall provide and use
suitable water pumps for dewatering the excavation before placing
concrete.
Excavation surfaces against or upon which concrete, embankment fill or
backfill will be placed shall be prepared, protected and not harmed by
water.
Excavation for structures other than pipe culverts shall be classified for
measurement and payment into:
1. Excavation, Above Ordinary Water Level (AOWL); and
2. Excavation, Below Ordinary Water Level (BOWL).
The reference water elevation shall be that indicated on the plans. The
excavation shall also include the kind of material encountered whether
common or rock.
103.2.6
Backfill and Embankment for Structures Other than Pipe Culverts
Add the following:

In clarification of Section 103.2.6 foundation fill and backfill for structures
other
than
pipe
culverts
shall
be
granular
sub-base
material
meeting
the
requirements
of
Section
200 of the Standard Specifications and complying with the grading of Table
200.1.
For Shoreline Protection, there shall be a small amount of Granular
Backfill
to
be
provided and placed in accordance with the requirements in Section
103.1
and
in
conformity with the lines, grades, and dimensions shown in the Plans or
as
directed
by
the Engineer. The remaining backfilling materials shall conform to
Item
104
SP,
Embankment.
103.3.5
Basis of Payment
Delete the entire Section and replace with the following:

The accepted quantities, measured as specified in Section 103.3,
of
Measurement shall be paid for at the Contract unit price of each of the
particular
pay
items listed below that is included in the Bill of Quantities. The payment
shall
be
full
compensation for the removal and disposal of excavated materials
and
all
necessary
backfilling required under this Item including mechanical dewatering as
Method
necessary,
materials, labour, tools and
work
following Items.
incidentals
under
necessary
all
to complete
the
the

Pay Item
Description
Technical
Specifications:
Unit of Measurement
of
Pay Item
Description
IX - 78
Unit of Measurement
103(1)a
103(2)a
Structure Excavation
Bridge Excavation (AOWL)
Cubic Meter
103(2)b
Bridge Excavation (BOWL)
Cubic Meter
103(2)c
Riverbed/Riverbank Excavation
103(3)
Foundation Fill (Granular Material)
103(6)
Pipe Culvert and Drain Excavation
Cubic Meter
Cubic Meter
ITEM 104 SP
104.2
Embankment
Cubic Meter
Material Requirements
The subsection shall be supplemented by the following

paragraph:
Cubic Meter
All materials excavated from roadway structures, drainage and ditches

to
the
extent
that they are suitable in the formation of embankment and backfill shall
be
utilized
as
such.
Add at the end of the third paragraph this sentence:
Embankment material shall have a CBR value not less than 7%.
104.3
104.3.2
Methods of Construction
Add at the end of the fourth paragraph the following:

In places where the road has to be lifted by embankment over the
existing
asphalt
concrete pavement, the pavement shall be removed. The loosened
asphalt
pavement
material shall be removed and then stored for future use as directed by
the
Engineer.
The resulting roadbed shall be shaped and compacted to the
requirements
of
Subsection 104.3.3.
In places where the road has to be lifted by embankment over the
existing unpaved road, as shown on the Drawings or directed by the
Engineer, the surface of the road shall be scarified or ripped, to a depth
of 150mm. It shall then be bladed, reshaped and compacted to the
same or greater density as the material to be placed thereon to
provide uniform foundation for the embankment material to follow.
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 79
When fill is placed against a channel slope, vertical surfaces shall not
exceed one (1) meter in height.
104.3.3
Compaction
Add the following:

As a modification of what is stated in Section 104.3.3 under the heading of
Earth
of
the
Standard Specifications, each layer of embankment, except layers
consisting
of
rock,
shall be moistened or dried to a uniform moisture content within
2%
of
optimum
moisture content and shall be compacted to not less than 95% of the
maximum
density
as determined by AASHTO T99, for all the embankment, including the
150mm
Selected
Borrow for topping.
The last sentence under the heading of Rock is amended to read as follows:
Compaction Equipment shall compact the embankment over the full
width and in a longitudinal direction until there is no visible movement
of the rock fill when under the compacting equipment.
Add the following as Subsection 104.3.10
104.3.10
Formation of Embankment on Steep Slopes
When
embankment is to be placed and compacted on hillsides,

compacted
against
existing embankments, is placed against channel slopes, or built half width
at
a
time,
the
slopes that are steeper than 3:1 when measured at right angles to
the
roadway
or
channel shall be continuously benched over those areas where it is
required
as
the
work
is brought up in layers. Benching shall be of sufficient width to permit
operations
of
placing and compacting equipment. Vertical surfaces shall not exceed
one
(1)
m.
in
height. Each horizontal cut shall begin at the intersection of the original
ground
and
the
vertical sides of the previous cuts. Materials thus cut out shall be re-
compacted
along
the new embankment or fill slope in accordance with Subsection 104.3.3.
Add the following as Subsection 104.3.11
104.3.11 Formation of Embankments on Existing Channel Slope
When either stone fill material or common material is required to be
placed against existing channel slopes, benching shall be provided as
required in the previous Subsection 104.3.10, Formation of Embankment
on Steep Slopes.
Stone Fill at Abutment Slopes
Size of Stone
150 mm
Percent Larger than the Given

Diameter
0
Technical
Specifications:
of
Size of Stone
100 mm
60 mm
25 mm
IX - 80
Percent Larger than the Given

Diameter
20
50
90
Larger stones may be utilized when so directed by the Engineer.

Stone
fill
may be dumped in water provided the procedures for

dumping
ensure
an
absence of voids between the stone fill and the finished surface of the
abutment slope.
Above the stone fill suitable materials complying with the provisions of
Section 104.2 or as specified elsewhere in the contract documents shall
be used.
Stone riprap slope protection of the size and thickness shown in the
Drawings
shall
be
placed over the abutment slope fill, including stone fill, to the limits
shown
in
the
Drawings.
Placing of fill shall be suspended if, in the opinion of the Engineer, there
is inadequate compacting and grading equipment available or are in
poor operating condition not enable the fill to be shaped and compacted
immediately upon its placement.
104.4
Add the following:

Cutting to form benches and re-compacting the cut material will not be
measured for payment but will be considered incidental to the work required to
place the fill.
104.5
Basis of Payment

Stone fill channels will be measured by volume and paid for at the unit
price bid for this Item in the Bill of Quantities.
Pay Item
Description
104(1)a Embankment from Roadway Excavation

(Common Material)
104(1)b
Embankment from
Borrow 104(1)c
Compacted
Backfill
Unit
of
Measurement
Cubic
Meter
Cubic
Meter
Technical
Specifications:
Cubic Meter
of
ITEM 105 SP
105.3.3
IX - 81
Subgrade Preparation
Subgrade in Common Excavation
Add the following:

a. Common excavation is considered to occur where the designed
finished
grade
line
cuts into the original ground (in most cases this is the existing road
surface).
105.4.1
Delete this Section in its entirety and replace with the following:
specified
below
completed in accordance with the Drawings, Specifications and as
accepted
by
the
Engineer.
Replacement of the
150mm materials
removed under Section
105.2, Material
Requirements, is to be watered, shaped and compacted with material
approved by the Engineer and which has CBR value not less than 7%.
Should a leveling course be necessary to correct the irregularities of the
prepared subgrade or for non-compliance to the maximum allowable
tolerances prescribed in Section 105.3.2, such course shall not be
measured separately but deemed to have been included the item for
Sub-grade Preparation.
Subgrade Preparation (Common Material)
Square Meter complete in place.
shall
be
measured
per
Subgrade Preparation (Existing Pavement)

Square Meter complete in place.
shall
be
measured
per
105.5
Basis of Payment
Add the following:

Pay Item
Description
105(1)
105(2)
Subgrade Preparation (Common Material)

Subgrade Preparation (Existing Pavement)
Unit of Measurement
Square Meter
Square Meter
Technical
Specifications:
of
PART D
IX - 82
SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
ITEM 200 SP
200.2
Aggregate Subbase Course
Delete this section in its entirety and replace with the following:
Aggregate subbase course shall consist of natural or processed
aggregates such as gravel, sand, stone fragments, or crushed (partly or
totally) stone which shall conform to the following requirements.
Sieve Designation
Standard,
mm
50.0
37.5
25.0
9.50
4.75
2.00
0.425
0.075
Alternate US
Standard
2
1 -
1
3/8
No. 04
No. 10
No. 40
No. 200
Percent
Passing by
Wt.
Grading A
100
80 - 100
55 - 85
40 - 75
35 - 60
25 - 45
10 - 30
0 - 12
The portion passing the 0.425 mm (No. 40) sieve shall have a liquid
limit not greater than 35 and a plasticity index not greater than 12 as
determined by AASHTO T89 AND T90, respectively. The soaked CBR value
shall not be less than 30% at 100% MDD as determined by AASHTO T193.
Sieve analysis testing shall be performed in accordance with AASHTO T27
and
T11.
At
least 35% by weight of the aggregate retained on and above the 4.75
MM
(No.4)
sieve
shall have at least one fractured face. The coarse aggregate portion of
the
sample
when
tested in accordance with AASHTO T 96 shall have a percent loss no greater
than 50%.
If fillers, in addition to that naturally present in the aggregate subbase
material, are necessary for meeting the grading requirements and/or for
satisfactory bonding of the material, it shall be uniformly blended with
the subbase course material on the road. The material for such purpose
shall be obtained from sources approved by the Engineer, shall be free
from hard lumps and shall not contain more than 15 percent of material
retained on the No. 4 sieve.
When additional fillers, approved by the Engineer, are to be blended
with
subbase
material, this is to be blended off the road, the blending material shall
be spread in a
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 83
uniform
manner
over
the
loosely
spread
subbase
layer
in
quantities previously determined in order to satisfy the specified
grading and quality requirements in all respects and then brought to
the road and laid.
After each layer of subbase course material has been placed with or
without blending material added, it shall be thoroughly wetted, mixed to
the full depth of the required layer by scarifying and blending. When
and if directed by the Engineer, the materials shall be watered to
prevent segregation of particle sizes and to obtain the moisture content
required for compaction. When uniformly mixed, the mixture shall be
spread smoothly to the cross-section shown on the plans.
200.4
Add the following:

All work necessary including providing filler materials and all blending of materials
to
provide a subbase material conforming to the gradation and quantity is
specified
included in the work related to Aggregate
Subbase Course.
200.5
Basis of Payment
Add the following:

Payment
for
shall
be
following
made
under
Unit
Item:
Description
200
Aggregate Subbase Course
ITEM 202 SP
Course
of
Measurement
Pay Item
202.2
the
Cubic
Meter
Crushed Aggregate Base
Replace the second paragraph with the following:

following table. The base
Table
202.1
Grading
Requirements
is
replaced by the materials to be used must have
a smooth grading curve.
Table 202.1 - Grading Requirements
Sieve Designation
Standard,
mm
Alternate US
Standard
Percent
Passing by
Wt.
Grading A
37.5
1 -
100
Technical
Specifications:
of
25.0
19.00
4.75
0.425
0.075
IX - 84
1
3/4
No. 04
No. 40
No. 200
-
60 - 85
30 - 55
8 - 25
2 - 14
The portion passing the 0.425 mm (No. 40) sieve shall have a liquid
limit not greater than 25 and a plasticity index not greater than 6 as
determined by AASHTO T89 AND T90, respectively. The soaked CBR value
shall not be less than 80% at 100% MDD as determined by AASHTO T193.
Sieve analysis testing shall be performed in accordance with AASHTO T27
and
T11.
At
least 50% by weight of the aggregate retained on and above the 4.75
MM
(No.4)
sieve
shall have at least one fractured face. The coarse aggregate portion of
the
sample
when
tested in accordance with AASHTO T 96 shall have a percent loss no greater
than 40%.
202.5
Basis of Payment
Add the following:

Payment for shall be made under the following Item:
Pay Item
Description
202
Crushed Aggregate Base Course
Technical
Specifications:
Unit of Measurement
Cubic Meter
of
PART E
IX - 85
SURFACE COURSES
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
ITEM 300 SP
Aggregate Surface Course
300.2 SP
Materials Requirements
Add the following:

Grading A of Table 300.1 - Grading Requirements shall
ITEM 311 SP, Portland Cement Concrete Pavement
ITEM 311 SP
311.2.2
be used
Portland Cement Concrete Pavement
Fine Aggregate
Add the following:

Unless evidence of service record is offered which is satisfactory to the
Engineer,
the
fine aggregate shall not contain deleterious materials in such a form or
in
sufficient
quantity to affect adversely the strength at any age or the durability of
concrete.
Any
effect shall be determined by comparing the strength of concrete made
with
aggregates
in question with that of concrete made with acceptable aggregates. The
details
of
this
concrete test, including mix proportions, type of cement, type and
grading
of
reference
aggregates, age at test and criterion for acceptance, shall be approved
by
the
Engineer
prior to the test.
Fine aggregates composed of calcareous materials shall not be used
in pavement concrete because they are known to wear more rapidly
than other aggregate types.
311.2.3
Coarse Aggregate
Add the following:

The use of aggregate produced by crushing of dolomite or dolomitic
limestone shall not be permitted because it is not generally possible to
effectively
minimize
the
risk
of dedolomitization or alkali-carbonate
reaction.
Grading A specification shall be used in this Subsection.
311.2.11
Proportioning, Consistency and Strength of Concrete
Delete the second paragraph in its entirety and substitute with the following;
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 86
It is the intent of this Specification to require at least 364 kg of cement

per
cubic
meter
of concrete to meet the minimum strength requirements. The Engineer
shall
determine
from laboratory tests of the materials to be used, the cement
content
and
the
proportions of aggregate and water that will produce workable concrete
having
a
slump
of between 40 and 75mm (1-1/2 and 3 inches) if not vibrated or between
10
and
40mm
(1/2 and 1-1/2 inches) if vibrated, and a flexural strength of not less
than
4.14
MPa
(600 psi) when tested by the third-point method at fourteen (14) days in
accordance
with AASHTO T97 or a compressive strength of 27.6 MPa (4000 psi) for
cores
taken
at
twenty eight (28) days and tested in accordance with AASHTO T24.
To prevent harmful alkali-silica reaction, the Portland cement shall have a
total alkali content not exceeding 0.60 percent expressed as sodium
oxide (Na2O) equivalent. The total alkali content of the concrete mixture
shall be less than 3.0 kg. /m3 regardless of the rock type of aggregate
used.
311.3
Add the following:

The Contractor is required to perform off-site trial paving to attain the
output desired by the Contract. Equipment, tools, materials and manpower
performing all parts of the work shall be approved by the Engineer,
including the handling, measuring, batching, limitation of mixing, placing,
consolidation and finishing. A series of trial paving may be required by
the Engineer until such time the Engineer determines the activity
acceptable for actual site paving. Each trial paving length shall be a
minimum of 20 meters. There shall be no separate payment for this trial
paving activity. Cost, incurred by the Contractor shall be deemed covered by
the bid amount.
The Contractor shall provide a temporary smooth transition ramp of 40-
meter utilizing aggregate surface course materials to access the newly
open PCC pavement.
311.3.2
3.
Equipment
Paving and Finishing Equipment
Delete the first paragraph and replace with:

The concrete shall be placed with an approved slip form pavers or
finisher designed to spread, consolidate, screed and float finish the freshly
placed concrete in one complete pass of the machine in such a
manner that a minimum of hand finishing will be necessary to
provide a dense and homogeneous pavement in conformance with
the Drawings and Specifications.

311.3.22 Acceptance of Concrete
Add the following:
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 87
To enhance advancement in highway construction practices, aside from

the strength aspect of the pavement, the International Roughness
Index, IRI is an additional performance standard criterion adopted
internationally for acceptance of riding quality and smoothness.
Absolute smoothness is denoted by an IRI value of 0 m/km
indicating no vertical deviations from the surface of the road length. In
contrast, IRI values greater than 10 m/km represent rough, unpaved roadways.
For PCCP, IRI 3.0 value shall be adopted for the final surface to be
achieved.
It
is
part
of
the quality control of the Contractor to implement in accordance with the
specification.
Part of its obligation is to deliver its roughness called for the design
without
further
incentives.
In addition to the Quality Assurance requirements outlined in section SPL
B.5.2.21, the Contractor shall propose, for the Engineers approval , a
quality control progam that monitors the quality and consistency of
materials being used for the purpose of PCC construction. At a
minimum, the program shall monitor quality of water, quality and of ad
mixture products, gradation of materials used in the fabrication of
conceret including but not limited to coarse aggregate, fine aggregate and
cement products.
A
quality
control program shall outline how the concerete will be

monitored
during
delivery and placement. The plan shall indicate manpower, equipment
and
expertise
required to perform and assess field testing of concrete deliverd to the
project.
Item
311
Field Acceptance Tetsing PCC overlay located in Appendix A provides an
example
of
typical field tests and frequencies that may be used to develop a
Contractors
Quality
Control program.
In addition to other testing requirements specified in Appendix A the following test
is
required for acceptance of completed PCCP: Thickness Determination: 5
cores for every kilometer for one lane or 5 cores for every 500 meters
when two(2) lanes are poured
concurrently.
311.5
Basis of Payment
Add the following:

Payment to these items shall be full compensation for furnishing and
installing all materials including dowel bars and tie bars. The work shall
also include finishing, saw- cutting longitudinal and transverse joints,
sealing of joints and all labour, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary
to complete the work under these Items.

Pay Item
311(1)a
Description
Unit of Measurement

(Plain 265mm thk)
Technical
Specifications:
Square Meter
of
311(1)b
Meter
IX - 88
Square
(Plain 230mm thk)

311(1)c

(Plain 150mm thk)
Square Meter
SPL E1
Unbonded Concrete Overlays of Concrete Pavement
SPL E1.1
Description
This item shall consist of placing an interlayer material on an

existing concrete pavement and constructing an unbonded concrete
overlay in accordance with the details and locations shown on the
plans. The overlay shall be placed in accordance with Section 311 SP,
unless otherwise specified below.
SPL E1.2
SPL E1.2.1
Material
All material shall be in accordance with Section 311 unless otherwise specified.
SPL E1.2.2
Patching Material
Other than specified in SPL 3.3.1, patching material for use in the
repair of surface defects less than 50 mm wide and 25mm deep prior
to the overlay shall consist of bituminous material, cementitious
material, or other equivalent material meeting the approval of the
Engineer.
SPL E1.2.3
Crushed Aggregate Base Course (Unbonded Interlayer)
The interlayer material shall be a minimum 75 mm thick layer of

Crushed Aggregate Base Course meeting the material Specifications of
Item 202 SP CRUSHED AGGREGATE BASE COURSE shall be in
conformance with the lines, grades, thickness and typical cross sections
shown on the plans details.
SPL E1.2.4
Concrete
All materials and procedures for

accordance with Section 311 SP.
SPL E1.2.5
the
unbonded
overlay
Dowel Bars
Technical
Specifications:
of
shall
be
in
IX - 89
Dowel bars shall be in accordance with Section 311.2.5; Reinforcing Steel,

and of the size shown on the plans.
SPL E1.3
SPL E1.3.1
Surface Preparation
All holes greater than 50mm wide and 25mm deep in the surface of
the
traffic
lanes
shall be filled with Crushed Aggregate Base Course material meeting
Item
202
SP
gradation and shall be compacted to a minimum of at least 100 percent of
the
maximum
dry density as determined in accordance with AASHTO T-180, Method D
and
to
a
flat,
tight surface.
At locations with rocking or unstable existing concrete slabs with high
deflection
or
pumping problems, remove slab and repair subbase/subgrade where
soft
spots
or
if
excessive loss of support exists with properly compacted Crushed
Aggregate
Base.
At
locations of badly shattered slabs with working cracks, punchouts or
blowups,
remove
and replace concrete pavement with properly compacted full-depth
crushed
aggregate
subbase meeting Item 202 requirements, repair subbase/subgrade where
soft
spots
or
if excessive loss of support exists. Repair area should extend at least
475mm
beyond
the
area of distress. In repair areas, excavate to a depth of 150mm below
any
exposed
subgrade; remove and replace the excavated subgrade with additional
subbase
material
(as above).
SPL E1.3.2
Expansion Joints
Any transverse expansion joints in the

specifically marked and specified as such.
SPL E1.3.3
existing
pavement
shall
be
Crushed Aggregate Base Course (Unbonded Interlayer)
The Crushed Aggregate Base interlayer shall comply with the requirements
of Item 202 SP. and will be placed with a minimum thickness of 75 mm.
SPL E1.3.4
Concrete Pavement
All Concrete Pavement procedures and material for the unbounded

overlay
shall
be
in
accordance
with
Section 311,
PORTLAND
CEMENT
CONCRETE
PAVEMENT. The
temperature of concrete delivered to the site shall not exceed 90
degrees F. The newly placed concrete shall have a traverse tining finish.
The concrete shall be cured with white pigment curing compound.
The
flexural strength of the concrete test specimens as tested (per

AASHTO
T-97)
in
accordance with Subsection 311.3.10, Test Specimens, shall be a
minimum
of
4.14MPa
(600psi) at 28 days when tested by the third point method. The flexural
strength
shall
be computed by averaging the results of two test specimens fabricated
from
the
same
sampling event.
Technical
Specifications:
of
SPL E1.3.5
IX - 90
Surface Treatment
Before the unbonded concrete overlay is placed, the interlayer surface

shall be placed in uniform lifts suitable for the compaction equipment
selected; moisture conditioned and compacted to at least 100 percent
of the maximum dry density as determined by AASHTO T-180, Method
D in accordance with Item 202 SP.
SPL E1.3.6
Dowel Bars
Dowel bars shall be installed at locations as shown in the plans.

All transverse joints shall be doweled, using 32mm diameter dowels for
the unbonded overlay. Transverse joints shall be uniformly spaced at
4.2m. Transverse joints shall not be located within 1m of an existing
transverse joint or working crack. Place the new unbonded overlay
transverse joint on the approach side of an existing joint or crack. All
joints in the overlay shall be perpendicular to the roadway centerline
unless otherwise noted. All transverse joints should comply with
DPWH
Standard
Plan
Sheet
and Pavement Joint Contraction and
Expansion Details.
SPL E1.3.7
Tie Bars
Tie bars shall be deformed installed between lanes on Unbonded PCC

Overlay or as shown on the drawings.
SPL E1.3.8
Should
Shoulder Area Soils
the
unbonded overlay design involve cantilevering the

overlay
pavement
beyond the in-place pavement, all in-place soil in the shoulder area should
be
excavated
in its entirety and replaced with compacted Crushed Aggregate Base
course
gravel
to
the bottom of the in-place concrete, to the bottom of any aggregate
base
under
the
concrete pavement, or to a depth of 400mm whichever is deeper. The
location
and
grade of the replacement gravel subbase should be placed to the limits
as
shown
on
the
typical sections. Supplemental dowel reinforcement shall be installed at
the
longitudinal
edge joint along the cantilevered overhang of the new overlay as shown on
the plans.
Shoulder Area Soils shall be moisture conditioned to within
optimum moisture and compacted to a minimum of 95%
maximum dry density as determined by AASHTO T 99.
SPL E1.4
Unbonded
Concrete
Overlay
Pavement
shall
be
measured
2% of
of the
per
the
Square Meter complete in place in accordance

Specifications and as accepted by the Engineer.
SPL E1.5
with
Basis of Payment
Technical
Specifications:
of
the
Drawings,
IX - 91
The accepted quantity measured as specified Method of Measurement

shall
be
paid
for
at the Contract unit price of the Pay Item listed below that is included
in
the
Bill
of
Quantities.
Payment shall be full compensation
materials, including dowel bars and tie
finishing, saw cutting longitudinal and
and all labour, equipment, tools and
work under this Item.
for furnishing and installing all

bars. The work shall also include
transverse joints, sealing of joints
incidentals necessary to complete the

Pay Item
SPL E1
Description
Unit of Measurement
Unbonded Concrete Overlay of Concrete

Pavement (Plain 230mm thk)
Technical
Specifications:
Square Meter
of
SPL E2
Woven Geotextile
SPL E2.1
Description
IX - 92
This work shall consist of furnishing and installing woven geotextile, prior
to placement of pavement layers or embankment materials. The woven
geotextile shall be installed as indicated on the drawings and these
specifications or as directed by the Engineer.
SPL E2.2
Composite:
The
woven
geotextile separation and reinforcement filter

manufactured
from high tenacity polypropylene fibrillated yarns, stabilized and with
minimum
pH
level 13 chemical resistances, specifically designed to provide separation,
filtration
and
reinforcement from moderate to severe site condition, thereby protecting
the
integrity
of the granular material layer of the load support structure also
effectively
dissipates
the excess pore water pressures associated with load bearing on the soft
and
saturated
subgrade.
The supplier / manufacturer shall certify compliance of these requirements:
The
supplier shall submit a Statement of Quality certifying that

materials
to
be
delivered to site shall meet or exceed the specified requirements
signed
by
the
QA/QC
production
manager;
submission
must
also
include
appropriate
product
literature, country of origin where the product is manufactured,
independent
test
results by third party testing facility and other documentation. Any
product
re-
branding is not allowed and shall be rejected outright from product
accreditation
approval.
To
facilitate quality assurance, each roll of the woven geotextile

delivered
to
site
shall be clearly labeled with brand name, grade and production batch
number.
The
woven geotextile products not meeting these requirements will be rejected
from site.
Table 1
Woven Geotextile Requirements
Test Methods
Mechanical Properties ASTM
ISO
Tensile Strength
D 4595 10319
Elongation
D 4595 10319
Units
US Units
SI Units
Lbs / ft
kN/m
%
%
Minimum Average Roll Values

US - MD / CD
SI - MD / CD
2,741 / 2,741
40 / 40
15
15
CBR Puncture
UV resistance after
500 hours
D 6241 12236
D 4355 11341
lbs
%
kN
%
1,124
90
5
90
Opening Size O90

Roll Length
Roll width
D 4751 12956
Inches
ft
ft
mm
m
m
0.0118
328
14.76
0.30
100
4.50
Technical
Specifications:
of
SPL E2.3
IX - 93
Construction and Installation Requirements
Cutting: the woven geotextile can be cut either by a sharp knife,

scissors or heat welding cutters.
Joints and Overlaps: Joining of the woven geotextile shall be either by
sewing of heat welding or overlapping the joints depending on the
site
conditions
and
geotextile application. Overlap joints shall be
performed in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations.
Sewing
is recommended for workable site conditions. Geotextile

sheets
are
sewn
together using a portable sewing machine with overlap between
25mm
to
75mm.
the most common seam provided using a portable sewing machine
is
the
prayer
seam. The stitch can be either single or double thread using a polyester
tread.
Shipping and Storage: The woven geotextile filter system shall be
kept
dry
and
wrapped such that it is protected from the elements during shipping
and
storage.
If
stored outdoors, the fabric shall be elevated and protected with a
waterproof cover.
Weather Limitations: The installation shall be performed during dry
conditions or as approved by the Engineer.
SPL E2.4
Woven Geotextile shall be measured per the Square Meter furnished

and installed in accordance with the Drawings, Specifications and as
accepted by the Engineer. Additional material used for overlap joints
will not be measured for direct payment and is considered incidental to
this Item.
SPL E2.5
Basis of Payment

Measurement section shall be paid for at the Contract unit price at the Pay
Payment shall be
full compensation for furnishing and installing
Woven Geotextile including all materials, labour, equipment, tools and
incidentals necessary to complete the work under this Item.
Pay Item
SPL E2
Description
Woven Geotextile
Unit of Measurement
Square Meter
Technical
Specifications:
of
PART F
IX - 94
BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
ITEM 400 SP
Piling
Delete Section 400.3.7 in its entirety and replace with the following:
400.3.7 SP
Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles in Drilled Holes
400.3.7.1 SP Description
This item consists of construction of bored piles in drilled holes through
surface gravel and underlying silty clay strata drilled with the use of
specialized equipment and water as soil surface stabilizer. It shall include
the excavation and drilling of holes, furnishing and placing steel casing
for the top zone of the pile and incidentals necessary for the execution
of the work. Pile construction shall be at locations, dimensions and
lengths indicated in the drawings and in accordance with this specification.
400.3.7.2 SP Working Drawings
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review and approval, an
installation plan for the construction of bored piles. The submittal shall
include the following:
1. List of proposed equipment to be used including cranes, drills,
augers, bailing
buckets, final cleaning equipment, desanding equipment, slurry
pumps, sampling
equipment, tremies or concrete pumps, etc.
2. Details of overall construction operation sequence and the sequence
of
bored
pile
construction in bents or groups.
3. Details of pile excavation methods.
4. For
bored piles, when slurry

proposed
circulate and desand slurry.
is
required,
to
details
of
the method
mix,
5. Details of methods to clean the shaft excavation.

6. Details of reinforcement placement including support and centralization methods.
7. Details of concrete placement, curing and protection.
8. Other information shown on the Drawings or requested by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall not start construction for which working drawings
are
required
until the Engineer has approved such drawings. Such approval shall not
relieve the
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 95
Contractor of responsibility for results obtained by use of these drawings

or any of his other responsibilities under the contract.
400.3.7.3 SP Material Requirements

Reinforcing Steel
Reinforcing Steel Bars shall conform to the requirements of Item 404(60),
Reinforcing Steel, Grade 60.
Concrete
Concrete and concrete materials shall conform to applicable requirements
of Item 405, Structural Concrete and the Special Provisions. Maximum
Course aggregate size 19mm in accordance with standard specifications.
Concrete for bored pile shall be Class D with strength requirement of 27.6
MPa (4,000 psi) @ 28 days.
The use of appropriate additives to assure mix consistency shall be
allowed if approved by the Engineer. A retarder of proven adequacy and
approved by the Engineer shall be used to ensure that early hardening of
concrete during tremie operation will not occur. Range in slump 150-
200mm at placement.
Concrete Mix Design.
Provide four copies of a mix design for Bored Pile Concrete to the
Project
Manager
for
approval thirty calendar days before production. Include provisions in the
mix
design
for a retarded set that maintains flow characteristics for a sufficient
length
of
time
to
permit completion of the bored pile. Include with the mix design a
statement
of
slump
value 4 hours after batching. The slump 4 hours after batching is required
to
be
greater
than 125 mm. Testing and acceptance of Drilled Shaft Concrete is as
specified
for
Class
D
concrete in Standard Specifications Section Item 405, Structural Concrete.
Casings
Casings, which are required to be incorporated as part
permanent work shall conform to AASHTO M183 (ASTM A-36)
of
the
Silt Curtain
The silt curtain fabric shall consist of high tenacity and high quality
polyester yarn. The manufacturing process shall consist of a weaving
technique to form a dimensional
stable fabric providing significant tensile reinforcement capacity in the
warp and weft direction. The manufacture shall certify compliance with
this requirement.
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 96
The fabric shall have high resistance against hydrolysis.

In order to
ensure adequate
resistence to hydrolysis, the uncoated yarns shall be tested according to
EN 12447 and
that the retained tensile strength after the test shall be more than 50% of
the original
tensile strength. To ensure high resistence against acide and alkaline
liquids, the
uncoated yarns shall be tested according to EN 14030. The retained
tensile strength
shall be more than 50% of the original tensile strength. The
manufacturer shall provide
independent test results to verify the superioty and quality of the fabric
supplied.
400.3.7.4 SP Construction
Protection of Existing Structures
All reasonable precautions shall be taken to prevent damage to existing
structures
and
utilities. The measures shall include but are not limited to, selecting
construction
methods and procedures that will prevent excessive caving of the
bored
hole,
monitoring and controlling the vibrations from the driving of casing
or
sheeting
or
drilling of the pile.
Construction Sequence
All excavation of the foundation in which bored
constructed shall be completed before drilling begins.
piles
are
to
be
Where bored piles are to be installed in conjunction with embankment

placement, they shall be constructed after the placement of the fill unless
shown on the Plans.
General Methods and Equipment
Excavation shall be performed through whatever materials are
encountered,
to
the
dimensions and elevations shown on the plans or ordered by the
Engineer.
The
methods and equipment used shall be suitable for the intended purpose
and
materials
encountered.
Construction Method Using Polymer Slurry
This method consists of using water or polymer slurry to maintain
stability of the hole perimeter while advancing the excavation to final
depth, placing the reinforcing cage and concrete. This procedure may
require desanding and cleaning the slurry; final cleaning of the
excavation by means of bailing the shaft before placing concrete with a
tremie or concrete pump. Temporary casing can be required to prevent

sloughing of the top of the shaft excavation, unless it is demonstrated to
the satisfaction of the Engineer that the surface casing is not required.
Alternative Construction Methods
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 97
The Contractor may propose alternative methods to prevent caving and

control ground water, such proposal, accompanied by supporting technical
data, shall be submitted in accordance with section 400.1.2, Test Piles, for
the approval of the Engineer.
Temporary Bored Pile Casing
Always use temporary casing to facilitate shaft construction and prevent
sloughing and caving of the bored pile sidewalls during drilling. Furnish
temporary casing material with sufficient strength, size, thickness and
length to provide the required drilled shaft dimensions when the
temporary casing is removed.
DPWH will provide a Geotechnical Section representative on-site during
drilling
and installation operations to log the excavation. The Project
Engineer will notify the DPWH Geotechnical Section at least seven (7)
calendar days prior to start of drilled shaft excavation to schedule the
on-site representative.
The bottom elevation of the bored pile shown on the plans may be
adjusted during construction if the Engineer determines the foundation
material encountered during drilling is unsuitable or differs from those
anticipated in design of the drilled shaft. The Contractor shall take soil
samples or rock cores when shown on the plans or as directed by the
Engineer to determine the character of the material directly below the
shaft excavation. The Engineer will inspect the samples or cores and
determine the final depth of required shaft excavation.
Shaft Excavation
Use excavation methods that provide contact with firm, undisturbed soil
or rock with the sides and bottom of the shaft concrete when the
temporary casing is removed. Do not excavate holes larger than the
outside diameter of the temporary or permanent casing to facilitate
casing installation.
Shaft Locations, Alignment and Tolerances
Drill all shafts to the bottom elevations specified or as directed by the
Project Engineer. Construct the shaft so the vertical centerline axis of
the finished shaft is within 75 millimeters of the plan location at the top
of the shaft.
The
following
construction
construction
tolerances
of
shall
be
maintained
bored
in
piles:
The bored pile shall be within 75 mm of the plan position in the
horizontal plane at the plan elevation for the top of the shaft.
The vertical alignment of the drilled hole shall not vary from the plan
alignment by more than 20 mm per meter.
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 98
After all the pile concrete is placed, the top of the reinforcing steel
cage shall be no more than 150 mm above and no more than 75 mm
below plan position.
The top elevation of the pile shall be within 25 mm of the plan top of
pile elevation. The bottom of the shaft excavation shall be normal to
the axis of the pile within 60 mm per meter of pile diameter.
Sloughing and Caving
Correct any sloughing or caving of the shaft excavation sidewalls.
Remove all sloughed material and smooth the caved area surface and
edges to facilitate the flow of concrete into the caved space. Ensure
complete filling of the shaft. If caving occurs during placement of
drilled shaft concrete, immediately stop the flow of concrete and
undertake corrective measures to completely remove the sloughed
materials from the shaft. If necessary to facilitate material removal,
remove the concrete and reinforcing steel already placed in the shaft.
Permanent Casing
Furnish and install permanent casing as specified. Permanent casing may
be oversized up to 75mm if necessary to facilitate temporary casing
installation. Install permanent casing to the plan elevation, or elevation
established by the DPWH Engineer.
Temporary Casing
Furnish temporary casing extending to the bottom of the drilled shaft
excavation
to
prevent material from entering the shaft excavation. Be prepared to
provide
up
to
3
m
of additional temporary casing in the event the shaft bottom elevation is
lowered
during
construction. Use casing with an outside diameter no less than the
specified
diameter
of
the shaft. Advance the casing prior to or concurrently with the
excavation.
Limit
the
excavation in advance of the casing tip to 3 meters. Withdraw the
temporary
casing
while placing the drilled shaft concrete. During casing extraction, maintain
a
level
of
fresh concrete in the casing a minimum of 1.5 meters above the
hydrostatic
water
or
drilling fluid level outside the casing, or a minimum of 1.5 meters above
the
bottom
of
the casing, whichever is higher. Maintain an adequate level of concrete
within
the
casing
so fluid trapped behind the casing is displaced upward and discharged
at
the
ground
surface without contaminating or displacing the shaft concrete. Temporary
casings
that
have become bound or fouled during shaft construction and cannot be
removed
are
considered to be a defect in the drilled shaft. Correct defective shafts
using
approved
methods at no cost to the DPWH. Corrective action may consist of, but is
not
limited
to,
the following:
1. Removing the drilled shaft concrete and extending the drilled shaft deeper
to
compensate for the loss of frictional capacity to the cased zone.
2. Providing straddle drilled shafts to compensate for capacity loss.
3. Providing a replacement drilled shaft.
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 99
Obstructions
An obstruction is considered a specific object exceeding 50% of the shaft
diameter that cannot be removed from the drilled shaft excavation using
conventional augers or core barrel
tools.
If
an
obstruction
is
encountered, promptly notify the Project Engineer. Submit four copies of
a proposed obstruction removal method to the Project Engineer for
approval within two calendar days of encountering the obstruction
Excavated materials which are removed from the hole excavation and
any drilled fluid used shall be disposed of and measure of environmental
protection due to discharge is needed in accordance with the special
provisions or as directed by the Engineer.
Slurry
Slurry used in drilling process shall be mineral slurry. The slurry shall
have
both
a
mineral grain size that will remain in suspension and sufficient
viscosity
and
gel
characteristics to transport excavated material to a suitable screening
system.
The
percentage and specific gravity of the material used to make the
suspension
shall
be
sufficient to maintain the stability of the excavation and to allow
proper
concrete
placement. The level of the slurry shall be maintained at a height
sufficient
to
prevent
caving of the hole.
The polymer slurry shall be premixed thoroughly with clean fresh water
and adequate time allotted for hydration prior to introduction into the
drilled hole. Adequate slurry tanks will be required when specified. No
excavated slurry pits will be allowed without written permission of the
Engineer when slurry tanks are required on the project. Adequate
desanding equipment will be required when specified. Steps shall be
taken as necessary to prevent the slurry from setting up in the
shaft
excavation,
such
as, agitation, circulation and adjusting the
properties of the slurry.
Control tests using suitable apparatus shall be carried out by the
Contractor on the polymer slurry to determine density, viscosity and pH.
An acceptable range of values for those physical properties is shown in
the following table:
Range of Values (at 68F)
Property (units)
Density (pcf)
Times of Slurry Time of Concrete

Introduction
(in hole)
Test Method
64.3 to 69.1
64.3 to 75.0
Density
Balance
Viscosity (sec per quart) 28 to 45
28 to 45
Marsh Cone
Ph
8 to 11
pH paper or
8 to 11
meter
Notes:
Increase density values by 2.0 pcf in salt water.
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 100
If desanding is required, sand content shall not exceed 4 percent (by

volume) at any point in the shaft excavation as determined by the
American Petroleum Institute Sand Content Test.
Test to determine density, velocity and pH values shall be done during
the drilling to establish a consistent working pattern.
Prior to placing concrete, slurry samples shall be taken from the bottom
and at intervals not exceeding 3 meters for the full height of slurry.
Any heavily contaminated slurry that has accumulated at the bottom of
the shaft shall be eliminated. The mineral slurry shall be within
specification requirements immediately before placement.
Excavation Inspection
The Contractor shall provide equipment for checking the dimensions and
alignment of each shaft excavation. The dimensions and alignment
shall be determined by the Contractor under the direction of the
Engineer. Final shaft depth shall be measured after final cleaning.
The shaft excavation shall be cleaned so that a minimum of 50 percent
of the base will have less than 12.5 mm of sediment and at no place on
the base more than 25 mm of sediment. The Engineer will determine shaft
cleanliness.
Silt Curtain
Installation of the fabric (silt curtain) shall be in accordance with the
manufactures
instructions. The supplier shall provide a method statement detailing
installation
procedure.
Reinforcing Steel Cage Construction and Placement
The reinforcing steel cage consisting of the steel shown on the Plans plus
cage
stiffener
bars, spacers, centralizers and other necessary appurtenance shall
be
completely
assembled and placed as a unit immediately after the shaft excavation is
inspected
and
accepted and prior to shaft concrete placement. Support the steel cage
from
the
top
so
that racking and distortion are prevented. Remove internal stiffeners as
necessary
as
the steel cage is placed in the borehole to prevent interference with the
placement
of
concrete.
Where the reinforcing steel cage length is too long for the placement as a
single unit, the cage may be placed in separate units such that
appropriate means of splicing the longitudinal steel is provided for such
splices to the Engineer for approval.

The reinforcing steel in the hole shall be tied and supported so that the
reinforcing
steel
will remain within allowable tolerances until the concrete will support the
reinforcing
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 101
steel. When concrete is placed by tremie methods, temporary hold-down

devices
shall
be used to prevent uplifting of the steel cage during concrete
placement.
Concrete
spacers or other approved non-corrosive roller type spacing devices shall
be
used
at
sufficient intervals not exceeding 1.50 meters along the shaft to
ensure
concentric
location of the cage within the shaft excavation. When the size of
the
longitudinal
reinforcing steel exceeds 25.0 mm, such spacing shall not exceed 3.0
meters.
Concrete Placement, Curing and Protection
Concrete shall be placed as soon as possible after reinforcing steel
cage
placement.
Concrete placement shall be continuous in the shaft to the top elevation
of
the
shaft.
Placement shall continue after the shaft is full until good quality concrete
is
evident
at
the top of the shaft. Concrete shall be placed through a tremie or
concrete
pump
using
methods specified in Sub-Section 407.3.1.3 of Volume II, Placing of Concrete
in Water.
For pile less than 2.5 meters in diameter, the elapsed time from
beginning
of
concrete
placement in the shaft to the completion of placement shall not exceed
2.0
hours.
For
piles 2.50 meters and greater in diameter, the concrete placing rate shall
be
not
less
than 9.0 meters of pile height per each 2.0-hour period. The concrete
mix
shall
be
of
such design that the concrete remains in workable plastic state throughout
the
2.0-hour
placement limit. Complete concrete placement within 24 hours of
completing
the
bored
pile/shaft excavation.
When the top pile elevation is above ground, the portion of the pile
above ground shall be formed with a removable form or permanent
casing when specified.
The top of concrete shall be vibrated or rodded to a depth of 1.5
meter below the ground surface except where soft uncased soil or slurry
remaining in the excavation will possibly mix with the concrete.
After placement, the temporarily exposed surfaces of the shaft concrete
shall be cured in accordance with the provision Section 407.3.8, Curing
Concrete.
For at least
construction
48.0
hours
after
pile concrete
operations
has
been
placed,
no
that would cause soil movement adjacent to the shaft, other than mild
vibration,
shall
be
conducted.
Portion of bored piles exposed to a body of water shall be protected by
form in place for a minimum of seven (7) days after concrete placement.
400.5 SP
Basis of Payment
Add the following:

The accepted quantity measured as specified in Section 400.4 Method of
Measurement
shall be paid for at the Contract unit price per Linear Meter of
piles
of
specified
diameter listed in the Bill of Quantities which price and payment
shall be full
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 102
compensation for furnishing all materials, labour, equipments and incidentals

including
temporary works and staging areas necessary to complete the work under this
Item.
Pay Item No. Description
400(17)a
400(17)b
Unit of Measurement
Cast-in-Drilled Holes Pile 600 mm dia

Cast-in-Drilled Holes Pile 2000 mm dia
Linear Meter
Linear Meter
ITEM 404 SP
404.4
Reinforcing Steel
Add the following:

For other Structures defined in these specifications as being paid for
either per unit or per linear meter, no additional payment shall be
made under item 404 as they are deemed to be included in the
corresponding unit per item.
The quantity to be paid for shall be the calculated theoretical number of
Kilograms of reinforcing steel bars, mesh or mats as determined from the
net length of the steel bars as shown on the drawings.
The weight of plain or deformed bars will be computed from theoretical
weight of plain round bars of the same nominal size as shown on the
following tabulations:
Designatio
n
#2
#3
#4
#5
#6
Unit
Weight
Designation
(kg/m)
Size
(mm
)
6
10
12
16
20
0.222
0.616
0.888
1.579
2.466
404.5
Basis of Payment
Technical
Specifications:
#8
#9
#10
#11
Size
(mm)
25
28
32
36
Unit
Weight
(kg/m)
3.854
4.833
6.313
7.991
of
IX - 103
Add the following:

Pay Item
404(40)
404(60)
Description
Unit of Measurement
Reinforcing Steel Bars, Grade 40

ITEM 405 SP
Kilogram
Kilogram
Structural Concrete
Delete Section 405.1.2 in its entirety and replace with the following:
405.1.2
Classes and Uses of Concrete for Bridge Structures
Seven classes of concrete are provided for this Item, namely: A (Mod), A,
AA, B, C, D, P and Lean Concrete. Each class shall be used in that part
of Bridge Construction as called for on the plans.
The classes of concrete for bridge structures are used as follows:
Class A (Mod) -
Cast in Place Girders, Slabs, Diaphragms, Wing walls,

Back walls, Copings ,Columns and Shear Keys
Class A
Footing, Approach slab, box culvert, and other concrete

structures
Class AA
Precast R.C. Piles
Class B
Massive concrete, pipe bedding, gravity walls, un-

reinforced or with only small amount of reinforcement.
Class C
Thin reinforced sections such as railings and rail posts
Class D
Bored Piles
Class P
Pre-stressed concrete
Lean Concrete -
Concrete on thin layer underneath footing and where

shown on the Drawings
Cement for all piles and abutments of bridges and Box Culverts shall be
Type
II
Sulfate
Resistant, in accordance with AASHTO M85, the rest shall be Type I,
Portland cement.
405.2.2
Fine Aggregates
Add the following paragraph:

Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 104
The fine aggregate shall not contain deleterious materials in such a form
or in sufficient quantity to affect adversely the strength at any age or
the durability of concrete. Any effect shall be determined by comparing
the strength of concrete cylinders made with the aggregate in question
with that of concrete made with acceptable aggregates. The details of
this concrete test, including mix proportions, type of cement, type of
grading of reference aggregates, age at test and criterion for acceptance,
shall be approved by the Engineer prior to the test.
405.2.3
Coarse Aggregate

The use of aggregate produced by crushing of dolomite or dolomitic
limestone shall not be permitted because it is not generally possible to
effectively
minimize
the
risk
of dedolomitization or alkali-carbonate
reaction.
405.2.8
Expansion Joint Materials
Delete this Sub-section in its entirety and replace with the following:
1. Premolded Expansion Joint Filler
2. Joint Filler (Sealant)
Poured Joint Filler material shall be mixed with asphalt and mineral or
rubber filler conforming to the applicable requirements of Item 705 Joint
Materials.
3. Polystyrene
Expanded polystyrene and hard board shall be commercially available
polystyrene
board. Expanded polystyrene shall have a flexural strength of 0.24
MPa
(35
psi,
minimum, determined in accordance with ASTM Designation: C203, and a
compressive
yield strength of between 0.11 MPa and 0.28 MPa (16 and 40 psi),
at
5%
percent
compression. When shown on the plans, surfaces of expanded
polystyrene
shall
be
faced with hardboard of minimum thickness of 3.2 mm (1/8 inch). All
boards
shall
be
held in place by nails, waterproof adhesive or other means as approved by the
Engineer.
405.4.1
Proportioning and Strength of Structural Concrete
To prevent harmful alkali-silica reaction, the Portland cement shall have a
total alkali content not exceeding 0.60 percent expressed as sodium oxide
(Na2O) equivalent.
The total alkali content of the concrete mixture shall be less than 3.0
kg/m3 regardless of the rock type of aggregate used.
Delete Table 405.2 and replace with the following:
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 105
Table 405.2 Composition and Strength of Concrete for Use in Bridge Structure
Class of
Concrete
A(Mod)
Minimum
Cement
Content per
cu.m.
kg (bag**)
360
(9)
Maximum
Water/Cement
Ratio
kg/kg
0.53
360
(9)
AA
360
(9)
B
320
(8)
C
380
(9.5)
D
400
(10)
P
440
(11)
Lean
240
(6)
**Based on 40 kg. bag
405.5
Consistency
Range in
Slump mm
(inch)
50 - 100
(2 - 4)
0.53
50 - 100
(2 - 4)
0.53
50 - 100
(2 - 4)
50 - 100
(2 - 4)
50 - 100
(2 - 4)
50 - 100
(4 max)
100 (max)
(4 max)
120 - 200
(5 max)
0.58
0.53
0.53
0.49
0.62
Minimum
Compressive
Strength of
150x300 mm
Designated Size
concrete
of Coarse
cylinder
Aggregates
specimen at 28
Square Opening days MN/sq.m.
std. mm.
(psi)
19 - 4.75
20.7
(3/4 - No.4)
(3,000)
37.5- 4.75
(1 - No.4)
19 - 4.75
(3/4 - No.4)
50.0- 4.75
(2 - No.4)
12 - 4.75
(1/2 - No.4)
19.0- 4.75
(3/4 - No.4)
19.0- 4.75
(3/4 - No.4)
50.0- 4.75
(2 - No.4)
20.7
(3,000)
27.6
(4,000)
16.5
(2,400)
20.7
(3,000)
27.6
(4,000)
37.7
(5,000)
9.9
(1450)

Premolded Expansion Joint Filler, joint sealant and polystyrene shall not
be measured for direct payment but it shall be considered incidental to
the Structural Item(s) shown in the Bill of Quantities.
405.6
Basis of Payment
Delete the third paragraph and replace with the following:

Unit
of
Pay Item
Description
405(1)a
Structural Concrete Class A (Mod), - 20.7

MPa
Structural Concrete Class A, - 20.7
Measurement
Structural Cobcrete Class AA, - 27.6
Meter
405(1)b
MPa
405(1)c
MPa
Cubic
Cubic Meter
Cubic Meter
Technical
Specifications:
of
Pay Item
Description
407(1)
Lean Concrete
ITEM 406 SP
406.1
IX - 106
Unit of Measurement
Cubic Meter
Prestressed Concrete Structure
Description
This work shall consist of prestressing precast or cast-in-place concrete with

furnishing, placing, and tensioning of prestressing steel in accordance with
details shown on the plans, and as specified in these specifications
and the special provisions. It includes prestressing by either the
pretensioning or post-tensioning methods or by a combination of
these methods.
This work shall include the furnishing and installation of any
appurtenant items necessary for the particular prestressing system to be
used, including but not limited to ducts, anchorage assemblies and grout
used for pressure grouting ducts.
For cast-in-place prestressed concrete, the term member as used in this
Section shall be considered to mean the concrete which is to be
prestressed.
For requirements not specified
Specification Volume II Item 406.
herein
refer
to
DPWH
Standard
Details of Design
When the design for the prestressing work is not fully detailed on
the
plans,
the Contractor shall determine the details or type of
prestressing system for use and select materials and details conforming
to these specifications as needed to satisfy the prestressing
requirements specified. The system selected shall provide the
magnitude and distribution of prestressing force and ultimate strength
required by the plans without exceeding allowable temporary stresses.
Unless otherwise shown on the plans, all design procedures, coefficient
and allowable stresses, friction and prestress losses as well as tendon
spacing and clearances shall be in accordance with the Division I, Design
AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges.
The prestressing may be performed by either pretensioning or post-
tensioning methods unless the plans show only pretensioning details.
When
the effective or working force or stress is shown on the

plans,
it
shall
be
considered to be the force or stress remaining in the prestressing steel
after
all
losses,
including creep and shrinkage of concrete, elastic shortening of concrete,
relaxation
of
steel, friction and take up or seating of anchorages, and all other losses
peculiar
to
the
method or system of prestressing have taken place or have been provided

for.
When
the
jacking force is shown on the plans, it shall be considered to be the
force applied to the
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 107
tendon prior to anchorage and the occurrence of any losses, including

the
anchor
set
loss.
Working Drawings
Whenever the plans do not include complete details for a prestressing
system and its method of installation, or when complete details are
provided in the plans and the Contractor wishes to propose any
change, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer
working drawings of the prestressing system proposed for use.
Fabrication or installation of prestressing material shall not begin until the
Engineer has approved the drawings.
The working drawings of the prestressing system shall show
complete details and substantiating calculations of the method,
materials and equipment the Contractor proposes to use in the
prestressing operations, including any additions or rearrangement
of reinforcing steel and any revision in concrete dimensions from that
shown on the plans. Such details shall outline the method and sequence
of stressing and shall include complete specifications and details of the
prestressing steel and anchoring devices, working stresses, anchoring
stresses, tendon elongations, type of ducts, and all other
data
pertaining to the prestressing operation, including the proposed
arrangement of the prestressing steel in the members.
Working drawings shall be submitted sufficiently in advance of the start
of the affected work to allow time for review by the Engineer and
correction by the Contractor of the drawings without delaying the work.
Composite Placing Drawings
When required by the special provisions, in addition to all required
working
drawings,
the Contractor shall prepare composite placing drawings to scale and in
sufficient
detail
to show the relative positions of all items that are to be embedded in
the
concrete,
and
their embedment depth, for the portions of the structure that are to
be
prestressed.
Such embedded items include the prestressing duct, vents, anchorage
reinforcement
and hardware, reinforcing steel, anchor bolts, earthquake restrainers,
deck
joint
seal
assemblies, drainage system, utility conduits and other such items. Such
drawings
shall
be adequate to ensure that there will be no conflict between the planned
positions
of
any embedded items and that concrete cover will be adequate. If during
the
preparation
of such drawings conflicts are discovered, the Contractor shall revise his
or
her
working
drawing for one or more of the embedded items or propose changes in
the
dimensions
of the
work as necessary to eliminate the conflicts or provide proper

cover.
Any
such
revisions shall be approved by the Engineer before work on any affected item
is started.
All costs involved with the preparation of such drawings and with making
the
necessary
modifications to the work resulting there from shall be the
responsibility of the
Contractor.
406.2
Material Requirement
Technical
Specifications:
of
406.2.1
IX - 108
Concrete and Grout
The materials for concrete and grout shall conform to Section 405,
Structural Concrete. The concrete shall be Class P or as shown on the
Plans. The proportions of the grout will be as set out in Subsection 406.3.7,
Grout and Grouting 2.3(4) below.
406.2.2
Prestressing Reinforcing Steel
Reinforcing steel shall conform to Item 710, Reinforcing Steel and Wire Rope.
406.2.3
Prestressing Steel
All prestressing steel shall conform to the requirements of Item 710,

Reinforcing Steel and Wire Rope and shall be protected against physical
damage and rust or other results of corrosion at all times from
manufacture to grouting. Prestressing steel that has sustained physical
damage at any time shall be rejected.
Prestressing steel shall conform to the following requirements:
1.
Prestressing Steel and Anchorages
Prestressing steel shall be high-strength seven-wire strand, high-strength

steel wire, or high-strength alloy bars of the grade and type called for on
the plans or in the special provisions and shall conform to the requirements of
the following specifications.
a.
Strand
Uncoated seven-wire strand shall conform to the requirements of
AASHTO M203 (ASTM A416). Supplement S1 (Low-Relaxation) shall apply
when specified.
b. Wire
Uncoated stress-relieved steel wire shall conform to the requirements
of AASHTO M204 (ASTM A421)
c.
Bars
Uncoated
high-strength bars shall conform to the requirements of

AASHTO
M275
(ASTM A722). Bars with greater minimum ultimate strength, but
otherwise
produced and tested in accordance with AASHTO M275 (ASTM A722),
may
be
used
provided they have no properties that make them less satisfactory than
the
specified
material.
d. Post-Tensioning Anchorages and Couplers
All anchorages and couplers shall develop at least 95 percent of
the
minimum
specified ultimate strength of the prestressing steel, when tested in
an unbounded
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 109
state, without exceeding anticipated set. The coupling of tendons shall

not reduce the elongation at rupture below the requirements of
the
tendon
itself.
Couplers and/or coupler components shall be
enclosed in housings long enough to permit the necessary
movements. Couplers for tendons shall be used only at
locations specifically indicated and/or approved by the Engineer.
Couplers shall not be used at points of sharp tendon curvature.
(i) Bonded System
Bond transfer lengths between anchorages and the zone where full
prestressing
force is required under service and ultimate loads shall normally be
sufficient
to
develop the minimum specified ultimate strength of the prestressing
steel.
When
anchorages or couplers are located at a critical section under
ultimate
load,
the
ultimate strength required of the bonded tendons shall not exceed
the
ultimate
load, the ultimate strength required of the bonded tendons shall
not
exceed
the
ultimate capacity
of the
tendon
assembly,
including
the
anchorage
or
coupler,
tested in an unbounded state.
Housings shall be designed so that complete grouting of all of
the coupler components will be accomplished during grouting of
tendons.
(ii) Anchorage Devices with Distribution Plates
The average bearing stresses on the concrete created by the
anchorage distribution plates shall not exceed the values allowed by the
following equations:
At service load
fcp = 0.6 fc' A' b / Ab
but not greater than 1.25 fci
At transfer load
fcp = 0.8 f
'ci(A'b /Ab) - 0.2
but not greater than 1.24 f'ci
where
fcp
fci
fci
= permissible compressive concrete stress

= compressive strength of concrete
= compressive strength of concrete at time of initial
prestress
A'b = maximum area of the portion of the concrete anchorage surface thatis
geometrically similar to and concentric with the area of the anchorage
Ab
= bearing area of the anchorage
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 110
As used in the above equation fcp is the average bearing stress, P/A, in the
concrete
computed by dividing the force P of the prestressing steel by the net projected
area, Ab'
between the concrete and the bearing plate or other structural
element of the anchorage which has the function of transferring the
force to the concrete.
(iii)
Anchorage Devices Without Distribution Plates
Should the Contractor elect to furnish anchoring devices of a type that

are sufficiently large and which are used in conjunction with a steel
grillage embedded in the concrete that effectively distributes the
compressive stresses to the concrete, the steel distribution plates or
assemblies may be omitted.
Anchorage
devices without distribution plates of types which have

not
been
pre
approved by the Engineer shall not be used until the Contractor
furnishes
certified
copies
of
prequalification
tests
which
demonstrate
satisfactory
performance
under
conditions expected for the project. Prequalification tests for such
anchorage
devices
shall be performed in accordance with the requirements for testing
special
anchorage
devices in the AASHTO Guide Specifications for Design and Construction
of
Segmental
Concrete Bridges.
For
such anchorage systems previously tested and approved on

projects
having
the
same tendon configuration, the Engineer may waive additional testing
provided
there
is
no change in the materials, design or details previously approved.
The
working
drawings shall identify the project on which approval was obtained,
otherwise
testing
will be necessary.
If loop tendon anchorages are used, they shall be enclosed in ducts
for
their
entire
length.
(iv)
Supplemental Reinforcement
Any supplementary reinforcement required in the local zone of the

anchorage,
as
defined in the AASHTO Guide Specifications for Design and Construction
of
Segmental
Concrete Bridges, to resist bursting, splitting and spalling tensile
stresses
in
the
immediate vicinity of the anchorage which are dependent on the
configuration
of
the
anchor device, shall be considered to be a part of the anchorage

device.
Such
reinforcement shall be designated by the anchorage supplier and shall be
furnished
and
placed in addition to the general zone reinforcement which is shown on the
plans.
e.
Identification and Testing
If ordered by the Engineer, the selection of samples shall be made at the

manufacturers plant by the Inspector.
All samples submitted shall be representative of the lot to be furnished
and, in the case of wire or strand, shall be taken from the same master
roll.
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 111
The actual strength of the prestressing steel shall not be less than
specified by the applicable ASTM Standard, and shall be determined by
tests of representative samples of the tendon materials in conformance
with ASTM Standard.
All of the materials specified for testing shall be furnished free of cost
and shall be delivered in time for tests to be made well in advance of
anticipated time of use.
(i) Pretensioning Method Tendons
For pretensioned strands, one sample at least 2.0 meter long shall
be furnished in accordance with the requirements of paragraph 9.1 of
AASHTO M203.
(ii)
Post-tensioning Method Tendons
The following lengths shall be furnished for each 20 ton, or portion

thereof, lot of material used in the work.
For wires requiring heading - 1.5 meter.
For wires not requiring heading - sufficient length to make up one parallel-
lay cable 1.5 meter long consisting of the same number of wires as the cable
to be furnished.
For strand to be furnished with fitting - 1.5 meters between near ends of fittings.
For
bars
to be
between
furnished
with
threaded ends
threads
and
nuts
1.5
at
meter
ends.
(iii) Anchorage Assemblies and Couplers
Except for anchorage devices without distribution plates (See AASHTO
requirements), the Contractor shall furnish for testing, one specimen
of each size of prestressing tendon, including coupling, of the
selected type, with end fittings and anchorage assembly attached for
strength test only. These specimens shall be 1.5 meter in clear length,
measured between ends of fittings. If the results of the test indicate the
necessity of check tests, additional specimens shall be furnished without
cost.
When dynamic testing is required, the Contractor shall perform the
testing and shall furnish certified copies of test results which indicate
conformance
with
the
specified requirements prior to installation of
anchorages or couplers.
For prestressing systems previously tested and approved on projects
having the same tendon configuration, the Engineer may not require
complete tendon samples provided there
is
no
change
in
the
material, design, or details previously approved. Shop drawings or
prestressing details shall identify the project on which approval was
obtained, otherwise testing shall be conducted.
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 112
f. Protection of Prestressing Steel

All prestressing steel shall be protected against physical damage
and
rust
or other results of corrosion at all times from
manufacture to grouting. Prestressing steel shall also be free of
deleterious material such as grease, oil, wax or paint. Prestressing
steel that has sustained physical damage at any time shall
be rejected. The development of pitting or other results of corrosion,
other than rust stain, shall be cause for rejection.
Prestressing steel shall be packaged in containers or shipping
forms
for
the
protection of the strand against physical damage and corrosion
during
shipping
and storage. A corrosion inhibitor shall be placed in the package or
form,
or
shall
be incorporated in a corrosion inhibitor carrier type packaging
material,
or
when
permitted by the Engineer, may be applied directly to the steel.
The
corrosion
inhibitor shall have no deleterious effect on the steel or
concrete
or
bond
strength of steel to concrete or grout. Packaging or forms
damaged
from
any
cause shall be immediately replaced or restored to original condition.
The shipping package or form shall be clearly marked with a
statement that the package contains high-strength prestressing
steel, and the type of corrosion inhibitor used, including the date
packaged.
All anchorages, end fitting, couplers, and exposed tendons,
which will not be encased in concrete or grout in the
completed work, shall be permanently protected against corrosion.
Ducts
a. Metal Ducts
Sheathing for ducts shall be metal, except as provided herein. Such
ducts shall be galvanized ferrous metal and shall be fabricated with
either welded or interlock seams. Galvanizing of welded seams will
not be required. Rigid ducts shall have smooth inner walls and
shall be capable of being curved to the proper configuration
without crimping or flattening. Semi-rigid ducts shall be
corrugated and when tendons are to be inserted after the
concrete has been placed their minimum wall thickness shall be as
follows: 26 gauge for ducts less than or equal to 66.7 mm
diameter, 24 gauge for ducts greater than 66.7 mm diameter.
When bar tendons are preassembled with such ducts, the
duct thickness shall not be less than 31 gauge.
b. Polyethylene Duct
As an alternative to metal ducts, ducts for transverse tendons in

deck
slabs
and
at other locations where shown or approved may be of
high
density
polyethylene, conforming to the material requirements of
ASTM D3350.
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 113
Polyethylene duct shall not be used when the radius of curvature of

the tendon is less than 9 meters.
Semi-rigid polyethylene ducts for use where completely embedded
in concrete shall be corrugated with minimum material thickness of
1.2 + 0.25 mm. Such ducts shall have a white coating on the
outside, or shall be of white material with ultraviolet stabilizers added.
Rigid polyethylene ducts for use where the tendons is not
embedded in concrete shall
be
rigid
pipe
manufactured
in
accordance with ASTM D2447, ASTM F714, ASTM D2239, or ASTM
D30. For external applications, such duct shall have an external
diameter to wall thickness ratio of 500 mm or less.
For applications where polyethylene duct is exposed to sunlight or
ultraviolet
light, carbon black shall be incorporated into the polyethylene pipe
resin
in
such
amount to provide resistance to ultraviolet degradation in
accordance
with
ASTM D1248.
c. Duct Area
The inside diameter of ducts shall be at least 6 mm larger than
the nominal diameter of single wire, bar or strand tendons, or in the
case of multiple wire, bar or strand tendons, the inside cross
sectional area of the prestressing steel. When tendons are to be
placed by the pull through method, the duct area shall be at least
2-1/2 times the net area of the prestressing steel.
d. Duct Fitting
Coupling and transition fittings for ducts formed by shearing shall
be of either ferrous metal or polyethylene, and shall be cement
paste intrusion proof and of sufficient
strength
to
prevent
distortion
or
displacement
of
the
ducts
during concrete
placement.
All ducts or anchorage assemblies shall be provided with pipes or
other
suitable
connections at each end of the duct for the injection of grout after
prestressing.
Ducts shall also be provided with ports for venting or grouting at high
points and for draining at intermediate low points.
Vent
and
drain pipes shall be 12.5 mm minimum diameter standard

pipe
or
suitable
plastic pipe. Connection to ducts shall be made with metallic or
plastic
structural
fasteners. The vents and drains shall be mortar tight, taped as
necessary,
and
shall
provide means for injection of grout through the vents and for
sealing
leakage of grout.
to
prevent
Grout
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 114
Grout shall properly cover the prestressing tendons in the ducts

and protect the tendons against corrosion as well as to bond the tendons
to the concrete.
The grout shall conform to the following:
a.
Bleeding ratio shall not exceed 3%.
b.
Expansion ratio shall not exceed 10%. However, the ration shall
be always less
than the bleeding ratio immediately after the injection until the
bleeding is
maximum.
c.
Compressive strength at 28 days of age shall be greater than 21MPa.
d.
Water-to-Cement ratio shall not exceed 45%. A process whereby
thin grout is
used initially to wet the ducts, and is subsequently thickened to
the specified
ratio may be considered where long ducts result in grout drying
out and zero
flow before the end of the duct is reached.
e.
Chloride ion contents shall not exceed 0.30 kg/m.
f. Efflux time shall be between 15 and 30 seconds using the JA cone.

(i)
Portland Cement
Portland Cement shall conform to one of the following:
Specifications for Portland Cement - ASSHTO M85. Types I, II or
III. Cement used for grouting shall be fresh and shall not
contain any lumps or other indication of hydration or pack
set.
(ii) Water
The water used in the grout shall be potable, clean and free
of injurious quantities of substances known to be harmful
to Portland Cement or prestressing steel.
(iii) Admixtures
Admixtures, if used, shall impart the properties of low-water
content, good flowability, minimum bleed, and expansion if
desired. They shall contain no chemicals in quantities that may
have harmful effect on the prestressing steel or cement.
Admixtures which, at the dosage used, contain chlorides in
excess of 0.005 percent of the weight of the cement used or
contain any fluorides, sulphites, and nitrates shall not be used.
Whenever
grout
the
expanding
admixture
is
required, or
Contractors
is
used
at
option, it shall be well dispersed through the other admixtures and shall
produce a 2 to
6 percent unrestrained expansion of the grout.
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 115
Amount of admixture to obtain a desired amount of expansion shall be

determined by tests. If the source of manufacture or brand of either
admixture or cement changes after testing, new tests shall be conducted
to determine proper proportions.
All admixtures shall be used in accordance with the instruction of the manufacturer.
406.2.4
Packaging, Storing and Shipping
Prestressing steel shall be packaged in containers or other shipping

forms for the protection of the steel against physical damage and
corrosion
during
shipping
and storage. A corrosion inhibitor which
prevents rust or other results of corrosion shall be placed in the package
or form, or when permitted by the Engineer, may be applied directly
to the steel. Packaging or forms damaged from any cause shall be
immediately replaced or restored to original condition.
The shipping package or form shall be clearly marked with a statement
that the package contains high-strength prestressing steel and the care to
be used in handling, and the type, kind and amount of corrosion
inhibitor used, including the date when placed, safety orders and
instructions for use.
406.2.5
Water
It shall conform to the requirements of Section 405, Structural Concrete.

406.2.6
Enclosures
Duct enclosures for prestressing steel shall be galvanized ferrous metal

or of a type approved by the Engineer, mortar tight, and accurately
placed at the locations shown on the Plans or approved by the Engineer.
Transition couplings connecting said ducts to anchoring devices need not be
galvanized.
406.2.7
Sampling and Testing
Refer to DPWH Standard Specification

406.3
Construction Requirement
406.3.1
General
Prestressed concrete structural members and reinforcing steel shall be

constructed in accordance with the requirements of Section 405
Conrete
Works.
Subject
to
the modifications and amendments
contained herein.
A. General Tensioning Requirements
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 116
Prestressing steel shall be tensioned by hydraulic jacks so as to

produce the forces shown on the plans or on the approved working
drawing with appropriate allowances for all losses. Losses to be provided
for shall be as specified in Division I, Article 9.16 of AASHTO 1992. For
post-tensioned work the losses shall also include the anchor set loss
appropriate for the anchorage system employed.
The maximum temporary stress (jacking stress) and the stress in the
steel before loss due to creep and shrinkage shall not exceed the values
allowed in Division I, Article 9.15 in AASHTO 1992.
The method of tensioning employed shall be one of the following
as specified or approved:
Pretensioning; in which the prestressing strand or tendons are stressed prior
to
being embedded in the concrete place for the member. After the
concrete has attained the required strength, the prestressing force is
released from the external anchorages and transferred, by bond, into the
concrete.
Post-tensioning; in which the reinforcing tensions are installed in voids or
ducts
within the concrete and are stressed and anchored against the
concrete after the development of the required concrete strength.
As a final operation under this method, the voids or ducts are
pressure-grouted.
Combined Method; in which part of the reinforcement is pretensioned and part post-
tensioned. Under this method all applicable requirements for
pretensioning
and
for
post-tensioning shall apply to the respective reinforcing elements
using
these
methods.
During stressing of strand, individual wire failures may be accepted by the
Engineer,
provided not more than one wire in any strand is broken and the
area
of
broken
wires does not exceed 2 percent of the total area of the prestressing
steel
in
the
member.
B. Concrete Strength
Prestressing forces shall not be applied or transferred to the concrete until
the
concrete
has attained the strength specified for initial stressing. In addition,
cast-in-place
concrete for other than segmentally constructed bridges shall not be post-
tensioned.
C. Prestressing Equipment
Hydraulic jacks used to stress tendons shall be capable of providing and
sustaining
the
necessary forces and shall be equipped with either a pressure gauge or a
load cell for
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 117
determining the jacking stress. The jacking system shall provide an

independent means by which the tendon elongation can be measured.
The pressure gauge shall have an accurately reading dial at least 150
mm in diameter or a digital display, and each jack and its gauge shall be
calibrated as a unit with the cylinder extension in the approximate position
that it will be a final jacking force, and shall be accompanied by a
certified calibration with an indicator by certified calibration chart or curve.
The load cell shall be calibrated and shall be provided with an
indicator by means of which the prestressing force in the tendon may
be determined.
The range of the load cell shall be such that the lower 10 percent of the
manufacturers rated capacity will not be used in determining the jacking
stress. When approved by the Engineer, calibrated proving reins may be
used in lieu of load cells.
Recalibration of gauges shall be repeated at least annually and
whenever gauge pressures and elongations indicate materially different
stresses.
Only oxygen flame or mechanical cutting devices shall be used to
cut strand after installation in the member or after stressing. Electric arc
welders shall not be used.
D. Sequence of Stressing
When the sequence of stressing individual tendons is not otherwise
specified, the stressing of post-tensioning tendons and the release of
pretensioned tendons shall be done in a sequence that produces a minimum
of eccentric force in the member.
E. Measurement of Stress
A record of gauge pressures and tendon elongations for each tendon
shall be provided by the Contractor for review and approval by the
Engineer. Elongations shall be measured to an accuracy of 1.5 mm.
Stressing tails of post-tensioned tendons shall not be cut off until the
stressing records have been approved.
The stress in tendons during tensioning shall be determined by the gauge
or load cell readings and shall be verified with the measured
elongations.
Calculations
of anticipated elongations shall utilize the
modulus of elasticity, based on nominal area, as furnished by the
manufacturer for the lot of steel being tensioned, or as determined by a
bench test of strands used in the work.
All tendons shall be tensioned to a preliminary force as necessary to
eliminate any take- up in the tensioning system before elongation readings
are started.
This preliminary force shall be between 5 and 25 percent of the final
jacking force. The initial force shall be measured by a dynamometer or by
other approved method, so that its amount can be used as a check
against elongation as computed and as measured. Each strand shall be
marked prior to final stressing to permit measurement of elongation

and to insure that all anchor wedges set properly.
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 118
It is anticipated that there may be some discrepancy in indicated stress

between
jack
gauge pressure and elongation. In such event, the load used, as
indicated
by
the
gauge
pressure, shall produce a slight overstress rather than understress. When
a
discrepancy
between gauge pressure and elongation of more than 5 percent in
tendons
over
15
meters long or 7 percent in tendons of 15 meters or less in length
occurs,
the
entire
operation shall be carefully checked and the source of error determined
and
corrected
before proceeding further.
406.3.2
Prestressing Method
The method of prestressing to be used shall be optional

Contractor subject to all requirements hereinafter specified.
with
the
The Contractor, prior to casting any members to be prestressed, shall

submit
to
the
Engineer for approval complete details of the methods, materials and
equipment
he
proposes to use in the prestressing operations. Such details shall outline
the
method
and sequence of stressing, complete specifications and details of the
prestressing,
steel
and anchoring devices proposed for use, anchoring stresses, type of
enclosures
and
all
other data pertaining to the prestressing operations, including
the
proposed
arrangement of the prestressing units in the members, pressure grouting
materials
and
equipment.
Safety measures shall be taken by the Contractor to prevent accidents
due
to
possible
breaking of the prestressing steel or the slipping of the grips during the
prestressing
process.
406.3.4
Casting Yard
The precasting of prestressed concrete structural members may be done

at a location selected by the Contractor, subject to the approval of the
Engineer.
406.3.5
a.
Placing Enclosures
Enclosures for placing of prestressed reinforcement

accurately
set
out
locations shown on the Plans or approved by the Engineer.
shall
at
be
b.
Placement of Ducts
Ducts
shall be rigidly supported at the proper locations in the

forms
by
ties
to
reinforcing steel which are adequate to prevent displacement
during
concrete
placement. Supplementary support bars shall be used where
needed
to
maintain
proper alignment of the duct. Hold-down ties to the forms shall be
used
when
the
buoyancy of the ducts in the fluid concrete would lift the reinforcing steel.
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 119
Joints between sections of duct shall be coupled with positive

connections
which
do
not result in angle changes at the joints and will prevent the
intrusion
of
cement
paste.
When all placing of ducts, reinforcement and forming is complete,
an inspection shall be made to locate possible duct damage.
All unintentional holes or openings in the duct must be repaired prior
to
concrete
placing.
After installation in the forms, the ends of ducts shall at all time
be covered as necessary to prevent the entry of water or debris.
Grout openings and vents must be securely anchored to the duct and
to
either
the
forms or to reinforcing steel to prevent displacement during
concrete
placing
operations.
c. Vents and Drains
All ducts for continuous structures shall be vented at the high points
of
the
duct
profile, except where the curvature is small, as in continuous slabs, and
at
additional
locations as shown on the plans. Where blockage can be
anticipated
prior
to
grouting, drains shall be installed at low points in ducts where needed to
prevent
the
accumulation of water. Low-point drains shall remain open until
grouting
has
reached the point concerned and shall then be closed permitting
the
grout
to
continue through the duct.
The ends of vents and drains shall be removed 25 mm below the
surface of the concrete after grouting has been completed, and the void
filled with mortar.
d.
Placement for Pretensioning Prestressing Steel

Prestressing steel shall be accurately installed in the forms and held in
place by the stressing jack or temporary anchors and, when tendons
are to be draped, by hold- down devices. The hold-down devices used
at all points of change in slope of tendon trajectory shall be of an
approval low-friction type.
Prestressing steel shall not be
packaging until immediately prior
placement of concrete. Openings in
as necessary to protect the unused
removed from its protective

to installation in the forms and
the packaging shall be released
steel. While exposed, the steel shall
be protected as needed to prevent corrosion.

e.
Placement for Post-Tensioning Prestressing Steel

All prestressing steel preassembled in ducts and installed prior to the
placement
of
concrete shall be accurately placed and held in position during
concrete placement.
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 120
When the prestressing steel is installed after the concrete has

been placed, the Contractor shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of
the Engineer that the ducts are free of water and debris
immediately prior to installation of the steel. The total number of
strands in an individual tendon may be pulled into the duct as a
unit, or the individual strand may be pulled or pushed through the
duct.
Anchorage devices or block-out templates for anchorages shall be set
and held so that their axis coincides with the axis of the tendon and
anchor plates are normal in all directions to the tendon.
The prestressing steel shall be distributed so that the force in each
girder stem is equal or as required by the plans, except as provided
herein. For box girders with more than two girder stems, at the
Contractors option, the prestressing force may vary up to 5 percent
from the theoretical required force per girder stem provided the
required total force in the superstructure is obtained and the force is
distributed symmetrically about the centerline of the typical section.
The permissible interval between tendon installation and grouting
without use of a corrosion inhibitor for various exposure conditions
shall be as follows:
Very Damp Atmosphere or over saltwater 7 days
(Humidity > 70%)
Moderate Atmosphere
(Humidity from 40% to 70%)
Very Dry Atmosphere
(Humidity < 40%)
15 days
20 days
After tendons are placed in ducts, the opening at the ends of the ducts
shall be sealed to prevent entry of moisture.
When steam curing is used, steel for post-tensioning
installed until the stream curing is complete.
shall
not
be
Whenever electric welding is performed on or near members containing

prestressing
steel, the welding ground shall be attached directly to the steel
being
welded.
All
prestressing steel and hardware shall be protected from weld spatter or
other damage.
406.3.6
Placing Steel
Steel units shall be accurately placed at the position shown on the Plans
and firmly held during the placing and setting of the concrete.
Ducts
may be fabricated with either welded or interlocked seams.

Galvanizing
of
the
welded steel will not be required. Ducts shall have sufficient strength to
maintain
their
correct alignment and shape during placing of concrete. Joints between

sections of ducts
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 121
shall be positive metallic connections which do not result in angle

changes at the joints. Waterproof tape shall be used at the connections.
All ducts or anchorage assemblies shall be provided with pipes or
other suitable connections for the injection of grout after prestressing.
Ducts for prestressing steel shall be securely fastened in place to prevent
movement.
After installation in the forms, the end of ducts shall at all times be covered
as necessary to prevent the entry of water or debris.
All ducts for continuous structures shall be vented over each intermediate
support,
and
at additional locations as shown on the Plans. Vents shall be 12.5
mm
minimum
diameter standard pipe. Connections to ducts shall be made with
metallic
structural
fasteners. The vents shall be mortar tight, taped as necessary, and shall
provide
means
for injection of grout through the vents and for sealing the vents. Ends of
vents
shall
be
removed 25 mm below the roadway surface after grouting has been
completed.
Distances from the forms shall be maintained by stays, blocks, ties,
hangers or other approved supports. Blocks for holding units from
contact with the forms shall be precast mortar blocks of approved
shape and dimensions. Layers of units shall be separated by mortar
blocks or other equally suitable devices. Wooden blocks shall not be left
in the concrete.
When acceptable prestressing steel for post-tensioning is installed in
ducts
after
completion of concrete curing, and if stressing and grouting are
completed
within
(10)
calendar days after the installation of the prestressing steel, rust which
may
form
during
said ten (10) days will not be cause for rejection of the steel. Prestressing
steel
installed,
tensioned and grouted in this manner, all within ten (10) calendar days,
shall
be
subject
to all the requirements in this Section pertaining to corrosion protection
and
rejection
because of rust.
No welds or grounds for welding equipment shall be made on the forms
or on the steel in the manner after the prestressing steel has been
installed.
Wires, wire groups, parallel-lay cables and any other prestressing
elements shall be straightened to insure proper positioning in the enclosures.
Suitable horizontal and vertical spacers shall be provided, if required, to
hold the wires in place in true position in the enclosures.
406.3.7
Post Tensioning
a.
Tensioning of the prestressing reinforcement shall not be commenced
until tests on
concrete cylinders, manufactured of the same concrete and cured
under the same
conditions, indicate that the concrete of the particular member to be
prestressed has
attained 85 % compressive strength of at least 40 MPa unless
otherwise specified.
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 122
b. After all concrete has attained the required strength, the prestressing
reinforcement
shall be stressed by means of jacks to the desired tension and the
stress transferred to the end anchorage.
c. Cast-in-place concrete shall not be post-tensioned until at least ten (10) days after
the last concrete has been placed in the member to be post-tensioned
and until the compressive strength of said placed concrete has
reached the strength specified for the concrete at the time of stressing.
d. All side forms for girders shall be removed before post-tensioning. The
falsework
under the bottom slab supporting the superstructure shall not be
released
until
a
minimum of 48 hours had elapsed after grouting of the post-tension
tendons
nor
until all other conditions of the Specifications have been met.
The
supporting
falsework shall be constructed in such a manner that the
superstructure
will
be
free
to lift off the falsework and shorten during post-tensioning. Formwork
left
inside
box girders to support the roadway slab shall be detailed in such a
manner
so
as
to
offer minimum resistance to girder shortening due to shrinkage and
post-tensioning.
e. The tensioning process shall be so conducted that the tension being applied
and
elongation of the prestressing elements may be measured at all times.
The friction loss in the a element, i.e., the difference between the
tension at the jack and the minimum tension, shall be determined in
accordance with Article 1.6.7 of AASHTO Standard Specification for
Highway Bridges.
f. Suitable shims or other approved devices shall be used to insure that the
specified
anchor set loss is attained.
g. A record shall be kept of gauge pressure and elongation at all times and
submitted to
the Engineer for his approval.
h. Prior to post-tensioning of any member, the Contractor shall demonstrate
to the
satisfaction of the Engineer that the prestressing steel is free and unbounded in
the
duct.
i. All strands in each tendon, except for those in flat ducts with not more than
four
strands, shall be stressed simultaneously with a multi-strand jack.
j. Tensioning shall be accomplished so as to provide the forces and
elongations
specified in Sub-section 406.3.10 of DPWH Specification.
k. Except as provided herein or when shown on the plans or on the approved
working
drawings, tendons in continuous post-tensioned members shall be
tensioned by jacking at each end of the tendon. For straight tendons
and when one end stressing is shown on the plans, tensioning may be
performed by jacking from one end or both ends of the tendon at the
option of the Contractor.
406.3.8
Grout and Grouting
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 123
a. Prestressing steel shall be bonded to the concrete by filling the void space
between
the duct and the tendon with grout.
b. Grout shall consist of Portland Cement, water and an expansive admixture
approved
by the Engineer.
c. Water shall be potable.
d. No admixture containing chlorides or nitrates shall be used.
e. Water shall first be added to the mixer followed by cement and admixture.
f. The grout shall be mixed in mechanical mixing equipment of a type that will
produce
uniform and thoroughly mixed grout with the ingredients accurately
measured. The water content shall be not more than 19 litres (5
gallons) per sack of cement. Retempering of grout will not be
permitted. Grout shall be continuously agitated until it is pumped.
g. Grouting equipment shall be capable of grouting at a pressure of at least 1.0 Mpa.
h. Grouting equipment shall be furnished with a pressure gauge having a full-
scale
reading of not more than 2.07 Mpa (300 psi).
i. Standby flushing equipment capable of developing a pumping pressure of
1.72MPa
(250 psi) and of sufficient capacity to flush out any partially grouted
ducts shall be provided.
j. All ducts shall be clean and free of deleterious materials that would impair
bonding
of the grout or interfere with grouting procedures.
k. All grout shall pass through a screen with a 2 mm (0.0787 inch) maximum
clear
openings prior to being introduced into the grout pump.
l. Grout injection pipes shall be fitted with positive mechanical shutoff valves.
Vents
and ejection pipes shall be fitted with valves, caps or other
devices capable of withstanding the pumping pressures. Valves and
caps shall not be removed or opened until the grout has set.
m. Post-tensioned steel shall be bonded to the concrete. All prestressing
steel to be
bonded to the concrete shall be free of dirt, loose rust, grease or
other deleterious
substances.
n. Prior to placing forms for roadway slabs of box girder structures, the
Contractor
shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Engineer that all ducts are
unobstructed and if the prestressing reinforcement has been placed,
that the steel is free and unbonded in the duct.
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 124
o. After the tendons have been stressed to the required tension, each conduit
encasing
the prestressing steel shall be blown out with compressed oil-free air.
p. The conduit shall then be completely filled from the low end with grout
under
pressure. Grout shall be pumped through the duct and continuously
wasted at the outlet until no visible slugs of water or air are ejected
and the efflux time of ejected grout is not less than 11 seconds. All
vents and openings shall then be closed and the grouting pressure at
the injection end shall be raised to a minimum of 0.6894 Mpa (100
psi) and held for a minimum of 10 seconds.
q. If aluminum powder is used to expand the grout it shall be added as follows:
From 2 to 4 grams of the unpolished variety (about 1 to 2 teaspoons)
shall
be
added
for each sack of cement used in the grout. The exact amount of
aluminum
powder
will be designated by the Engineer. The dosage per batch of grout
shall
be
carefully
weighed. A number of weighing may be made in the laboratory and
doses
placed
in
glass vials for convenient use in the mix. The aluminum powder shall
be
blended
with pumicite or other inert powder in the proportion of 1 part powder
to
50
parts
pumicite (or other inert powder) by weight. The blend shall be
thoroughly
mixed
with the cement. The amount of the blend used should vary from 120g
(4
ounces)
per sack of cement for concrete having a temperature of 21.1C to
190
g
(7
ounces)
for a temperature of 4.44C after all ingredients are added, the batch
shall
be
mixed
for 3 minutes. Batches of grout shall be placed within 45 minutes after
mixing.
406.3.9
Temperature Considerations
The temperature of the concrete shall be 2C (35F) or higher from the

time
of
grouting
until job is cured and 5.0 cm cubes of grout reach a minimum
compressive strength of
5.5 MPa.
The Temperature of grout shall not be above 32C (90F) during mixing
or pumping. If necessary, the mixing water shall be cooled.
406.3.10
Unbounded Steel
Where the steel is not to be bonded to the concrete, it shall be

carefully
protected against corrosion by a coating of tar or other
waterproofing material, in addition to any galvanizing which may be
specified in addition to the requirements

203) and ASTM A 421 (AASHTO M 204).
406.3.11
Extreme
of
ASTM
416 (AASHTO M
Handling
care
shall be exercised in handling and moving precast

prestressed
concrete
mortar members. Precast girders and slabs shall be transported in an
upright
position
and the points of support and directions of the reactions with respect to
the
member
shall be approximately the same during transportation and storage
as
when
the
members are in their final position. If the Contractor deems it expedient
to transport or
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 125
store precast units in other than this position, it shall be done at his
own risk after notifying the Engineer of his intention to do so.
Prestressed concrete girders shall not be shipped until tests on
concrete cylinders, manufactured of the same concrete and cured under
the same conditions as the girders, indicate that the concrete of the
particular girder has attained a compressive strength equal to the specified
design compressive strength of the concrete in the girder and has
attained a minimum age of 14 days.
406.3.10
Composite Slab Construction
The
manufacturing tolerances for precast members shall not exceed

those
given
for
length, cross-section and straightness on the Plans, as specified in the
Contract
or
as
approved by the Engineer. In addition, where beams are laid side by side in a
deck:
1. The difference on soffit level between adjacent units before the in-situ
concrete
is
placed shall not exceed 5 mm for units up to 5 m in length or 10 mm
for longer units.
2. The width of the deck soffit shall be within + 25 mm.
3. In adjacent spans, the continuity of the outside beams shall be maintained.
4. The width of gap between individual beams shall not exceed twice the nominal
gap.
5. The alignment of transverse holes shall permit the reinforcement
or
prestressing
cables to be placed without distortion.
406.4
Prestressed Concrete Girder shall be measured per Each furnished and

installed in
accordance with the Drawings, Specifications and as accepted by the Engineer.
406.5
Basis of Payment
Delete the last paragraph and substitute the following:

Payment will be made under
Pay Item
406(1)a
the following Item:
Description
Prestressed Concrete Girder
(AASHTO Type IV-A) L = 28.05m
Unit of Measurement
Each
Technical
Specifications:
of
ITEM 411 SP
IX - 126
Paint
411.3
411.3.6
Painting
Add the following:

All new bridge structures shall be painted. Approach walls to be black
diagonal strip or yellow to approved standard practice. Curbing shall be
yellow and all handrails and posts to be painted white.
411.3.6.5 Repainting Existing Structure
Add the following:
Prior to application of paint, surface preparation on existing steel
surface shall be properly treated with way of sandblasting in accordance
with clause 411.3.6.2 item 2 sandblasting, and shall be accepted by the
Engineer.
Steel surfaces shall be painted with one (1) coat of Zinc Rich Primer and
two (2) coats of Polyurethane Paint. Dry film thickness for Zinc Rich
Primer and polyurethane paint shall be 50 to 75 microns per coat. The
color of the Zinc Rich Primer shall not be the same with the Polyurethane
Paint and shall be approved by the Engineer.
411.4
Delete this sub-section in its entirety and replace with the following:
For new bridge structures painting shall not be measured and paid for
separately, but the cost thereof shall be considered as included in
the pay items under Bridge Construction indicated in the Bill of
Quantities.
Payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and installing all
materials including labour, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary
to complete the work under this Item. The work associated with
surface preparation of steel member s by means of sandblasting is
also included in this work Item
Pay Item
Description
Technical
Specifications:
Unit of Measurement
of
411(1)
Painting
ITEM 412 SP
412.1
IX - 127
Square Meter
Elastomeric Bearing Pad
Scope
Bearing pads shall be furnished to the dimension indicated. They shall be

composed
of
the specified elastomer type, grade and shear modulus (or hardness).
Bearing shall be
70 durometer elastomer.
412.2
Material Requirement
Elastomer:
The elastomer compound to be used in the construction of the
bearing
pads
shall contain only 100% virgin chloroprene (neoprene) as the raw
polymer. All
materials shall be new with no reclaimed materials incorporated in the
finished bearing. The elastomer compound shall conform to the
requirements of Table 1 and as prescribed in the DPWH Department
Order #25, Series of 1997, dated 29 January 1997, Revised DPWH
Standard Specification for Elastomeric Bearing Pads.
TABLE 1
Elastomer Properties
Grade (Durometer)
60
Original Physical Properties
Hardness ASTM, D2240
60+5
Tensile Strength, minimum
MPA (psi) ASTM 412
17.2(2,500)
Elongation of break, minimum
Percent
425%
Accelerated
Tests
to
Determine
Long Term Aging
Characteristics Over Aged 70 hrs/100+C ASTM D 573
Hardness, points change, maximum
Tensile Strength, % change,
Maximum
+15
Elongation at break, % change,
maximum
-40
Ozone - 1 PPM in Air by Volume
-20% Strain -100+1.1+C(2+F)
ASTM D 1149 100 hrs
no cracks
Compression
Set-22
hrs
70+C
ASTM D 395 - Method B:
70
70+5
17.2(2,500)
300
0 to +15 0 to 15
+15
-40
no cracks
Technical
Specifications:
of
% maximum
IX - 128
25
25
Low Temperature Stiffness

ASTM D 797 At-4.4+C,
Youngs Modulus, Maximum
Mpa (psi)
68.9(10,000) 68.9(10,000)
Tear Test - ASTM D 624 - Die

C Newton per millimeter
(N/mm), minimum
43.75(250)
412.2.1
39.28(225)
Fabrication
Bearings shall be cast as a unit in a mold. The mold shall have standard
shop practice mold finish. Bearing shall be built to the design dimensions
and this Specifications with the following tolerances as listed in Table 2.
TABLE 2
Overall Vertical Dimensions
Design Thickness
32mm (1-1/4) or less
Design Thickness over
32mm (1-1/4)
Overall Horizontal Dimensions
0.914 m and less (36)
Over 0.914 (36)
Thickness of individual layers
of elastomer (laminated bearings
value only) but any point within
the bearing
Variations from a plane parallel to the
Theoretical surface (as determined
measurements
at
the
edge
of the bearings)
Top
Sides
Position of exposed Connection
Member
Edge Cover embedded laminates
of connection members
Tolerances
(mm)
(in)
-0+3
-0+1/8
-0+6
-0+1/4
-0+6
-0+1/4
-0+12
-0+1/2
+20 percent of design
no more than +3mm
(+1/8)
by
slope relative to the bottom

of no more than .005 radians.
6
1/8
-0+3
0+1/8
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 129
Size of holes slots or insert

Position of hole slots or insert
412.2.2
+3
+3
+1/8
+1/8
Marking and Certification
The manufacturer shall certify that each bearing satisfies the design
specification and supply a certified copy test results. Each bearing shall
be marked in indelible ink or flexible paint. The marking shall consist
of the order number, lot number, bearing identification number and
elastomer type. The marking shall be on a face, which is visible after
erection of the bridge.
A lot of pads shall be considered to be a group of 100 or fewer pads, which are
manufactured from the same batch of elastomer, cured under the same
conditions, and are all the same size and type.
412.2.3
Bearing Test and Acceptance Criteria
All bearing shall be manufactured according to the requirements set

forth in this specification and any additional requirements specified in
the Plans. The elastomer shall meet the specific requirements of Table
1. In addition, all components shall meet the requirements of their
designated specification.
The manufacturer shall perform the following tests and shall furnish
certified copies of the result with each shipment of bearings.
(1) Property Tests : Property of the cured elastomeric compound
shall
meet
the
minimum requirements of Table1.
(2) Shear Modulus : The shear modulus of the elastomer shall be
determined in
accordance with ASTM D 4014. The shear modulus shall be within
fifteen percent
(15%) of the value specified in the design document or within the limits
listed below
if no shear modulus is specified and the nominal hardness is specified.
Shear Modulus
Nominal hardness
Shear Modulus at 73
F(psi)
Shear Modulus at 73
F(Mpa)
1.84)
50
60
85-110
120-155
(0.60-0.77)
(0.85-1.10)
70
160-260
(1.13-
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 130
(3) Load Test: Each bearing shall be proof loaded with a compression load 1.5
times
the maximum design load. If there are three separate surface
cracks, which are greater than 2 mm wide and 2 mm deep, the
bearings shall be rejected.
In addition to the certified copies of test results from the manufacturer,
the
Engineer
shall obtain samples from each lot of same size and type of pads
delivered
to
be
tested
for materials property as specified in Table 1 and to be load tested as
specified
in
(3)
above. Testing may require destruction to one or more bearings from a
lot.
Therefore
provisions shall be made to provide additional bearings for testing
purposes.
Only
after
the satisfactory results of these confirming tests shall the bearing pads be
installed.
412.3
Elastometric Bearing Pads shall be measured per Each completed in

accordance with the Drawings, Specifications and as accepted by the
Engineer.
412.4
Basis of Payment
Payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and installing

Elastrometric Bearing Pads including all materials, labour, equipment,
tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work under this Item.
Pay Item
Description
Unit of Measurement
412(1)
Elastomeric Bearing Pad,

(___mm x ___mm x___mm)
Each
SPL F1
Pile Integrity Test
SPL F1.1
Description
The objective of the test is to establish the structural integrity of the

bored piles under consideration. This item of work shall consist of
applying a low strain hammer blow on a selected bored pile while an
accelerometer is firmly attached on a smooth surface at the top of the
pile to obtain measurements for predicting the structural integrity of the
pile. The Pile Integrity Tester (P.I.T. Collector) is used to detect the
presence and location of any structural defects along the length of the pile.
SPL F1.2
General
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 131
Pile Integrity Testing is to be performed using a P.I.T. Collector and is

in accordance with ASTM standards D5882. The pile integrity test is
non-destructive
and
can
be quickly performed by an experienced
geotechnical Engineer on a pile using a hand-held instrumented hammer
to apply an impact to the pile and the accelerometer measures the
acceleration which when integrated will yield velocity. The P.I.T. Collector
processes and displays the acquired data and yields valuable
information about the structural integrity of the deep foundation member.
Waiting period may be essential so that soil set-up characteristics can be
determined. The piles shall likewise have attained their 28- days compressive
strength at the time of the testing.
SPL F1.3
Preparation of Test Piles
Both the accelerometer and the hammer impact must be applied to a

very clean and hard surface. Therefore, the pile top surface should be
smooth or evenly leveled and must be free of dusts. This includes the
removal of soft concrete and uneven surfaces by grinding it smooth where
the accelerometer is to be attached and where the pile is to be struck by
the hammer. It may be necessary to remove several inches of the
upper concrete if it has been contaminated with soil, bentonite
slurry or other foreign materials to expose a healthy and hard concrete
top surface.
SPL F1.4
Test Procedures
Depending on the site condition, approximately 10 to 12 piles can be tested

per
day.
The
assigned crew will firmly bond the accelerometer to the pile top in order to
measure
the
high frequency motion of that surface during impact and reflection. A
proper
hammer
technique is necessary to apply an impact that will generate a stress
wave
that
will
give
a clear reflection from a signal that has a sharp rise and short
duration.
The
P.I.T.
Collector meanwhile acquires, processes, enhances, displays and
plots
the
data
collected.
SPL F1.5
Integrity Test Report
The Pile Dynamic Engineer shall prepare a formal technical report

summarizing the pile integrity test results for all piles tested. Plots shall
also be made of all records and included in the report.
SPL F1.6
Pile Integrity Tests shall be measured by the test per Each completed
in accordance with the Drawings, Specifications and as accepted by the
Engineer.
SPL F1.7
Basis of Payment
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 132
The accepted quantities shall be measured as specified in Method of

Measurement shall be paid for at the Contract unit price of the Pay Item
listed below that is included in the Bill of Quantities.
Payment shall be full compensation for performing the Pile Integrity Test
including
all
labour, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the
work
under
this
Item.
Pay Item
SPL F1
Description
Pile Integrity Test
SPL F2
Pile Dynamic Test
SPL F2.1
Description
Unit of Measurement
Each
The objective of the test is to establish ultimate bearing capacity and

the
structural
integrity of the bored piles under consideration. Pile Dynamic Test shall
be
performed
using the Pile Dynamic Analyzer (PDA) and the software programme
CAPWAP
in
accordance with the ASTM standards D4945, Standard Test method
for
High-strain
Dynamic Testing of Piles. This item of work shall consist of applying a
dynamic
load
using a steel or concrete ram weight on the selected bored piles
while
strain
transducers and accelerometers are firmly attached to the bored pile and
connected
by
signal cable to the PDA to obtain measurements in predicting the static
capacity
of
the
bored piles. The PDA processes, enhances and plots the data collected.
Perform one dynamic test at each Bent at the locations selected by
the
Engineer.
Coordinate the pile-driving activities with the Project Geotechnical
Engineer
and
the
Project Engineer. Notify the Engineer at least seven (7) calendar days
before
beginning
the work.
SPL F2.2
General
The steel or concrete weight for testing the bored pile shall have a weight of at
least
1.5% to 2% of the required ultimate pile capacity. A 10 cm to 15 cm
wooden material shall be placed on top of the pile to serve as a pile
cushion. A steel cap cover shall be placed on top of the pile cushion for
uniform impact distribution and to hold the pile cushion in place during
testing. The size of the pile cushion should be roughly the same, as the
diameter of the pile while the steel cap cover should snugly fit the pile top.
At the time of the testing, the bored piles shall have attained their
28-days compressive strength. Waiting period is likewise essential to
allow the previously disturbed soil to set-up and develop a natural bonding
with the pile.
Technical
Specifications:
of
SPL F2.3
IX - 133
Preparation of Test Piles
To have a uniform hammer impact, the ram weight must be applied to an

evenly
leveled
hard surface. Therefore, the pile top surface must be properly prepared.
Depending
on
the construction method, it may necessary to remove several inches
of
the
upper
concrete if it has been contaminated with soil, bentonite slurry or
other
foreign
materials to expose at least one (1) meter wide pit around the pile shaft
with
a
depth
of
not less than three times the pile diameter measured from the
pile
top
for
the
attachment of transducer and accelerometer gages. Availability of
motorized
pump
at
the site is optional but may be required should a shallow water table be
encountered.
SPL F2.4
Test Procedures
Depending on site condition, an average of 3 to 5 bored piles can be

tested
per
day.
The
assigned crew will drill holes on two (2) diametrically opposite sides of the
pile
to
be
tested so that electronic gages (2 accelerometers and 2 strain
transducers)
can
be
attached. When the gages have been placed in position and the PDA has
been
calibrated,
the Engineer shall instruct the crane operator regarding the drop height
and
the
crane
operator shall strike the test pile with the steel or concrete ram weight as
many
times
as
maybe required to obtain adequate measurements. The wood cushion
and
steel
plate
should stay in place after application of each impact blow. The Contractor
shall
provide
surveying instrument to monitor the pile settlement after every blow.
SPL F2.5
Dynamic Load Testing Report
The Pile Dynamic Testing Engineer shall prepare a formal report

summarizing the dynamic load testing results for all piles tested. The
report shall contain a discussion of the Case method pile capacity, driving
stress levels and pile integrity obtained from the dynamic testing. The
Case method is an analytical technique for determining the static pile
capacity from the wave trace data. The PDA is programmed to solve
for the pile capacity using this method and gives the result immediately.
However, the Case method is a simplification of the true dynamics of pile
driving.
The empirically obtained damping parameter calibrates the
analysis, so the final results are no better than the Engineers ability to
select the proper values. An improved analysis on the data obtained from
the PDA tests can be carried out using the CAPWAP (Case Pile Wave Analysis
Programme) analysis at the option of the project owner.
The CAPWAP report results shall provide the following information:

Skin and Toe resistance distribution
Load-Displacement graph similar to the Static Load
Test The pile integrity condition
Stresses in the pile during the strike
SPL F2.6
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 134
Pile Dynamic Tests shall be measured by the test per Each completed
in accordance with the Drawings, Specifications and accepted by the
Engineer.
SPL F2.7
Basis of Payment

shall
be
paid
included
in
the
Bill
of
Quantities.
Payment shall be
full compensation for performing Pile Dynamic Test
including
all
matrials, labour, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to
complete
the
work
under this Item. The work associated with this item shall also include a
geotechnical
consultant and any data interpretation or test adjustment the Engineer may
require.
Pay Item
SPL F2
Description
Unit of Measurement
Pile Dynamic Test
Each
SPL F3
Temporary Detour at Bridge Sites
SPL F3.1
Description
The work related to this item shall consist of construction and

maintenance of temporary detour bridge and, detour roads in
accordance with Drawings and these Specifications. Adequate safety
provisions for the protection of the public (vehicles and pedestrians) shall
be provided which includes guard rails, bridge rails, handrails and
fencing as required.
Generally, the road shall follow the existing ground elevation with a
minimum of filling, cutting or leveling. The ground shall be thoroughly
compacted before placing the granular materials surfacing.
SPL F3.2
Materials shall conform to the requirements for each and every item of work
specified
to complete this item:
1.
Bailey panels and

accessories
Manufacturer / supplier shall be accredited

by the DPWH.
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 135
2.
Coconut logs
Shall be used for piles, to be good quality.
3.
Timber
Shall be of the kind, grade and sizes

shown on the plans. All timber
shall be sound, solid and free of
defects.
4.
Reinforced concrete
pipe
culverts
5.
Detour road
SPL F3.3
Shall be in accordance with the

applicable provisions of Item 500,
pipe culverts and storm drains.
Materials shall be in accordance with
those specified
in
Item
200,
Aggregate Subbase Course.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer his proposed temporary

detour bridge and road plan consisting of construction procedures, type of
equipment to be used for the temporary bridge, calculations and/or
sketches prior to beginning the related bridge work for approval. The
approval of the Engineer shall not be considered as relieving the
Contractor of his obligation under the Contract.
Temporary bridge and roadway shall be fully functional and approved by
the Engineer prior to beginning demolition work of the existing bridge.
The detour system shall be maintained by the Contractor in an
appropriate manner and without any interruption to the flow of traffic.
Maintenance work shall also include furnishing and installing traffic
road signs, temporary lighting and other safety measures that
includes temporary guard rails and bridge materials meeting the DPWH
safety requirements or as directed by the Engineer. Maintenance of the
detour shall be carried out throughout the construction of the
permanent structure. Any incident occurring by the virtue of faulty
construction or lack of maintenance shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor.
The
Contractor at his/her convenience may acquire and/or lease

additional
land
outside the Right-of-Way limits shown on the drawings for the purpose of
constructing
detour roads. The acquisition and/or lease of these additional lands and
all
additional
effected properties/structures not already specified in the RAP will be
subject
to
the
requirements of the Project RAP and shall be the sole responsibility of the
Contractor.
All disturbed land used for the temporary detour road/bridge areas shall
be restored to pre-project conditions meeting the approval of the Engineer.
SPL F3.4
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 136
Temporary Detour at Bridge sites and related components shall be

measured on a Lump Sum basis per location in accordance with
the Drawings, Specifications complete in place and as accepted by the
Engineer.
SPL F3.5
Basis of Payment
The accepted quantity measured as specified in the Method of

Payment shall be full compensation for all for acquisition/rental of
privately owned land and associated RAP requirements, relocation of
utilities attached to the bridge, excavation works, furnishing and installing
all materials such as but not limited to the following; embankment,
aggregate subbase course, temporary pavements, concrete and temporary
bridge components, RCPC, grouted riprap, railings, guardrails, signage,
and periodic maintenance, removal of detour components, restoring the
site to pre-project conditions, restoration of utilities including all labour,
equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete the work under
these Items.
Payment for the above Pay Items shall be made as
follows:
30% at the opening of the Temporary Detour to
traffic.
50% divided in equal monthly installments during the time
temporary detour is open to traffic (maintenance) based on
construction schedule.
the
the
20% upon removal of the temporary detour, restoration of the site

and utilities. Payment shall be made under the following Items:
Pay Item
Description
SPL F3.1 Temporary Detour at Cansolabao Bridge

Site
SPL F3.2 Temporary Detour at Binaloan Bridge
Site
SPL F3.3 Temporary Detour at Bayo Bridge Site
SPL F3.4 Temporary Detour at Burak Bridge Site
SPL F3.5 Temporary Detour at Lumatod Bridge
Site
SPL F4
Pipe
GI Drain
Unit
of
Measurement
Lump Sum
Lump Sum
Lump
Sum
Lump
Sum
Technical
Specifications:
Lump Sum
of
SPL F4.1
IX - 137
Description
The work related to this item shall consist of the construction of GI drain
pipe on bridge and shall conform to the applicable requirements of Item
517, Drain Pipe.
SPL F4.2
Materials shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M36 and M218

as it relates to the specified diameter and type shown on the drawings.
SPL F4.3
G.I. Drain Pipe shall be measured per Each complete in place installed
Engineer.
SPL F4.4
Basis of Payment

shall
be
paid
included
in
the
Bill
of
Quantities.
Payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and installing G.I.
Drain
Pipe including all materials, labour, equipment, tools and
Pay Item
SPL F4
Description
Unit of Measurement
G.I. Drain Pipe - 150mm diameter
Each
SPL F5
Concrete Stair with G.I. Pipe Railings
SPL F5.1
Description
The work related to this item shall consist of the construction of concrete
stair with G.I. pipe railings to the lines and grades as shown on the
Drawings.
SPL F4.2
Structural Concrete shall conform

405SP, Structural Concrete Class B.
to
the
requirements
Pipe railings shall be Galvanized Iron pipe 38mm in diameter.
Technical
Specifications:
of
of
Item
SPL F4.3
IX - 138
Concrete Stair with G.I. Pipe Railings shall be measured per Linear
Meter
complete
in
place installed in accordance with the Drawings, Specifications and as
accepted
by
the
Engineer.
SPL F4.4
Basis of Payment

shall
be
paid
included
in
the
Bill
of
Quantities.
Payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and installing Concrete
Stair with G.I. Pipe Railings including all materials, labour, equipment,
Pay Item
SPL F5
Description
Concrete Stair with G.I. Pipe
Railings
SPL F6
Non-Seismic Repairs of Existing Bridges
SPL F6.1
Description
Unit
of
Measurement
Linear Meter
The work related to this item shall consist of non-seismic repair of

various sections or members of the existing bridges conforming to the
alignment, grades, dimensions and details shown on drawings and in
accordance with these Specifications for the various Pay Items shown
below.
SPL F6.2
Repair of Cracks by Epoxy Injection
Inject Type IV epoxy adhesive in accordance with the requirements of Item

719,
EPOXY-
RESIN-BASE BONDING SYSTEMS FOR CONCRETE, by means of high
pressure
injection
equipment. Cracks in which epoxy is to placed shall be cut or chipped
into
v-notch
and
blown clean and dry with compressed air to remove all excess moisture
and
debris.
Cracks shall be surfaced sealed except entry and exit ports using
materials
specified
by
the manufacturer. High strength low viscosity structural epoxy shall be
injected
through
entry ports using inject port nozzle attached to a pressure machine
with
a
variable
dispense pressure of 0-15 MPa. When the epoxy comes out on the adjacent
port
and
the
material injected has reached the full depth of the concrete fissures, the
injection port is
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 139
plugged and the injection is resumed at the next port. These steps are
to be followed until all ports are similarly injected.
SPL F6.3
Repair of Concrete by Patching with Epoxy Mortar
Deteriorated concrete and loose materials on the area to be repaired

shall
be
removed
to a sufficient depth to expose sound concrete. Repair area on top of
deck
shall
be
determined by the Engineer and outlined by the Contractor with a 19mm
deep
saw
cut.
Surfaces of repair area shall be blast cleaned to remove laitance and
other
deleterious
materials. Existing steel reinforcement on the concrete to remain in place
shall
not
be
damaged during the removal operation. Steel reinforcement exposed
during
the
removal operation shall be blast cleaned and shall be free from dirt, oil,
paint,
grease,
loose or thick rust and other deleterious substances which could impair
bond
of
steel
with the concrete.
Submit, at least 15 days before work commences, a job-mix formula for
each use of epoxy mortar. Test reports shall accompany the mix
design. Identify the proposed source of the materials and state the
proportions of aggregates and epoxy resin. When determining job mix,
use samples of materials to be used on the job.
a) Trial batches: Perform a minimum of three trial batchings in a certified
testing
laboratory.
Try
different
aggregate-resin
proportions
to
obtain
satisfactory placing and finishing characteristics but keep the
proportion by weight of aggregate to epoxy resin binder at least
five to one. When mixing, add the fine aggregates first, and then the
coarse aggregates. The final trial batch should be sufficiently wet so
that some fines will "bleed" to the surface during finishing operations.
b) Supporting criteria: Include in the submittal the following data for each trial
batch:
1. Proportions by weight
2. Unit weights and specific gravities of constituents
3. Batch weights
4. Compressive strengths of 76 by 152 Mm 3 by 6 inch cylinders, made
in
accordance with ASTM C31/C31M, air cured for 7 days and tested
in
accordance
with ASTM C39/C39 . Compressive strength shall be a minimum of
the following:
Cast-In-Place Concrete: 4000 psi
Precast Concrete:
5000 psi
5.
Curing time
Test Reports shall include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Viscosity
Consistency
Gel time
Absorption
Shrinkage
Thermal compatibility
Epoxy Resin Grout report shall include the following:

Technical
Specifications:
of
a.
b.
c.
d.
IX - 140
Epoxy number
Consistency
Compressive single shear strength
Pot life
Non-Pressure Epoxy Grout shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M-235

Type IV, Grade 3 with or without mineral filler.
Aggregate for Epoxy Mortar shall be in accordance with Section 311.2.2,
Fine
Aggregate.
Forms where required shall be built and set-in-place as tightly as possible
that can be rigidly held in line and grade and removed without injury to
concrete.
Epoxy
and epoxy mortar shall be furnished and placed

accordance
with
the
requirements of Item 719, EPOXY-RESIN-BASE BONDING SYSTEMS
CONCRETE.
SPL F6.4
in
FOR
Repair Concrete by Patching with Cement Mortar
Deteriorated concrete and loose materials on the area to be repaired

shall
be
removed
to a sufficient depth to expose sound concrete. Repair area on top of
the
deck
shall
be
determined by the Engineer and outlined by the Contractor with a 19mm
deep
saw
cut.
Surfaces of repair area shall be blast cleaned to remove laitance and
other
deleterious
materials. Existing steel reinforcement on the concrete that is to remain
in
place
shall
not be damaged during the removal operation. Steel reinforcement
exposed
during
the
removal operation shall be blast cleaned and shall be free from dirt, oil,
paint,
grease,
loose or thick rust and other deleterious substances which could impair
bond
of
steel
with the concrete.
Cement mortar shall be furnished and placed in accordance
requirements of Item 600.2.4 Cement Mortar.
SPL F6.5
with the
Restoration of Concrete Component to Original Shape
Concrete shall be furnished, placed, and cured in accordance with

the applicable requirements of Item 405, Structural Concrete, and
Item 407, Concrete Structures. Before depositing concrete on or against
an existing concrete, the old concrete shall be roughened as required by
the Engineer, in a manner that will not leave loose particles of aggregate
or damage concrete at the surface. It shall be thoroughly cleaned of
foreign matter and laitance. The surface of the existing concrete shall be
washed with water and shall be thoroughly coated with mortar in the
same proportion of sand and cement as the class

against which the new concrete shall be placed
mortar has attained its initial set.
of concrete used
before the grout or
Existing steel reinforcement or the concrete that is to remain in place

shall
not
be
damaged during the removal operation. The Contractor shall repair at his
own expense
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 141
any damage to the structure beyond the removal area caused by the
removal operation to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Steel reinforcement exposed during the removal operation shall be blast
cleaned and shall be free from dirt, oil, paint, grease, loose or thick
rust and other deleterious substances which could impair bond of steel
with the concrete.
Additional steel reinforcement where shown on the Drawing or as
directed by the Engineer shall be furnished and installed to the
requirements of Item 404(60) SP, Reinforcing Steel.
Epoxy Bonding Compound shall be furnished in accordance with Item
719,
EPOXY
RESIN-BASE BONDING SYSTEMS FOR CONCRETE. Concrete shall be
furnished, placed and cured in accordance with applicable requirements
of Item 405, STRUCTURAL CONCRETE. Before depositing new concrete
on or against existing concrete, the surface of the existing concrete
shall be thoroughly cleaned of dust, laitance and foreign matters.
The surfaces of the existing concrete which will come in contact with
the new concrete shall be flushed, with water and allowed to dry
to a surface condition immediately prior to placing concrete.
SPL F6.6
Abutment Slope Protection
Abutment slope protection shall include the repair and construction

of riprap and grouted riprap to the lines, grades and dimensions
shown on Drawings and in accordance with this Specification.
Existing deteriorated riprap and other obstructions shall be removed as
indicated on the Drawings, or as ordered by the Engineer, payment of
which shall be included in the price per cubic meter of riprap.
Filling required for the formation of the bed for riprap shall be furnished
and
placed
in
accordance with Item 104 SP, Embankment. The fill shall be
thoroughly
compacted
using mechanical equipment until a uniform density of not less than 95
mass
percent
of
the maximum density obtained as determined by AASHTO T99, Method C.
Measurement
and payment for Embankment shall be as prescribed in Item 104 SP,
Embankment.
SPL F6.7
Pier Scour Protection
Pier Scour Protection shall include furnishing and placing rock and wire
mesh baskets (gabions/mattresses) at the locations shown on the Plans or
designated by the Engineer in conformity with the lines, grades,
dimensions
and
arrangements
shown
on
the Drawings and in
accordance with Item 511, Gabions and Mattresses.
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 142
Materials and construction requirements, method of measurement

and basis of payment shall be as specified in Item 511, Gabions and
Mattresses.
SPL F6.8
Painting of Steel Components (Bearing)
Painting of steel components shall include the preparation of the metal

surfaces to be painted in accordance with section 403.3.21, Preparing
Metal Surfaces for Painting, and the painting in accordance with Section
403.3.23, Painting Metal Surfaces.
Paint system No. 3 as described in Table 403.4 - Paint System, shall be
used
in
painting
steel components. Paint materials shall be according to the provisions
of
Item
709,
Paints.
Painting of steel components shall be measured per square meter of
painted surface completed and accepted by the Engineer. Payment
shall be full compensation for cleaning and preparation of metal
surfaces and for furnishing and placing of materials and for all labour,
tools, equipment, scaffolding and platforms and incidentals necessary to
complete the item.
SPL F6.9
Provision of Asphalt Overlay
Asphalt overlay of specified thickness shall be furnished and place to

the lines and grades shown on the Drawings and in accordance with
the specifications for Item 302, Bituminous Tack Coat and Item 310,
Bituminous
Concrete
Surface
Course,
Hot
Laid. Measurement and
payment shall be as prescribed in Items 302 & 310.
SPL F6.10
Repair of Expansion Joint
Poured joint filler shall be mixed asphalt and mineral or rubber filler
conforming to the applicable requirements of Item 705, Joint Materials.
SPL F6.11
Replacement of Superstructure
The work related to Replacement of Superstructure shall consist of

furnishing
and
installing temporary concrete barrier for traffic control, demolition of
the
existing
concrete deck/girder and the furnishing and placing of materials
conforming
to
the
lines and grades shown on the Drawings and in accordance with this
Specification.
The Contractor shall prepare two (2) stage construction sequence as
shown
on
the Drawings and shall be subject for approval by the
Engineer.
Traffic control system shall include furnishing and installing temporary
concrete barrier bolted to the bridge deck as shown on the Drawings.

The concrete barrier shall be turned over to the DPWH after construction of
the new superstructure.
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 143
Demolition of existing concrete shall be done in accordance with Item 101

SP, Removal of Structures and Obstructions. Shoring to support the span
whose girder ends that will be demolished shall be approved by the
Engineer. Demolition of the girder shall only start after the approved shoring
is in place.
shall not be damaged during the removal operation. The Contractor shall
repair at his own expense any damage to the structure beyond the
removal area caused by the removal operation as approved by the
Engineer.
Steel reinforcement exposed during the removal operation shall
clean and shall be free from dirt, oil, paint, grease, loose or
and other deleterious substances which could impair bond of
with the concrete. Additional steel reinforcement where shown
Plans
shall
be
furnished
and
installed
according
requirements of Item 404SP, Reinforcing Steel.
Mechanical coupler for reinforcing
specified on the Drawings.
steel
bars
shall
be
be blast
thick rust
the steel
on the
to
the
installed
as
Concrete shall be Class A (Mod) and shall be furnished, placed and cured
in
accordance
with the applicable requirements of Item 405 SP, Structural
Concrete,
Item
407,
Concrete Structures and this Specification. Forms shall be built and
set
in
place
as
tightly as possible that can be rigidly held in line and grade, and removed
without
injury
to concrete. Before depositing new concrete on or against existing
concrete,
the
surface
of the existing concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned of dust, laitance and
foreign
matter.
The surfaces of the existing concrete which will come in contact with the
new
concrete
shall be flushed with water and allowed to dry to a surface condition
immediately
prior
to placing of concrete.
Rebuild reinforced concrete deck slab and/ or girder shall be measured
per
cubic
meter
of structural concrete and per kilogram of reinforcing steel in placed and
accepted
by
the Engineer. The price shall be full compensation for the furnishing
and
placing
concrete and reinforcing steel including all labor, equipment, tools
and
incidentals
necessary to complete the works. Shoring where necessary shall not
be
paid
for
separately but its deemed to be included in the payment per cubic
meter
of
concrete
in
place.
SPL F6.12
Approach Sidewalk and Railing
The work related to Aproach Sidewalk and Railing shall consist of

constructing new approach sidewalks and railings which shall be
anchored to the existing abutment conforming to the alignment,
grades,
dimensions
and
details
shown
on
the
Drawings and in
accordance with these Specifications.
Materials shall conform to the requirements for each and every item of
work specified to complete this item:
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 144
1. Class A(Mod) Concrete shall be in accordance with applicable

provision
of
Item
405 SP, Structural Concrete.
2. Reinforcing Steel Bars shall be in accordance with the applicable
provisions
of
Item
404 SP, Reinforcing Steel.
3. Formworks shall be as specified in Item 414. Forms and Falseworks
4. Granular Backfill shall be in accordance with the applicable provision of
Item
200
SP,
Aggregate Sub-base Course.
Construction Requirements:
1. Demolition of Existing Approach Sidewalk and Railing shall be in accordance
with
Item 101SP, Removal of Structures and Obstructions.
2. Excavation shall be in accordance with applicable provisions of Item 103
SP,
Structural Excavation.
3. Dowelling: When new concrete is shown on the Plans to be joined to
existing
concrete by means of bar reinforcing steel dowels grouted into holes
drilled in the existing concrete, the holes shall be drilled by
methods that will not shatter or damage the concrete adjacent to the
holes. The grout shall be neat epoxy made up of resin and hardener
without the addition of sand and shall be in accordance with the
applicable provision of Item 719, Epoxy
4. Reinforcing Steel: Steel reinforcement shall be placed at the position and
manner
indicated on the Plans or as required by the Engineer and shall be
in accordance with Item 404SP, Reinforcing Steel.
5. Concrete: The Contractor shall furnish and place concrete in accordance with
the
requirements of Item 405 SP, Structural Concrete and Item 407,
Concrete Structures to the required limits and to the lines and grades
shown on the Drawings.
6. Backfilling: Backfilling materials shall conform to the requirements of Item 200
SP,
SPL F6.13
Backwall/Wingwall Reconstruction
The work related

constructing new
existing abutment
details shown
to Backwall/Wingwall Reconstrucyion shall consist of

backwall/wingwall which shall be anchored to the
conforming to the alignment, grades, dimensions and
on the Drawings and in accordance with these
Specifications.
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 145
1. Class A(Mod) Concrete shall be in accordance with applicable

provision
of
Item
405 SP, Structural Concrete.
provisions
of
Item
3. Formworks shall be as specified in Item 414. Forms and Falseworks
4. Granular Backfill shall be in accordance with the applicable provision of
Item
200
SP,
Construction Requirements:
Demolition of Existing Backwall/Wingwall shall be in accordance with
Item 101SP, Removal of Structures and Obstructions.
Excavation shall be in accordance
Item 103 SP, Structural Excavation.
with
applicable
provisions
of
Dowelling: When new concrete is shown on the Plans to be

joined to existing concrete by means of bar reinforcing steel dowels
grouted into holes drilled in the existing concrete, the holes shall be
drilled by methods that will not shatter or damage the concrete
adjacent to the holes. The grout shall be neat epoxy made up of resin
and hardener without the addition of sand and shall be in accordance
with the applicable provision of Item 719, Epoxy
Reinforcing Steel: Steel reinforcement shall be placed at the position
and manner indicated on the Plans or as required by the Engineer
and shall be in accordance with Item 404SP, Reinforcing Steel.
Concrete: The Contractor shall furnish and place concrete in
accordance with the requirements of Item 405 SP, Structural Concrete
and Item 407, Concrete Structures to the required limits and to the lines
and grades shown on the Drawings.
SPL F6.14
Restoration of Girder End
Restoration of girder end shall be furnished, placed, and cured in

accordance with the applicable requirements of Item 405, Structural
Concrete, and Item 407, Concrete Structures. Before depositing
concrete on or against an existing concrete, the old concrete shall be
roughened as required by the Engineer, in a manner that will not leave
loose particles of aggregate or damage concrete at the surface. It shall
be thoroughly cleaned of foreign matter and laitance. The surface of the
existing concrete shall be washed with water and shall be thoroughly
coated with mortar in the same proportion of sand and cement as the
class of concrete used against which the new concrete shall be placed
before the grout or mortar has attained its initial set.
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 146

shall not be damaged during the removal operation. The Contractor shall
repair at his own expense any damage to the structure beyond the
removal area caused by the removal operation to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
Steel reinforcement exposed during the removal operation shall be blast
cleaned and shall be free from dirt, oil, paint, grease, loose or thick
rust and other deleterious substances which could impair bond of steel
with the concrete.
Additional steel reinforcement where shown on the Drawing or as
directed by the Engineer shall be furnished and installed to the
requirements of Item 404(60) SP, Reinforcing Steel.
Epoxy Bonding Compound shall be furnished in accordance with Item
719,
EPOXY
RESIN-BASE BONDING SYSTEMS FOR CONCRETE. Concrete shall be
furnished, placed and cured in accordance with applicable requirements
of Item 405, STRUCTURAL CONCRETE. Before depositing new concrete
on or against existing concrete, the surface of the existing concrete
shall be thoroughly cleaned of dust, laitance and foreign matters.
The surfaces of the existing concrete which will come in contact with
the new concrete shall be flushed, with water and allowed to dry
to a surface condition immediately prior to placing concrete.
Restoration of Girder End shall be measured per Cubic Meter of
Structural Concrete Class A (Mod),-20.7Mpa and per Kilogram of Reinforcing
Steel Bars,Grade 60.
SPL F6.15

specified
below
accepted
by
the
Engineer.
Repair Cracks by Epoxy Injection shall be measured perLiter of epoxy
injected
complete in place.
Repair of Concrete by Patching with Epoxy Mortar shall be measured per
Cubic Meter of mortar complete in place.
Repair of Concrete by Patching with Cement Mortar hall be measured per
Cubic Meter of Mortar complete in place.
Restoration of Concrete Component to Original Shape shall be measured per
Cubic
Meter of concrete complete in place.
Abutment Slope Protection shall be measured per Cubic Meter

riprap
complete in place.
Technical
Specifications:
of
of grouted
IX - 147
Repair of Abutment Slope Protection shall be measured per Square

Meter of damaged slope protection complete in place.
Pier Scour Protection shall be measured as a Cubic Meter of Gabions
and Matresses complete in place.
Painting of Steel Components (Bearing) shall be measured per Square
Meter complete in place.
Provision of Asphalt Overlay shall be measured per Square Meter
complete
Repair
of
in
Expansion
Joint
place.
shall
be
measured
per
Linear
Meter
complete in place.
Replacement of Superstructure shall be measured perCubic Meter
of Structural Concrete Class A (Mod),-20.7 MPa, per Kilogram of
Reinforcing Steel Bars, Grade 60, per Each of Elastomeric bearing Pad,
per Each of G.I. Drain Pipe - 150mm dia., per Lump Sum of
falsework and per Lump Sum of Demolition/Removal of Existing
Structure, per each of Mechanical Coupler and per Linear Meter
of Temporary Concrete Barrier complete in place.
Replacement of Approach Sidewalk and Railing shall be measured per
Cubic Meter of Structural Concrete Class A (Mod), - 20.7 MPa, per
Kilogram of Reinforcing Steel Bars, Grade 60,
per Each of Drill and
Bond (Dowel Bar, __mm x __mm) and per Cubic Meter of Selected
Borrow complete in place.
Backwall/Wingwall Reconstruction shall be measured per Lump Sum of
Demolition
of
Existing Backwall/Wingwall, per Cubic Meter of Structural Concrete Class
A (Mod), -
20.7 MPa, per Kilogram of Reinforcing Steel Bars, Grade 60,
per Each
of Drill and Bond (Dowel Bar, __mm x __mm
Restoration of Girder End shall be measured per Cubic Meter of
Structural Concrete Class A (Mod),-20.7Mpa and per Kilogram of Reinforcing
Steel Bars,Grade 60.
SPL F6.16
Basis of Payment

Payment for the work items listed below shall be full compensation for
all
materials,
labour, equipment tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work
under
these
Items.
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 148
Pay Item
Description
SPL
SPL
SPL
SPL
SPl
SPl
Repair of Cracks by Epoxy Injection

Repair of Concrete by Patching with Epoxy Mortar
Liter
Repair of Concrete by Patching with Cement Mortar Cubic Meter
Restoration of Concrete Component to Original
Cubic Meter
Shape
Structural Concrete Class A(Mod),-20.70 MPa
Cubic Meter
Kilogram
F6(1)
F6(2)
F6(3)
F6(4)
F6(4)a
F6(4)b
Unit of
Measurement
SPL F6(5)
SPL F6(5)a Abutment Slope Protection
SPL F6(5)b Grouted Riprap Class A
Gabions
SPL F6(6)
SPL F6(6)a Repair of Abutment Slope Protection
Grouted Riprap Class A
Cubic Meter
Cubic Meter
Cubic Meter
SPL F6(7)
SPL F6(7)a Pier Scour Protection
SPL F6(7)b Gabions
Mattress
SPL F6(8)
Painting of Steel Components (Bearing)
SPL F6(9)
Provision of Asphalt Overlay
SPL F6(10)
Repair of Expansion Joint
SPL
SPL
SPL
SPL
SPL
SPL
SPL
SPL
SPL
SPL
SPL
SPL
SPL
SPL
SPL
SPL
Cubic Meter
Cubic Meter
Square Meter
Square Meter
Linear Meter
F6(11)
F6(11)aReplacement of Superstructure
F6(11)bStructural Concrete Class A(Mod),-20.70 MPa
Cubic Meter
F6(11)c Reinforcing Steel Bars, Grade 60
Kilogram
F6(11)dElastomeric Bearing Pad ___mm x ____mm x __mm
Each
F6(11)eG.I. Drain Pipe - 150mm dia.
Each
F6(11)f Falsework
Lump Sum
F6(11)gDemolition/Removal of Existing Structure
Lump Sum
F6(11)hMechanical Coupler 12 mm dia.
Each
F6(11)i Mechanical Coupler 16 mm dia.
Each
F6(11)j Mechanical Coupler 28 mm dia.
Each
Temporary Concrete Barriers
Linear Meter
F6(12)
F6(12)aReplacement of Approach Sidewalk and Railing
F6(12)bStructural Concrete Class A,-20.70 MPa
Cubic Meter
F6(12)c Reinforcing Steel Bars, Grade 60
Kilogram
F6(12)dDrill and Bond (Dowel Bar, __mm dia. x ___mm)
Each
Selected Borrow
Cubic Meter
Technical
Specifications:
of
SPL
SPL
SPL
SPL
SPL
F6(13)
F6(13)aBackwall/Wingwall Reconstruction
F6(13)bRemoval of Existing Backwall/Wingwall
F6(13)c Structural Concrete Class A,-20.70 MPa
F6(13)dReinforcing Steel Bars, Grade 60
Drill and Bond (Dowel Bar, __mm dia. x ___mm)
SPL F6(14)
SPL F6(14)aRestoration of Girder End
SPL F6(14)bStructural Concrete Class A(Mod),-20.70 MPa
IX - 149
Lump Sum
Cubic Meter
Kilogram
Each
Cubic Meter
Kilogram
SPL F7
Concrete Shear Keys at Abutment - Seismic Retrofit
SPL F7.1
Description
The work related to this item shall include constructing shear keys for
existing bridges as shown on the Drawings and in accordance with these
Specifications.
SPL F7.2
1.
Class A Concrete - Shall be in accordance with applicable provision of Item 405SP.
2.
Reinforcing Steel Bars - Shall be in accordance with the applicable
provisions
of
Item
404SP.
3. Formworks - Shall be used to form shear block, and shall conform to
the
applicable
requirements of Item 414, Form and Falseworks
4.
Epoxy
and Silica Sand - Shall be used as grout for dowels and

rebars
and
should
contain no streaks or lumps. Sand shall conform to Section 703.5.2.
SPL F7.3

specified
below
accepted
by
the
Engineer
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 150
Concrete Shear Keys at Abutment shall be measured per Cubic Meter of

Concrete
Class A , per
Kilogram of Reinforcing Steel Bars, Grade 60 and per
Each of Drill and Bond (Dowel Bar 25 mm dia x 600 mm) complete in
place.
SPL F7.4
Basis of Payment

shall be paid
for at the Contract unit price of the Pay Item listed below that is included in
the Bill of
Quantities.
Payment shall be
full compensation for all materials, labour,
these Items.
Pay Item
Description
SPL F7(1)
Structural Concrete Class A (Mod), - 20.7 MPa
SPL F7(2)
SPL F7(3)
Drill and Bond (Dowel Bar __mm dia x __mm)
Unit of
Measurement
Cubic Meter
Kilogram
Each
SPL F8
Concrete Shear Keys at Pier - Seismic Retrofit
SPL F8.1
Description
The work related to this item shall include constructing shear keys at
bridge piers as shown on the Drawings and in accordance with these
Specifications.
SPL F8.2
Materials shall conform to the requirements for each and every item of work
specified
to complete this item:
1. Class A Concrete shall be in accordance with applicable provision of Item
405SP.
provisions
of
Item 404(60).
3. Formworks
and
shall be used to form shear block, to be good quality

shall conform to the requirements
Form and Falseworks.
of Item 414,
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 151
4. Epoxy and Silica Sand

shall be used as grout for dowels and
rebars and should
contain
no streaks or lumps.
SPL F8.3

specified
below
in accordance with the Drawings, Specifications and as
accepted by the Engineer.
Concrete Shear Keys at Pier shall be measured per Cubic Meter of
Concrete
Class
A
,
per Kilogram of Reinforcing Steel Bars, Grade 60 and per Each of
Drill
and
Bond
(Dowel Bar 25 mm dia x 600 mm) and per Lump Sum of Falsework
complete in place.
SPL F8.4
Basis of Payment

shall be paid
the Bill of
Quantities.
Payment shall be
full compensation for all materials, labour,
these Items.
Pay Item
Description
SPL F8(1)
Structural Concrete Class A, 20.7 MPa
SPL F8(2)
SPL F8(3)
Drill and Bond (Dowel Bar __mm dia x

__mm)
SPL F8(4)
Falsework
SPL F9
Slab Strengthening
SPL F9.1
Description
Unit of Measurement
Cubic Meter
Kilogram
Each
Lump Sum
The work related to this item shall consist of installation of Carbon

Fiber Reinforced Polymer and Asphalt Overlay as shown on the Drawings
and in accordance with these Specifications.
Technical
Specifications:
of
SPL F9.2
IX - 152
1. Carbon Fiber Reinforced Polymer: Shall conform to the requirements of

F9.1 and SPL F9.2 SPL F9.3 below.
Table SPL
Table SPL F9.1 - Typical Dry Fiber Properties

Property
Typical Test Value
Tensile Strength
550,000 psi (3.79 GPa)
Tensile Modulus
33.4 x 106 psi (230 GPa)
Ultimate Elongation
1.7%
Density
0.063 lbs./in3 (1.74 g/cm3)
Weight per sq.yd.
19 oz. (6.44 g/m2)
Table SPL F9.2 ASTM Method
- Composite Gross
Laminate
PropertiesProperty
Ultimate Tensile D3039
Strength in
Primary Fiber
Direction
Elongation at Break
Tensile Modulus
D3039
Flexural Strength D790
Flexural Modulus D790
Longitudinal
D3410
Compressive
Strength
Longitudinal
D3410
Compressive
Modulus
Flexural Failure
D790
Strain
Longitudinal
D696
Coefficient of
Thermal Expansion
Coefficient of
D696
Thermal Expansion
Nominal Laminate
Thickness
Typical Test Value Design Value
143,000 psi (986 121,000 psi (834

MPa)
MPa)
D3039
13.9 x 106 psi
(95.8 GPa)
17,900 psi
(123.4 MPa)
452,000 psi
(3.12 GPa)
50,000 psi
(344.8 MPa)
1.0% 0.85%
11.9 x 106 psi
(82 GPa)
15,000 psi
(104.8 MPa)
384,000 psi
(2.65 GPa)
42,500 psi
(293 MPa)
11.2 x 106 psi

(77.2 GPa)
9.5 x 106 psi

(65.5 GPa)
1.0%
0.85%
3.6ppm./F
20.3 ppm./F
1.0mm
Technical
Specifications:
1.0 mm
of
IX - 153
Table SPL F9.3 - Epoxy Material Properties

Curing Schedule 72 hours post cure at 140F (60C)
Property
ASTM Method
Typical Test Value
D4065
180F( 82C)
Tg
Tensile Strength
D638 Type 1
10,500 psi (72.4 MPa)
Tensile Modulus
D638 Type 1
461,000 psi (3.18 Gpa)
Elongation Percent
D638 Type 1
5%
Flexural Strength
D790
17,900 psi (123.4 MPa)
Flexural Modulus
D790
452,000 psi (3.12 GPa)
2. Asphalt Overlay: Shall conform to the requirements of SPL F6.9
Provision
of
Asphalt
Overlay.
SPL F9.3
Slab Strengthening shall be measured per Square Meter of Asphalt

Overlay and per Square Meter of Carbon Fiber Reinforced Polymer complete
in place.
SPL F9.4
Basis of Payment
The accepted quantities as measured as specified in the Method os

Measurement shall be paid for at the contract unit price of the Pay Item
listed below that is included in the Bill of Quantities.
Payment shall be full compensation for all materials, labour,
equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work under
these Items.
Pay Item
Description
SPL F9(1)
SPL F9(2)
Asphalt Overlay
Carbon Fiber Reinforced Polymer
SPL F10
Rod Restrainer - Seismic Retrofit
SPL F10.1
Description
Unit of Measurement
Square Meter
Square Meter
The work related to this item shall consist of furnishing and istalling bridge rod
restrainers of the type and size as shown on the Drawings
and in
accordance with the requirements of these Specifications.
Technical
Specifications:
of
SPL F10.2
IX - 154
Rod restrainer shall be 28mm diameter and shall conform to Item

404SP,
Reinforcing
Steel
PVC pipe sleeves shall be 36mm diameter commercial quality.
SPL F10.3
Rod retrainer shall be physically attached to the existing structure in

accordance with the design and details as shown on the Drawings.
SPL F10.4

specified
below
Rod Restrainer
SPL F10.5
shall be measured per Set complete in place.
Basis of Payment

shall be paid
the Bill of
Quantities.
this Item.
Pay Item
Description
SPL F10
Rod Restrainer
SPL F11
Column Strengthening - Seismic Retrofit
SPL F11.1
Description
Unit of Measurement
Set
The work related to this item shall consist of the modifying existing
columns to the alignment, grades, design, dimensions and details as
shown on the Drawings and in accordance with this Specification for
reinforcing steel, structural concrete and other items which constitute
the completed structure.
SPL F11.2
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 155
1. Class A Concrete shall be in accordance with applicable provision of Item

405SP.
provisions
of
Item 404SP
3. Formworks
and
shall be used to form shear block, to be good quality

shall conform to the requirements
Form and Falseworks.
4. Epoxy and Silica Sand

shall
rebars
contain
no streaks or lumps.
be used
and
as
grout
of Item 414,
for dowels
should
and
5. Carbon Fiber Reinforced Polymer: Shall conform to the requirements

of
Table
SPL
F11.1 and SPL F11.2 SPL F11.3 below.
Property
Typical Test Value
Tensile Strength
550,000 psi (3.79 GPa)
Tensile Modulus
33.4 x 106 psi (230 GPa)
Ultimate Elongation
1.7%
3
Density
0.063 lbs./in (1.74 g/cm3)
Weight per sq.yd.
19 oz. (6.44 g/m2)
Table SPL F11.2
Value
- Composite Gross
Laminate
PropertiesProperty
Strength in
Primary Fiber
Direction
Elongation at Break
Tensile Modulus
D3039
Longitudinal
Compressive
Strength
Longitudinal
Compressive
Modulus
Technical
D3410
D3410
Specifications:
ASTM Method
Typical Test Value Design
143,000 psi (986 121,000 psi (834

MPa)
MPa)
D3039
13.9 x 106 psi
(95.8 GPa)
17,900 psi
(123.4 MPa)
452,000 psi
(3.12 GPa)
50,000 psi
(344.8 MPa)
1.0% 0.85%
11.9 x 106 psi
(82 GPa)
15,000 psi
(104.8 MPa)
384,000 psi
(2.65 GPa)
42,500 psi
(293 MPa)
11.2 x 106 psi

(77.2 GPa)
9.5 x 106 psi

(65.5 GPa)
of
Flexural Failure
D790
Strain
Longitudinal
D696
Coefficient of
Thermal Expansion
Coefficient of
D696
Thermal Expansion
Nominal Laminate
Thickness
IX - 156
1.0%
0.85%
3.6ppm./F
20.3 ppm./F
1.0mm
1.0 mm

Property
ASTM Method
Typical Test Value
D4065
180F( 82C)
Tg
Tensile Strength
D638 Type 1
10,500 psi (72.4 MPa)
Tensile Modulus
D638 Type 1
461,000 psi (3.18 Gpa)
Elongation Percent
D638 Type 1
5%
Flexural Strength
D790
17,900 psi (123.4 MPa)
Flexural Modulus
D790
452,000 psi (3.12 GPa)
SPL F11.3
1. Dowelling. When new concrete is shown on the plans to be joined to

existing concrete
by means of bar reinforcing steel dowels grouted into holes drilled in
the existing
concrete, the holes shall be drilled by methods that will not shatter or
damaged the
concrete adjacent to the holes. The diameters of drilled holes shall be
as shown on
the plans. The grout shall be neat epoxy made up of resin and
hardener without
addition of sand and shall be in accordance with Item 705 Joint
Materials.Drilled
holes shall be cleaned of dustoil, grease and other deleterious
materials before the
epoxy is deposited into the hole. After which, the dowel is inserted.
2. Placing Steel Reinforcement: Shall be placed at the position and
manner indicated on
the Plans or required by the Engineer, and shall be in accordance with
Item 404 SP,
Reinforcing Steel.
3. Concrete; The Contractor shall furnish and place concrete in
accordance
with
the
applicable
requirements
specified
in
Item 405 SP,
Structural
Concrete. Before
depositing new concrete on the existing concrete, the surface of
the existing concrete shall be roughened in a manner that will
not leave loose particles of aggregate or damaged at the surface. It
shall be thoroughly cleaned of dust, laitance and foreign matter. The
surface shall be flushed with water and allowed to dry to a surface
dry condition immediately prior to placing concrete.

SPL F11.4
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 157

specified
below
Column
Class
Each
Square
Strengthening shall be measured Cubic Meter of Concrete

A , per Kilogram of Reinforcing Steel Bars, Grade 60, per
of Drill and Bond (Dowel Bar __ mm dia x __ mm) , and per
Meter of Carbon Fiber Reinforced Polymer complete in place.
SPL F11.5
Basis of Payment

shall be paid
the Bill of
Quantities.
these Items.
Pay Item
Description
SPL F11(1)
Structural Concrete Class A(Mod),-
20.70 MPa SPL F11(2)
Reinforcing Steel Bars,
Grade 60
SPL F11(3) Falsework
SPL F11(4) Drill and Bond (Dowel Bar, __mm
x __mm) SPL F11(5)
Carbon Fiber Reinforced
Polymer
SPL F12
Retrofit
Girder Strengthening - Seismic
SPL F12.1
Description
Unit of Measurement
Cubic Meter
Kilogram
Lump Sum
Each
Square Meter
The work related to this item shall consist of furnishing and installing of
carbon fiber reinforced polymer to existing concrete girders to the lines
and grades as shown on the Drawings and in accordance with these
Specifications.
Girder Strengthening shall be measured per square meter of carbon
fiber reinforced polymer in placed and accepted by the Engineer. The
price shall be full compensation for the furnishing and placing carbon
fiber reinforced polymer including all labor, equipment, tools and
incidentals necessary to complete the works.
SPL F12.2
1.
Carbon Fiber Reinforced Polymer: Shall conform to the requirements
of
F12.1 and SPL F12.2
Table
SPL F9.3 below.
Technical
Specifications:
SPL
of
IX - 158

Property
Typical Test Value
Tensile Strength
550,000 psi (3.79 GPa)
Tensile Modulus
33.4 x 106 psi (230 GPa)
Ultimate Elongation
1.7%
3
Density
0.063 lbs./in (1.74 g/cm3)
Weight per sq.yd.
19 oz. (6.44 g/m2)
Table SPL F12.2 - Composite Gross
Property
ASTM Method
Strength in
Primary Fiber
Direction
Elongation at Break
Tensile Modulus
D3039
Longitudinal
D3410
Compressive
Strength
Longitudinal
D3410
Compressive
Modulus
Flexural Failure
D790
Strain
Longitudinal
D696
Coefficient of
Thermal Expansion
Coefficient of
D696
Thermal Expansion
Nominal Laminate
Thickness
Laminate Properties
Typical Test Value Design Value
143,000 psi (986 121,000 psi (834
MPa)
MPa)
D3039
13.9 x 106 psi
(95.8 GPa)
17,900 psi
(123.4 MPa)
452,000 psi
(3.12 GPa)
50,000 psi
(344.8 MPa)
1.0% 0.85%
11.9 x 106 psi
(82 GPa)
15,000 psi
(104.8 MPa)
384,000 psi
(2.65 GPa)
42,500 psi
(293 MPa)
11.2 x 106 psi

(77.2 GPa)
9.5 x 106 psi

(65.5 GPa)
1.0%
0.85%
3.6ppm./F
20.3 ppm./F
1.0mm
1.0 mm

Property
ASTM Method
Typical Test Value
D4065
180F( 82C)
Tg
Tensile Strength
D638 Type 1
10,500 psi (72.4 MPa)
Tensile Modulus
D638 Type 1
461,000 psi (3.18 Gpa)
Technical
Specifications:
of
Elongation Percent
Flexural Strength
Flexural Modulus
D638 Type 1
D790
D790
IX - 159
5%
17,900 psi (123.4 MPa)
452,000 psi (3.12 GPa)
.2. Formworks
shall be used to form shear block, to be good quality and
shall
conform to the requirements of Item 414, Form and Falseworks.
SPL F12.3

specified
below
Girder Strengthening shall be measured per Square Meter of carbon
fiber reinforced polymer and per Lump Sum of Falsework in placed and
SPL F12.3
Basis of Payment

shall be paid
the Bill of
Quantities.
The payment shall be full compensation for the furnishing and installing
carbon
fiber reinforced
polymer
including
all
materials,
labor,
these Item.
Pay Item
Description
SPL F12(1)
SPL F12(2)
Falsework
Carbon Fiber Reinforced Polymer
SPL F13
Approach Slab - Seismic Retrofit
SPL F13.1
Description
The
Unit of Measurement
Lump Sum
Square Meter
work realated to this item consists of the demolition and

removal
of
existing
pavement and the construction of approach slab conforming to the
lines,
grades,
dimensions and details shown on the Drawings and in accordance
with
these
Specifications.
Technical
Specifications:
of
SPL F13.2
IX - 160
1.
Formwork shall be as specified in Item 414, Forms and Formworks
2.
Reinforcing Steel Bars shall be in accordance with the applicable
provisions
of
Item
3.
Concrete Shall be in accordance with the applicable provisions of

Item
405
SP,
Structural Concrete.
4.
Premolded Expansion Joint Filler shall conform to the specifications of

Joint
Filler
ASTM Designation D 1751
5.
Selected Borrow shall conform to the requirement of Item 104 SP, Embankment
6.
Mechanical Coupler shall be ACI approved
SPL F13.3
1. Demolition of Existing Pavement and Approach Slabs: The Contractor
shall outline
the limits of the existing pavement and approach slabs to be removed,
with 19mm
deep saw cut. Demolition and removal shall be in accordance with
the applicable
provisions of Item 101, Removal of Structures and Obstructions.
2. Ground Preparation: After removal of existing pavement and
approach slabs, the
ground shall be trimmed to the required elevation shown on the
Drawings. If
additional fill material is needed, the material shall conform to the
requirement of
Item 104, SP Embankment.
3. Dowelling: When new concrete is shown on the Drawings to be
joined to existing
drilled in the
existing concrete, the holes shall be drilled by methods that will
not shatter or
damage the concrete adjacent to the holes. Holes in which longitudinal
or transverse
reinforcement is encountered during drilling before the specified depth
is attained
shall be rejected. A new hole which does not strike reinforcement
shall be drilled
adjacent to the rejected hole to the depth shown on Drawings. The
diameters of the
drilled holes shall be 6mm larger than the nominal diameter of the
dowels unless
shown otherwise on the Drawings. The grout shall be neat epoxy
made up of resin
and hardener without the addition of sand and shall be in accordance
with Item 719,
Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete. Drilled holes shall be
cleaned of
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 161
dust, oil, grease and other deleterious materials before the epoxy is
deposited in the hole, after which the dowel is inserted. Any dowels or
grout which fail to bond or are damaged before the new concrete is
placed shall be removed and replaced.
4. Mechanical coupler
specified
Drawings
for
reinforcing
5. Pavement:
steel
on
bars
Shall conform to the applicable

311(2).
Cement Concrete Pavement (Reinforced).
shall
be
installed
the
requirements
Portland
of
as
item
6. Concrete: The Contractor shall furnish and place concrete in

accordance with the
applicable requirements of Item 405, Structural Concrete and Item
407, Concrete
Structures, to the required limits, line and grades shown on the
Drawings. Before
depositing new concrete on or against existing concrete, the surface
of the existing
concrete shall be roughened as required by the Engineer, in a manner
that will not
leave loose particles of aggregate or damage at the surface. It shall
be thoroughly
cleaned of dust, laitance and foreign matter. The surface of the
existing concrete
shall be washed with water and shall be thoroughly coated with
mortar in the same
proportion of sand and cement as the class of concrete used against
which the new
concrete shall be placed before the grout or mortar has attained its initial
set.
SPL F13.4
The work associated with the Aproach Slab shall be measured as

specified
below
accepted
by
the
Engineer
Removal of Existing Pavement shall be measured by Square Meter.
Selected Borrow materials shall be measured and paid for as provided
in Item 104 SP, Embankment.
Steel reinforcement including the dowels shall be measured and paid
for as provided in Item 404 SP, Reinforcing Steel
Concrete Class (A) shall be measured and paid for as provided in
Item 405 SP, Structural Concrete.
Mechanical Couplers shall be measured by Each complete

in place.
Grout for dowels shall not be measured and are
considered incidental.
SPL F13.5
Basis of Payment
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 162

furninshing and installing all materials, labour, equipment, tools, and
incidentals necessary to complete the work under these Items.
Pay Item
Description
SPL F13(1)
Pavement
SPL F13(2)
Grade 60
SPL F13(3)
SPL F13(4)
__ mm)
SPL F13(5)
SPL F13(6)
dia
SPL F13(7)
dia
SPL F14
Unit of Measurement
Removal of Existing
Square
Meter
Kilogram
Cubic Meter
Reinforcing Steel Bars,

Concrete Class A(Mod), - 20.7 MPa
Drill and Bond (Dowel Bar __ mm dia x
Each
Cubic Meter
Selected Borrow
Mechanical Coupler 16mm
Each
Each
Mechanical Coupler 20mm
Removal of Existing Concrete Structure - Seismic Retrofit
SPL F14.1
Description
The work related to this item shall consist of cutting and removal of
existing concrete structure as shown in the Drawings and in accordance with
these Specifications.
SPL F14.2
The cutting and demolition of existing concrete structure shall be done

in
accordance
with the applicable provision of Item 101 SP, Removal of Structures and
Obstructions.
SPL F14.3
Removal of Existing Structure

shall be measured as specified below
completed
accepted by the Engineer
Removal
of Exisitng
Meter
Concrete
place.
SPL F14.4
Basis of Payment
Piles
shall
complete
be
measured
per
in
Cubic

shall
be
paid
included
in
the
Bill
of
Quantities.
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 163
Payment shall be full compensation for Cutting of Existing Concrete

Structures
including
all labour, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the
work
under
this
Item.
Pay Item
Description
SPL F14
Removal of Existing Concrete Structure
SPL F15
SPL F15.1
Unit of Measurement
Cubic Meter
Installation of New Bearing Pad

Description
The work related to this item shall conist of furnishing and installing
bridge bearing pads. Jacking up of the superstructure is required when
replacing existing bearings. The load from the superstructure must be
relieved from the bearings and methods must be provided to temporarily
carry the loads while the bearings are removed.
This Item therefore shall consist of jacking -up the superstructure
including the construction of the jacking frame and temporary supports,
cutting of existing dowels where applicable, removal of existing
bearings, installation of new bearings and the removal of jacking frame.
SPL F15.2
Working Drawings
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review and approval a
detailed plan and methodology for the replacement of the bearings.
The Contractor shall provide sufficient time for the Engineer to
complete
the
review.
Such
time
shall
be proportionate to the
complexity of the design and in no case shall be less than two (2)
weeks. The submittal shall include the following:
a. Details of the jacks to be used.
b. Shop drawings for the jacking frame and temporary supports.
c. Design calculations for the jacking frame and temporary
supports including
assumptions used for the soil bearing capacity and the maximum
loadings and
deflections for jacks, brackets, columns and beams.
d. Step by step jacking up operation sequence from the construction
of the jacking
frame until installation of new bearings and the subsequent removal
of the jacking
frame.
e. Other information requested by the Engineer.
Construction for which working drawings are required shall not start
drawings have
not relieve the
until
been
approved
by
the
Engineer.
Technical
Specifications:
such
Such approval
of
will
IX - 164
Contractor of responsibility for results obtained by use of these drawings

or any of his other responsibilities under the Contract.
SPL F15.3
Elastomeric Bearing Pad

Bearing pad shall be as specified in the Drawings and shall conform to
the requirement of Item 412 SP, Elastomeric Bearing Pads.
Other Materials
Other materials to be used such as lumber, hardware, structural steel, etc.
shall be of the kind, grade, sizes as shown on the approved working
drawings and shall be of rhe quantity and quality necessary to withstand
the stress imposed.
SPL F15.4
SPL F15.4.1 Jacking Frame Construction

The jacking frame shall be constructed to substantially conform to
the
approved
working drawings. The materials used in the falsework construction
shall
be
in
accordance with section SPL F16.3 of this specifications shall be of the
quality
necessary
to sustain the stresses required by the falsework design. When
manufactured
assemblies are used in falsework, the Contractor shall furnish to the
Engineer
a
letter
of
certification which certifies that all components of such manufactured
assemblies
are
used in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations. The
workmanship
used
in jacking frame construction shall be of such quality that the jacking
frame
will
support
the loads imposed on it or take-up beyond that shown on the working
drawings.
The jacking frame shall be founded on a solid footing safe against
undermining, protected from softening, and capable of supporting the
loads imposed on it. When requested by the Engineer, the Contractor
shall demonstrate by suitable load tests that the soil bearing values
assumed for the design of the jacking frame do not exceed
the
supporting capacity of the sooil.
The jacking frame should provide stable seat for the jacks and adequate
space
for
the
placement of wedges or steel plates, shims, cribbing or other temporary
supports
under
the girders.
SPL F15.4.2 Jacking-up Operation
Hydraulic jacks shall be used in lifting up the superstructure. The

jacks shall be provided with locking nuts to retain without relying
on maintaining the hydraulic pressure for the entire time that the load
is engaged. The jacks shall be able to provide 150% of the design
jacking load.
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 165
The Contractor shall select small enough intervals of incremental

jacking and shall proceed with jacking with caution. The bearing should
be checked after every increment jacking to see if it has been freed.
Lateral deflections of the jacking system shall be monitored to detect
any movements. Careful monitoring is particularly important to detect
when movement is initiated and when jacking can be suspended.
Once the superstructure has been jacked up to the specified height, the
superstructure
shall be secured before the existing bearing is removed. This shall be
done
by
providing
temporary blocking to support the loads by either short built-up columns
or
blocks
of
steel and shims inserted to fully engage the loads. The temporary
supports
must
accommodate thermal movements as well as normal vertical and
horizontal forces.
SPL F15.4.3 Removal of Existing Bearings
After the load has been relieved from the bearings, the Contractor shall
remove
the
existing bearing. Contact surfaces must be thoroughly cleaned to the
satisfaction
of
the
Engineer.
If the girders are doweled to the coping or the abutment seat as the
case maybe, and if shown on the Plans, the dowels shall be cut by
appropriate means accepted by the Engineer. Ut dowels shall be leveled to
the concrete surfaces.
SPL F15.4.4 Installation of New Bearings
Bearings shall be placed on a level surfaces unless they are placed in
opposing points. Any misalignment in the support shall be corrected to form a
level surface.
SPL F15.5

specified
below
Jacking of Superstructure shall be measured per
bearing removal and replacement complete in place.
Each
Elastomeric Bearing Pad shall be measured per Each

specified bearing pad sizes installed complete in place.
SPL F15.6
number
of
for each of the
Basis of Payment
The accepted quantity measured as specified in Method of Measurement

shall
be
paid
included
Quantities.
in
the
Bill
of
Jacking of Superstructure shall be full compensation for construction of

jacking
frame,
conduct of jacking operation, subsequent removal of the jacking frame and all
materials,
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 166
labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the item

Engineer.
Elastrometric Bearing Pad shall be full compensation for removing
existing bearing, furnishing, installing new elastomeric bearing pads, other
minor works, and all matrials, labor, equipment, tools and incidentals
necessary to complete this item in accordance with the Drawings,
Specifications and as accepted by the Engineer.
Pay Item
SPL F15(1)
SPL F15(2)
Description
Jacking of Superstructure
Elastometric Bearing Pad ( __mm x
___mm x ___mm)
SPL F16
Footing Retrofit
SPL F16.1
Description
Unit of Measurement
Each
Each
The work related to Footing Retrofit shall consist of modifying the

existing footing by concrete overlay, construction of bored piles and its
anchorage to the existing footing or driving of piles and their anchorage
to the existing footing conforming to the
alignment, grades, design, dimensions and details as shown on the
Drawings and in accordance with these Specifications.
SPL F16.2
1. Formwork: Formwork shall be as specified in Item 414, Forms and Formworks.

2. Steel Reinforcement: Steel reinforcements shall be as specified in
Item
404
SP,
Reinforcing Steel.
3. Concrete: Concrete except for bored piles shall be as specified in
Item
405
SP,
Structural Concrete.
4. Bored Piles: Bored pile shall conform to the requirements of Item 400 SP, Piling
SPL F16.3
1. Excavation: Excavation, where necessary shall be in accordance with

Item
103
SP,
Structure Excavation.
2. Bored Pile: Construction of bored pile shall be in accordance with Item 400 SP,
Piling.
3. Dowelling: When new concrete is shown on the plans to be
joined to existing
drilled in the
existing concrete, the holes shall be drilled by methods that will
not shatter or
damage the concrete adjacent to the holes. Holes in which longitudinal
or transverse
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 167
reinforcement is encountered during drilling before the specified depth

is
attained
shall be rejected. A new hole which does not strike reinforcement, shall
be drilled.
With
approval of the Engineer, all holes including rejected holes

may
be
cored
through reinforcing steel to the correct depth. The diameters of the
drilled
holes
shall
be 6mm larger than the nominal diameter of the dowels unless shown
otherwise
on
the plans. The grout shall be neat epoxy made up of resin and
hardener
without
the
addition of sand and shall be in accordance with Item 719,
Epoxy-Resin-Basin
Bonding System for Concrete. Drilled holes shall be cleaned of dust oil,
grease
and
other deleterious materials before the new concrete is placed shall be
removed
and
replaced.
4. Placing Steel: Steel Reinforcement shall be placed at the position
and manner
indicated on the plans or required by the Engineer, and shall be in
accordance with
Item 404 SP, Reinforcing Steel.
5. Concrete: The Contractor shall furnish and place concrete in
accordance with the
applicable requirements specified in Item 405SP, Structural Concrete and
Item 407,
Concrete Structures, to the required limits and to the grades and
elevations shown on
the Plans. Before depositing new concrete on or against existing
concrete shall be
roughened as required by the Engineer, in a manner that will not leave
loose particles
of aggregate or damage at the surface. It shall be thorougjly cleaned
of dust, laitance
and foreign matter. The surface of the existing concrete which will
come in contact
with the new concrete shall be flushed with water and allowed to dry to a
surface dry
condition immediately prior to placing concrete.
SPL F16.4

specified below in accordance with the Drawings, Specifications and as
Structure excavation shall be measured and paid for as provided in
Item 103 SP, Structure Excavation.
Bored pile shall be measured and paid for as provided in Item 400 SP, Piling.
Steel Reinforcement including the dowels shall be measured and paid for
as provided in Item 404 SP, Reinforcing Steel.
Concrete
Class
shall
be
measured
per
Cubic
Meter
complete in place. Falsework will be measured as a Lump Sum

Drill and Bond dowels will be measured per Each complete in place
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 168
Grout for dowels shall not be measured for direct payment and is
considered incidental to other various related item
SPL F16.5
Basis of Payment

furninshing and installing all materials,
labour, equipment, tools, and
incidentals necessary to complete the work under these Items.
Pay Item
Description
SPL
SPL
SPL
SPL
SPL
Concrete Class A, - 20.7 MPa

Bored Pile (2.0 m dia.)
Falsework
Drill and Bond (Dowel Bar, __mm dia x
__mm)
F16(1)
F16(2)
F16(3)
F16(4)
F16(5)
SPL F17
Steel Shoe Bumper
SPL F17.1
Description
Unit of Measurement
Cubic Meter
Kilogram
Linear Meter
Lump Sum
Each
This item shall conist of furnishing and installing steel shoe bumpers
for
the
girders
conforming to the alignment, grades, design, dimension and details as
shown
on
the
Drawings.
SPL F17.2
Steel Shoe Bumpers shall conform to the requirements of Item 409,

Welded Structural Steel and Item 712, Structural Metal.
SPL F17.3

specified below in accordance with the Drawings, Specifications and as
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 169
The work associated with furnishing and installing steel

bumpers shall be measured per Set complete in place.
SPL F17.4
shoe
Basis of Payment

furninshing and installing all materials,
labour, equipment, tools, and
Pay Item
Description
SPL F17
Steel Shoe Bumper
Unit of Measurement
Technical
Specifications:
Set
of
PART G
IX - 170
DRAINAGE AND SLOPE PROTECTION STRUCTURES
SPECIAL PROVSIONS
ITEM 500 SP
Pipe Culverts and Storm Drains
500.1 Description
Add the following after the last paragraph.
This shall also include the provision of Pipe Sleeves in accordance with
the line, grades and location as shown in the drawing or as instructed by
the Engineer.
500.2
Add the following after the last paragraph.

Pipe Sleeves
100mm dia PVC Pipes
Concrete encasement and end structure shall
requirement of Item 405SP, Structural Concrete
500.3
comply
with
the
Add the following subsection before subsection 500.3.1.

500.3.1
General
Class of concrete, wall thickness and steel reinforcement for reinforced

concrete pipe culverts shall be in accordance with the details shown
on the drawings and the Specifications. The provisions of Item 500,
Pipe Culverts, and Storm Drains, as amended herewith shall also apply in
the case of repair or replacement of one or more sections of existing
reinforced concrete culvert.
The Contractor shall inform the Engineer sufficiently in advance of
his
plan
for
constructing Reinforced Concrete Pipe Culverts (RCPC), Reinforced
Concrete Box
Culverts (RCBC) and other drainage facilities.
No order
structure
following
approved
-
for supply or fabrication of RCPC and RCBC or other drainage

shall be made by the Contractor unless a list detailing the
items has been submitted in writing to the Engineer and
by him.
station
type of drainage structure (RCPC, RCBC, other)
size
whether to be extended, replaced, or newly constructed
headwalls/wingwalls
Technical
Specifications:
of
500.3.2
IX - 171
Bedding
Delete the second sentence of the first paragraph and substitute with the following:
Unless shown or directed otherwise, bedding for pipe culverts shall be Class B
bedding.
500.3.6
Backfilling
Delete the second sentence of the third paragraph and substitute with the
following:
The width of the backfill on each side of the conduit for the portion above
the
top
of
the
trench shall be equal to 3 times the pipe diameter or 3 meters whichever is
greater.
Add the following paragraph;
When damaged sections of existing reinforced concrete pipe culvert are
to
be
replaced,
the Contractor shall first remove the fill material covering the section to
be
replaced;
then the damaged section shall be removed and disposed. Bedding shall
be
prepared
and compacted in accordance with the provisions of Section 500.3.2,
Bedding.
The
new
pipe section shall be placed and the joint with the adjoining existing pipe
shall
be
sealed
with cement mortar. Backfilling shall be made in accordance with the
provisions
of
Section 500.3.6, Bedding.
Compaction equipment or methods that may cause excessive
displacement or may cause damage to structures shall not be used.
500.4
Delete Section 500.4 in its entirety and replace with the following:
Reinforced concrete pipe culvert sizes and classes are specified on the
drawings shall be measured per Linear Meter of pipe of the several
classes and sizes, measured along the pipe complete in place as and
500.5 Basis of Payment
Add the following:
The quantities, measured as provided in Section 500.4, Method of
Measurement, shall be paid at the contract price per unit of measurement of
each of the particular pay items listed below, that is shown in the Bill of
Quantities, for which price(s) and payment shall be full compensation

furnishing and placing all materials, including bedding and backfill,
labour, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete
work prescribed in this section, except for excavation which shall be
for as provided in Item 103 SP, Structure Excavation.
Technical
Specifications:
of
for
all
the
paid
IX - 172
Payment for pipe sleeves shall be full compensation for furnishing and
installation of pipe sleeves including encasement and end structure and
all labour, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
Pay Item
Unit
Description
500(1)c R. C. Pipe Culvert (RCPC), 910 mm

diameter,
Class II
Measurement
500(1)d R.C. Pipe Culvert (RCPC), 1070 mm

diameter,
Class II
500(1)e R.C. Pipe Culvert (RCPC), 1220 mm
diameter,
Class II
500(1)f
R.C. Pipe Culvert (RCPC), 1520 mm
diameter,
Class II
500(3)
Linear Meter
Linear Meter
Linear Meter
Linear Meter
Linear Meter
Pipe Sleeves
ITEM 501 SP
501.1
of
Underdrains
Description
Delete this Subsection in its entirety and replace with the following:
This Item shall consist of constructing underdrains, using slotted
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) pipe and rounded or crushed aggregate for filter
materials, Non-woven geotextile, underdrain pipe outlets, and blind drains
using aggregate material in accordance with this specification and in
conformity with the lines and grades as shown in the drawings or as
directed by the Engineer.
501.2
Add the following:

All materials shall meet the requirements specified in this Specifications
and shall be subject to inspection and approval by the Engineer.
Add the following subsection 501.2.1 and 501.2.2 after subsection 501.2
501.2.1
PVC underdrain pipe:
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 173
1. Slotted PVC underdrains pipes shall be made from Class 12454-B

or
12454-C
extrusion compound as defined in ASTM D1784, fittings shall be
injection molded.
2. Pipes
and
fittings shall be supplied with integral push-on bell

complete
with
elastomeric ring seal on one end and plain leveled on the other end.
3. Basic dimensions and tolerances shall conform to or exceed ISO 161/1

and
ISO
3606
requirements.
4. Color shall be brown.
5. Pipe shall comply with the following properties.
VALUE
MIN VALUE
REQT
TEST
METHOD
Vicat Softening
77
76 min
ISO 2507
Temp (C min)
5 max
ISO 2505
40
40 max
ISO 2508
PROPERTIES
Longitudinal
Reversion (% max)
Water Absorption(g/m2 max)
Resistance to Acetone Passed
Resistance to
Acid Passed
Sulfuric
Plattening (40% min)
No
delamination/
Disintegration
Max Wt Inc
gm
Max Wt Dec
gm
ISO 3472
0.316
ISO 3473
0.013
Passed
40 min
ASTM D 2729
Resistance
to
External
Blows (TIR max)
10%
10% max
ISO 3127
Tensile Properties at 28C
39.9
Max Tensile
ISO 3504
42.2 min
Strength (MPa)
Max Elongation
501.2.2
80+
80 min
Non-woven Geotextile
Non-woven geotextile material where shown in the drawings shall be provided

and
shall be in accordance with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Polyester or Polypropelene
Mechanically or Thermally bonded
Non-woven and needle punched
Effective Opening Size
5.
Thickness under pressure
100%
110
microns
(max)
0.60 mm (min.)
Technical
Specifications:
of
6.
7.
Weight, (ASTM D 3776)

Multi directional (strip)
(ASTM D 4595)
IX - 174
200g/sq.m.
tensile
Grab-tensile strength (200 mm)

ASTM 4632-91
9. CBR Puncture Strength,
(DIN 54307)
10. Permeability under Pressure
(200 Kn/m2)
11. Elongation
(ASTM 4632-91)
Strength,
12 - 13 KN/m
8.
650 n (min)
1900 - 2100 N
80 I/sq.m./sec or
0.06 cm/sec
50% (min)
Non-woven geotextile shall be rolled out on flat non-rutted surface free

from sharp objects, weighing down the edges. In windy weather, unroll
only sufficient material for immediate
covering.
Do
not
allow
construction equipment into unprotected fabric. Joining is normally
effected by overlapping not less than 300 mm, but is preferable to join
by sewing or industrial stapling. Joint edges should be facing downwards
to avoid protruding through surface material.
501.3.1
Pipe Installation

Before laying of slotted PVC pipe, non-woven geotextile shall be placed
based on the details shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
501.4
Delete this subsection in its entirety and replace with the following:
Under-drains shall be measured per Linear Meter for pipe of the
type and size specified which includes non-woven geotextile, required
as shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
Blind drain shall be measured by the Linear Meter which includes
excavation and required backfill materials.
Granular Backfill Filter Materials for Under-drains shall be measured per
cubic meter complete in place. Cross-sectional measurements shall not
exceed the net dimensions shown on the drawings or as directed by the
Engineer.
Excavation for under-drain pipe will be measured and paid for as provided in
Item 103, Structure Excavation.
501.5
Basis of Payment
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 175
Delete this section in its entirety and replace with the following:
shall
be
paid
included
in
the
Bill
of
Quantities.
Payment shall be full compensation for furnishing
Granular Backfill including all labour, equipment, tools
necessary to complete the work under Item 501(1).
and installing
and incidentals
Payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and installing Under-

drain 150mm dia including woven geotextile, all labour, equipment, tools
and incidentals necessary to complete the work under this Item 501(3).
Excavation for underdrain pipe shall be measured
provided in Item 103 SP, Structure Excavation.
and
paid
for
as

Pay Item
501(1)
501(3)
Description
Underdrain 150 dia. Perforated
Pipe
Granular Backfill Filter Materials
for Underdrains
ITEM 502 SP
502.1
Unit of Measurement
Linear Meter
Cubic Meter
Inlet/Outlet Headwalls, Manhole, Inlets and Catch Basins
Description
Add the following:

This item shall include the construction of headwalls for RCP and RCBC
conforming
to
the lines and grades, dimension and design as shown in the Plans and
in
accordance
with the Specifications for structural concrete, reinforcement and other
items
which
constitutes the complete structure. The concrete mixture to be used in
the
structure
or
part of the structure shall be as specified in the drawings or as
specified
by
the
Engineer.
502.4.1
Add the following:
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 176
Headwalls of the different types and sizes shall be measured by Each.

Any
additional
concrete and/or reinforcing steel that may be required for authorized
increases
in
height in excess of the standard heighs as shown on the Plans will be
measured
and
paid
for in accordance with the provisions for Pay Items 103(1), 405(1)b,
405(2),
405(6)
and
404(40).
502.5
Basis of Payment
Delete this Section in its entirety and replace with the following:
The accepted RCPC and RCBC headwall structures, as provided in Section
502.4, Method of Measurement of the Pay Items in Bill of Quantities,
shall be paid for at the Contract unit prices, which shall constitute full
compensation for furnishing and placing all materials complete in
place including all labour, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary
to complete the item.
Excavation and backfill will be measured and paid for under Item 103
SP, Structure Excavation.
Pay Item
Description
405(1)b
404(40)
407(1)
103(1)a
Excavation
Structural Concrete Class A, - 20.7 MPa

Lean Concrete
Structure
Cubic Meter
Kilogram
Cubic Meter
Cubic Meter
ITEM 504 SP
504.3
Unit of Measurement
Cleaning and Reconditioning Existing Drainage Structures
Add at the end of the second paragraph - Pipe Cleaned in Place;

The
Contractor shall take into consideration the provisions of

Subsection
B.4.3.15
Spoils and Spoil Disposal in Part B - Other General Requirements in the
performance
of
this item.
504.5
Basis of Payment
Add the following:

Technical
Specifications:
of
Pay Item
Description
504(3)a
Cleaning of Existing Pipe Culvert

in Place
Cleaning of Existing Box Culvert
in Place
504(3)b
ITEM 505 SP
IX - 177
Unit
of
Measurement
Linear Meter
Linear Meter
Riprap and Grouted Riprap
505.2
505.2.1
Stones
Add the following:

Stones for riprap shall be Class A and shall comply with the following requirements.
Stones shall be Class A and clean, hard and durable river stones,
dense and resistant to the action of air and water and shall be subject to
the Engineers approval.
Stones shall range in size from 250 mm to 350 mm in its longest
dimension with roughly similar blunted ends.
505.5
Basis of Payment
Add the following:

Pay Item
Description
505(5)
Grouted Riprap Class A
ITEM 506 SP
Unit of Measurement
Cubic Meter
Stone Masonry
506.2
506.2.1
Stone
Delete the first sentence of the second paragraph and substitute with the following:
Sizes and Shape - Boulders shall range in size from 250 mm to 350
mm in its longest dimension with roughly similar blunted ends.
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 178
SPL G1
Slope Remediation Measures
SPL G1.1
Description
The work related to these items shall include furnishing, and

installing slope remediation measures conforming to the alignment,
grades, dimensions and details shown on Drawings and in accordance
with these Specifications and for the various items which constitutes the
completed works.
SPL G1.2
Slope Remediation Measures Classification
The slope remediation measures covered under this item are classified as follows;
1. Geogrid Soil Reinforcement, Drainage Blanket
2. Trimming, Coconet and Vegetative Cover on Slope
3. Reinforced Concrete Retaining Wall, Tie Back Anchor, Rockbolts and Reno
Mattress
4. Micropiles with Reinforced Concrete Cap, Gabions, Drainage Blanket
and
Geogrid
Reinforced Soil on Slope
5. Geogrid Soil Reinforcement, Gabions, Coconet and Vegetative Cover on Slope
6. Trimming, Turf Reinforcement Matting and Catchment Barrier
7. Wire Mesh, Matting and Catchment Barrier
8. Gabions and Reno Matteress
9. Reno Mattress, Riprap Class A
10. Ground Anchor with Pre-Cast Concrete Thrust Block
11. Reinforced Concrete Retaining Wall Matting
12. Trimming, Rockbolts
13. Micropiles with Reinforced Concrete Pile Cap and Gabions
14. Trimming Rocknails, Wire Mesh and Rockfall Barrier
15. Trimming, Wire Mesh, Matting and Catchment Barrier
16. Geogrid Soil Reinforcement, Erosion Control Fabric
SPL G1.3
The
different
slope
remediation
measures
shall
meet
the
following material requirements:
1. Geotextile Fabric: Shall have a tensile strength of 11kN/m
2. Gabions: Shall conform to the requirements of Item 511, Gaboins and
Mattresses.
3. Coconet: Shall conform to the requirements of Item 518 SP Coconet
Bio-Engineering
Solutions
4. Erosion Control Fabric
5. Jute Bags : Coco Sack or equivalent
6. Micropiles: Shall conform to the requirements of Item SPL G3,
Micropiling,
Item
405
SP, Structural Concrete, Item 404 SP, Reinforcing Steel
7. Geogrid Reinforcement: Shall have a tensile strength of 840kN/m
8. Turf Reinforcement Matting: Shall be high strength erosion control
matting and shall
conform to the requirements of Item SPL G2, Composite Turf
Reinforcement
Matting.
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 179
9. Catchment Barrier: Shall conform to the requirements of Item 405

SP,
Structural
Concrete, Item 404 SP, Reinforcing Steel
10. Wiremesh: Shall be made of high-tensile steel wire with an ultimate
tensile
strength
2.
of over 1770N/mm
11. Mattress: Shall conform to the requirements of Item 511 Gabions and
Mattresses.
12. Ground Anchor: Shall conform to the requirements of Item SPL G4, Ground
Anchor.
13. Pre-cast Concrete Thrust Block: Shall conform to the requirements of
Item
405
SP,
Structural Concrete, Item 404 SP, Reinforcing Steel.
14. Reinforced Concrete Retaining Wall: Shall conform to the requirements
of
Item
405
SP, Structural Concrete, Item 404 SP, Reinforcing Steel.
15. Rock Bolts: Shall be full resingrouted post tension.
Materials:
The steel
materials shall have a quality equivalent to the following
requirements: Bar for expansion shell type bolts ASTM A 306 Grade
80, plain
Bar
for
bolts
resin
type
Expansion
shell
ASTM
615
Grade
80,
deformed ASTM A 47 Grade

32 510
Bearing
ASTM a 283 Grade
plate
B ASTM A 563
Nut
ASTM A 220
Washer
After fabrication, bolts have the following mechanical properties:
Min. yield load
15,000 kg
Min. breaking load 25,000 kg

The
chemical cartridge for resin type anchoring shall be a

combination
of
polyester
resin blended with selected mineral fillers and chemical accelerator
together
with
a
highly reactive peroxide catalyst in a separate glass inner container
or
equivalent
cartridge.
The bearing plate shall be of spherical dish-shaped type with slotted hole
or fitted with angle-iron washer.
Resin type rock bolts shall be threaded at the outer end and threaded or
deformed in the stretch in contact with the resin.

Borehole:
The diameter of the hole drilled in the rock shall be to suit the expansion
shell or the cartridge of the bold. Holes shall be drilled to the required
depth and then cleaned of all drill cuttings, sludge and debris.
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 180
16. Soil Nails: Shall conform to the requirements of Item SPL G5, Soil Nailing
17. Gravel Fill: Shall conform to the requirements of Item 200 SP, Aggregate
Subbase
18. Native Fill: Shall conform to the requirement of Item 104 SP, Embankment
19. Fertile Soil: Shall conform to the requirement of Item 608, Top Soil
20. Compacted Fill: Shall conform to the requirements of Item 104 SP,
Embankment
21. Stone Masonry: Shall meet the requirements of Item 506 SP, Stone Masonry
22. Weepholes: Shall be PVC Sch. 40
23. Rockfall Barrier: The cable net and wiremesh system and all
hardware shall be
protected from corrosion, Structural steel components, including
cable anchor,
bolts, post foundation bolts, detachable base plates, clamps and
clips, shall be
galvanized.
Cable net to be used in the installation shall be galvanized
coated with polyvinyl chloride.
Wiremesh fabric to be used in the installation shall be zinc
coated and polyvinyl chloride coated.
Post for net supporting shall be painted with one
protective primer and with one additional coat of paint.
26. Tieback Anchor: Shall
SPL G1.4
coat
of
meet allowable tensile capacity of 200kN.
1. The different slope remediation measures shall be constructed to the

lines,
grades
and details as shown on the drawings.
2. Geogrid/geotextile installation:
a. Base Preparation
Unsuitable soil must be cleared from the site and the foundation
soil shall be excavated or filled and leveled to the designers
requirements. Upon identifying the location and alignment of the
structure, excavate the base to the required width and depth.
Install one layer of geotextile/geogrid over the trench prior to
filling with crusher run base to prevent contamination of foundation
soil into crusher run layer. The trench shall be filled with crusher
run base to the required depth and to be well compacted to 95%
MDD.
b. Slope
Trim
keys
also
Trimming
slope where needed to effect required H:V ratio. Shear
(500mm vertical and varied horizontal slope trimmings) may
be provided (but not necessary) for increased contact between
the native soil and the geogrid.

Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 181
c. Installation of geogrid / geotextile

Cut sections of the geogrid roll to the required length and place it
on the bottom of the geotextile unit to ensure proper connection
between the geotextile unit and geogrid. The geogrid shall be
installed with primary strength placed perpendicular to the wall.
Pretension geogrid to remove loose folds. Stake geogrid with
wooden stake before installing drainage layer and backfill
material. Place additional geogrid section adjacent to the existing
geogrid with a minimum overlap of 2m.
Avoid driving equipment
over the geogrid with less than 150mm thickness backfill
material to avoid excessive damage to the geogrid.
The spacing
between geogrid reinforcement shall be as specified by a
Professional Engineer or as per manufacturers recommendation
d. Placing of Fill Material
The backfill layer shall be placed to a thickness of 500mm or as
per
maximum
design thickness as described in FHWA NHI-00-043 - Mechanically
Stabilized
Earth Walls & Reinforced Slopes Design & Construction Guideline.
At
no
time
should equipment be allowed on the grid with less than 150mm
thickness
of
fill
material. Loose lifts shall be no greater than 300mm to ensure
proper
compaction.
Place a 500mm drainage material ie crusher run or aggregate at
the back of the reinforced
zone.
The
drainage
material
shall be wrapped with geotextile/geogrid.
Spread and compact granular
geotextile fabric in geogrid.
fill
material
then
wrap
around
Start process of installing new layers of geotextile / geogrid until

desired height is reached. The top elevation shall be further
protected from erosion by including provisions for vegetative cover
and/or coconets.
SPL G1.5

specified
below
accepted
by
the
Engineer.
SPL G1.6
Basis of Payment
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 182

shall
be
paid
included
in
the
Bill
of
Quantities.
furnishing and installing
all materials, including all labour, equipment,
tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work under these Items.
Pay Item
Description
Unit of
Measurement
SPL
SPL
SPL
SPL
G1(1)
G1(2)
G1(3)
G1(4)
Stone Masonry
Gabions
Mattress
Coconets
Cubic
Cubic
Cubic
Square
SPL
SPL
SPL
SPL
SPL
SPL
SPL
SPL
SPL
SPL
SPL
SPL
SPL
SPL
SPL
SPL
G1(5)
G1(6)
G1(7)
G1(8)
G1(9)
G1(10)
G1(11)
G1(12)
G1(13)
G1(14)
G1(15)
G1(16)
G1(17)
G1(18)
G1(19)
G1(20)
Furnishing and Placing of Topsoil

Geogrid
Jute Bags
Geotextile
Rockfall Barrier
Catchment Barrier
Structural Concrete Class A,-20.7MPa
Drainage Blanket (Gravel)
Erosion Control Fabric
Free Draining Gravel Backfill
Wire Mesh System
Perforated Drain Pipe 150mm dia
Reinforcing Steel bars, Grade 40
Riprap Class A
Rockbolts
Tieback Anchor
Cubic Meter
Square Meter
Each
Square Meter
Linear meter
Liner Meter
Cubic Meter
Cubic Meter
Square Meter
Cubic Meter
Square Meter
Linear Meter
Kilogram
Cubic Meter
Linear Meter
Linear Meter
SPL G2
Composite Turf Reinforcement Matting
SPL G2.1
General
The
work
Meter
Meter
Meter
Meter
related to this item shall include furnishing, and installing

Composite
Turf
Reinforment Mat(TRM) conforming to the alignment, grades, dimensions
and details
Technical
Specifications:
of
shown on Drawings and in accordance with these Specifications

constitutes the completed works.
IX - 183
which
The
Contractor shall allow for all necessary operations including

scaffolding,
platform,
handling equipment, tools machinery etc necessary for the expeditions
handling
of
the
work.
SPL G2.2
Requirements
The turf reinforcement mat shall be a machine produced mat of 100

percent
coconut
fiber matric incorporated into a permanent three-dimensional turf
reinforcement
matting. The matrix shall be evenly distributed across the entire width of
the
matting
and stitch bonded between a super heavy-duty UV stabilized nettings with
1.3
x
1.3
cm
openings.
Furnish
a
web
of
mechanically
or
melt
bonded
polymer
netting,
monofilaments or fibers that are entangled to form a strong and
dimensionally
stable
mat. Bonding methods include polymer welding thermal or polymer
fusion
or
the
placement of fibers between 2 high-strength biaxial oriented nets
mechanically
bonded
together by parallel stitching with polyolefin thread. All mats shall be
manufactured
with a colored thread stitched along both outer edges as an overlap
guide
for
adjacent
mats. The mat must be resistant to biological, chemical and ultra-violet
degradation
and
must meet the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Black in color;
Minimum mat thickness of 13mm, measured under ASTM D1777;
Minimum tensile strength of 1,370 x 790 N/M measured under ASTM D 1682;
Maximum elongation of 75 by 75 percent measured under ASTM D 1682;
Minimum calculated porosity of 90 percent;
Resiliency of 80 percent, measured under ASTM D 1777; and
Ultraviolet stability, measured under ASTM D 4355.
SPL G2.3
Construciton Requirements
Prepare fertilize and seed the erosion control blanket area before placing
the blanket. Handle and place it following the manufacturers
recommendations.
If recommendations are not provided, install as
follows.
1. In ditches, unroll the blanket downstream and lap 105mm over
the
adjoining
blanket. Bury the edges to prevent water and wind undercutting.
2. On slopes, the blanket may be unrolled horizontally or vertically to
the slope, then

lapped 105mm over the adjoining blanket and stapled as above
per the
manufacturers specifications. Always lap the blanket in the direction of
flow.
SPL G2.4
Soil
Retention
Blanket: Soil Retention Blanket shall be measured per

Square
Meter
accepted by the
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 184
Engineer.
SPL G2.5
Basis of Payment

shall
be
paid
included
in
the
Bill
of
Quantities.
tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work under these Items.
Item Number
Description
SPL G2
Turf Reinforcement Matting
SPL G3
Micropiling
SPL G3.1
General
Unit of Measurement
Square Meter
The Contractor shall furnish, install and test micropiles shown

Drawings or as specified herein in accordance with the Specification.
on
the
The
Contractor shall allow for all necessary operations including

scaffolding,
platform,
handling equipment, tools machinery etc necessary for the expeditions
handling
of
the
work.
1. Setting Out
The Contractor shall be required to employ an approved Licensed
Surveyor
who
will
set up the positions of the piles as shown in the pile
layout plans of
the
detailed
design The Contractor will be responsible for the accuracy of
location
and
positioning of each pile. Any errors in setting out and any
consequential
loss
to
the
Employer will be made good by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
The Contractor shall preserve the pegs set out by the Surveyor.
Should any peg be displaced or lost it must be replaced by a
Licensed Surveyor to the approval of the Engineer. Upon completion of
all piling works, the Contractor shall produce as- built Drawings
showing the positions of all piles as installed. The positions of piles
shall be verified by a Licensed Surveyor.
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 185
2. Tolerances Position
The pile heads shall be positioned as shown on the Drawings within
a maximum deviation of 40mm in either direction from correct centre
point. Vertically For bored cast-in-situ piles, the maximum permitted
deviation of the finished pile from the vertical at any level is 1 in
150. The Contractor shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of Engineer
the pile vertically is within the allowable tolerance. Should piles
be installed outside these tolerances affecting the design and
appearance of the structure, the Contractor shall propose and carry
out immediate remedial measure to the approval of the Engineer.
3. Person in Charge
The piling work is to be carried out by full time operators and
supervisory staff who must be experienced in the installation of the
proposed type of piles. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for
approval, written evidence to show that the persons who will be
engaged in the works have had such experience.
4. Piling Equipment and Accessories
The equipment and accessories must be capable of safely, speedily
and
efficiently
installing piles to the design requirements at the project site.
Sufficient
units
of
equipment and accessories must be provided to keep to the
agreed
construction
schedule.
5. Scope of Work
The contract comprises the provision of all
tools, plant etc necessary for the following work:
labor,
materials,
a. Supply and installation of pile foundations to carry the loads as

specified
in
the
drawings
b. Stripping and cutting
preparation
pile head as shown
the
piles
to cut
of
off
levels
specified
the
and
c. Carrying out standards load test as specified

SPL G3.2
1.
Reinforcement
The type of reinforcement to be used, the diameter and/or thickness,
grade, yield strength and stress shall be as specified or as shown on the
Drawings.
2. Grout
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 186
Unless otherwise specified, the grout shall be non-shrink cement grout.

The
grout
mix design such as the water-cement ratio, the minimum cement and
grout
strength
at 7 and 28 days shall be as specified and shown on the Drawings.
Grout
shall
be
tested in accordance with BS 1881 and BS 4550. Maximum bleed shall
be
limited
to
5%. If admixtures are used, details of admixtures shall be submitted to
the
Engineer
for approval before commencement of works. The use of the
admixture
shall
fully
comply with the manufacturer's instructions. If the grout cube as
tested
failed
to
satisfy the criteria as prescribed in Specification and drawings, the piles
constructed
using this batch of grout shall be rejected. The Contractor shall
undertake
all
necessary additional and consequential remedial/ compensation for the
work
to
the
approval of the Engineer.
3.
Site
and
Adjacent
Properties Subsoil Data

The
soil
investigation report issued by the Employer is only

information
and
guidance to the Contractor, and shows the approximate nature of
strata
as
known
to
the Engineer. The Employer and Engineer shall not be liable for
accuracy
of
the
data
given and the Contractor may carry out his own soil investigation
obtain
additional
information.
for
the
the
to
Site Visit
The
Contractor shall visit the site to acquaint himself with the site
conditions
and
no
claims for inadequate information regarding site conditions will be
entertained
at
a
later date. The system or systems put forward by the Contractor shall be
well
known.
The adequacy of any system and its approval shall be at the discretion of the
Engineer
Underground Services And Adjacent Property
The Contractor shall take care to ensure the safety of underground
services and adjacent properties during the installation of micropiles. The
contractor will be liable lo any claims of damage to the piling operations.
SPL G3.3
Drilling Operations
1.
Diameter of Piles
The diameter of piles shall not he less than the specified/designed
diameter at any level throughout its length.
2.
Drilling
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer details of drilling
equipment and drilling procedure for approval before commencement
of works. Drilling operations shall be earned out in accordance with
the relevant requirements as follows:
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 187
a) Boring near recently Cast Piles

Piles shall not be bored next to other piles which have recently
been cast less than 24 hours or contain unset grout, whichever
longer to avoid damage to any of these piles.
b)
Execution
Phases
Phase
1-
Drilling
The drilling is performed by rotation with direct circulation of the
drilling fluid. Phase 2 - Annular Grouting
At completion of drilling, a single packer is lowered to the bottom of the
drill string- reinforcing steel pipe, in order to inject from the bottom the
cement grout that will form the annular around the reinforcing steel pipe.
The purpose of this annular grout is to provide sufficient cover for the
reinforcing steel pipe, and to permit the subsequent pressure grouting of
each valve.
The bottom non-return valve, positioned at the base of the drag bit
prevents the flowback of the annular grout, inside the string-reinforcing
steel pipe.
Phase 3 - Active Bond Grouting
After setting of the annular grout has taken place, the pressure grouting
of each valve is performed by isolating each valve with a double
packer. Sufficient grout pressure is applied in order to break the annular
grout in correspondence with the valve, and to permit the injected mixture
to penetrate into the surrounding soil.
Should the grout absorption be very high, the grouting of each valve can
be repeated at later dates until the refusal pressure, defined at the design
stage have been reached.
After grouting at the active bond length is completed the inner part of
the reinforcing steel pipe is filled with the same grout mixture utilized for the
bond grouting.
c) Rock Coring
Rock coring shall means coring of sound bedrock. Coring of rock other
than two items specified below shall not be considered as coring in rock,
and will only be considered as boring in soil.
(i)
Rock
length
(ii)
roof
socket
Cavity
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 188
Coring of inclined rock surface limestone pinnacles, cavities

soil below boulder/floater shall be considered as boring in soils,
and
d) Inspection of Pile Excavation

Where practicable, all pile excavation shall he inspected for their full
length
before
grouting. The Contractor shall provide all the apparatus necessary for the
inspection.
In
the course of inspection any loose or soft material in the borehole
which
is
likely
to
effect the performance of the pile shall be removed to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
SPL G3.4
SPL G3.4.1
Grouting Operations
Mixing and Placing Grout
The Contractor shall provide details of the method and equipment used in
grout
mixing.
Further information such as grouting pressure, grouting procedure, grouting
equipment
and technique employed in grouting underwater shall also be furnished
for
approval.
Grout shall be mixed on Site and shall be free from segregation,
clumping
and
bleeding.
Grout shall be pumped into its final position in one continuous operation
as
soon
as
possible and in no case more than half an hour after mixing. Micropile
shall
be
grouted
in one continuous process. If there is significant loss of grout, the
Contractor
may
choose to carry out pre-grouting in stages as necessary to prevent
further
loss
of
grout
for the construction of micropile. Method statement of pre-grouting
including
details
of
equipment, materials and procedures have to be reviewed and
approved
by
the
Engineer. If after the process of pre-grouting and re-drilling of the hole is
required.
The
Contractor has to bear the cost and time of the pre-grouting and re-drilling.
SPL G3.4.2
Grout Falls
The lost of flushing mediums of either water or drilling mud drilling will
demonstrate potential excessive grout loss or falls. Depending on its
seriousness, the Contractor can decide to carry out a water tightness test
to decide whether pregrouting is required. The cost and time of the test
will be borne by the Contractor. Pregrouting an re-drilling shall be earned out
if results of the test shown that leakage exceeds 5L/min at an excess head
of 0.1 Mpa, measured over a period of 10 minutes.
SPL G3.5
SPL G3.5.1
Construction of Pile Heads

Lengthening of Piles
Where lengthening is required the pile reinforcement unit shall he

connected on Site to details shown on the Drawing. Other means of
jointing reinforcement shall be to the approval of the Engineer.
SPL G3.5.2
Cutting and Preparation of Pile Heads
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 189
Pile heads shall be constructed to the details as shown on the Drawings.

SPL G3.6
Standards
All materials shall be of the best quality and new. All piling work shall
be executed in accordance with the approved designs prepared by the
Contractor and to the approval of the Engineer.
1. Standard Load Tests
Load test of two (2) times the working loads shall be carried out on
piles designated by the Engineers. The number and location of test
piles shall be at the discretion of the Engineer. The Contractor shall
submit a detailed proposal of the load tests to the Engineer and shall
obtain his approval in writing before carrying them out. On
completion of the test, the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer the results including graphs showing load and settlement
versus time and settlement versus load. The test procedure shall be
as specified in Specification. Failure to standard load test shall be as
specified in Specification.
SPL G3.7
Test Report
The report shall contain the following:

1. Pile designation, date completed, weather condition, pile length, pile
size, volume of
grout intake, time of drilling at intervals not greater than 4m and time
to grout the
pile.
2. Description of the apparatus used for testing, loading system and
procedure
for
measuring settlement.
3. Field data
4. Time/Settlement Curve
5. Load/Settlement Curve
6. Remarks explaining unusual events or data and movement of piles.
7. Calibration certificates of dial gauges and pressure gauges.
8. The format of record shall be approved by the Engineer.
SPL G3.8
Damaged or Displaced Piles
Should the deviation exceed the tolerance provided in this specification,

the
contractor
shall submit a remedial proposal for the approval for the Engineer.
Failing this, the
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 190
faulty pile shall be replaced by additional piles as necessary in positions

as
determined
by the Engineer at no cost to the Employer The cost of modification to
pile
cap
etc.,
if
any, shall be borne by the contractor The same will also apply to
any
piling
work
rejected by the Engineer for not truly constructed and installed in
accordance
with
the
specification. Where a pile has been damaged during installation, testing
or
by
other
causes, the damaged pile shall be considered and treated as a faulty pile
and
should
be
replaced by additional piles as approved by the Engineer at the
Contractor's expense.
1.
Forcible Connection Not Permitted

Where piles have not been positioned within the specified limits
no method of forcible connection will be permitted
SPL G3.9
Piling Records
Complete piling records shall be kept by the Contractor during pile

installation. The Contractor shall submit the following in duplicate to the
Engineer:
1. Records of all piles as the work proceeds.
2. Upon completion, a record of the work as carried out and as-built drawing shall
be
submitted. The format of the record shall be approved by the
Engineer. The record shall contain all information required by the
Engineer which includes the following where applicable :
reference number and position of pile
- type and dimension
- date of boring and nature of strata where each pile is bored
- details of equipment used
- ground level and base of excavation level
- total penetration
- length and position of cavity/cavities in each pile
- penetration in rock
- time of drilling at intervals not exceeding 5m
- detail of all splicing or jointing operations, locations of sleeves, etc.
- details of grouting operation for tremie grouting and time tables
- weather
- top level of pile immediately after completion
- errors in position and inclination
- amount of grout and the pressure used
- size and position of boulder/boulders in each pile
- detailed drilling speed (m/min)
- description of drilled material
SPL G3.10
As-Built Drawings
After completion of the piling the Contractor shall submit as-built drawings.
Those
drawings should include the following:
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 191
1. Size and type of piles

2. Eccentricities in both directions
3. Depth of penetration of each pile or reduced level
cut-off
level
of each pile
SPL G3.11
of tip of each pile and
Micropiling 178mm dia shall be measured per Linear Meter completed

Engineer.
SPL G3.12
Basis of Payment

shall
be
paid
included
in
the
Bill
of
Quantities.
1. Un-concreted (Empty) Bore
The unit rate of the pile shall be deemed to include whatever empty bore
above the cut- off level of the pile and re-drilling after pre-grouting. No
claims will be considered for any empty bore and re-drilling and the
Contractor shall allow in tender for the cost of these processes due to his
sequence of construction.
2. Pay Length
For all proposed pile the Contractor shall be paid only for the length of
installed pile measured from toe of the pile to the cut-off level. The
same applies for the grout. Pregrouting grout loss over drill re-drilling
will not be paid and shall be deemed included in the rate.
The quantities accepted for
Unit Price. The Contract
payment for providing
incidentals to complete the
payment will be paid for at the Contract

Unit Prices will be full and complete
all design, materials, labor, equipment, and
work.
The Contract Unit Price for Micropiles shall include the Standard load
test, drilling, furnishing, and placing the reinforcing steel and casing,
grouting, and pile top attachments. The Contractor is also responsible
for estimating the grout take. There will be no extra payment for grout
overruns.
Technical
Specifications:
of
Item Number
Description
SPL G3
Micropiling, 178mm dia
SPL G4
SPL G4.1
IX - 192
Unit of Measurement
Linear Meter
Ground Anchor
Description
The work related to this item shall consist of

cement-grouted ground
anchors designed, furnished, installed, tested and stressed as shown on
the Drawings and in accordance with these Specifications.
SPL G4.2
Admixtures: Admixtures which control bleed, improve flowability, reduce

water content and retard set may be used in the grout subject to
the approval of the Engineer. Admixtures if used shall be compatible
with the prestressing steels and mixed in accordance with the
manufacturers recommendations.
Anchorage Covers: Exposed anchorage covers shall be fabricated from
steel or ductile cast iron. The cover shall be securely attached to the
anchorage device or bearing plate. If the cover is to be grease filled,
then the cover must form a permanent watertight enclosure
for the
anchorage device.
Anchorage Devices: Anchorage devices shall be capable of developing 95
percent of the minimum specified ultimate tensile strength of the
prestressing steel tendon.
Bearing Plate: The bearing plate shall be fabricated
conforming to AASHTO M183 or M222 specifications.
from
steel
Bondbreaker: The bondbreaker shall be fabricated from a smooth plastic

tube or pipe having the following properties:
1. Resistant to chemical attack from aggressive environments, grout or grease;
2. Resistant to aging by ultra-violet light;
3. Fabricated from material non-detrimental to the tendon;
4. Capable of withstanding abrasion, impact and bending during
handling and installation;
5. Enable the tendon to elongate during testing and stressing; and
6. Allow the tendon to remain unbonded after the lock-off.
Cement: Type I, II or II Portland cement conforming to AASHTO M85 shall
be
used
for
grout.
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 193
Centralizers: Centralizers shall be fabricated from plastic, steel or material

which
is
non-
detrimental to the prestressing steel. Wood shall not be used. The
centralizer
shall
be
able to support the tendon in the drill hole and position the tendon so a
minimum
of
12mm of grout cover is provided and shall permit grout to freely flow up the
drill hole.
Corrosion Inhibiting Grease: The corrosion inhibiting grease shall
conform
to
the requirements of Specification for unbonded Single
Strand Tendons.
Heat Shrinkable Tubes: Heat shrinkable tubes shall be fabricated
from a radiation crosslinked polyolefin tube internally coated with
an adhesive sealant. Prior to shrinking the tube shall have a nominal
wall thickness of 0.60mm. The adhesive sealant inside the tube shall have
a nominal thickness of 0.50mm.
Prestressing Steel: Ground anchor tendons shall be fabricated from single
or multiple elements of one of the following prestressing steels:
1. Seven-wire, low-relaxation strands conforming to ASTM M203
2. Compact seven-wire, low-relaxation strands conforming to ASTM A-779
Pretressing Steel Couplers: Prestressing steel couplers shall be capable of
developing 95 percent of the minimum specified ultimate tensile strength
of the prestressing steel.
Sheath: A sheath shall be used as part of the corrosion protection
system for the unbonded length portion of the tendon.
Spacers: Spacers shall be used to separate elements of a multi-element
tendon and shall be grout to freely flow up the drill hole. Spacers shall be
fabricated from plastic, steel or material which is non-detrimental to the
prestressing steel. Woods shall not be used. A combination centralizer-
spacer can be used.
Trumpet: The trumpet used to provide a transition from the anchorage to
the
unbonded
length corrosion protection shall be fabricated from a steel pipe or tube
conforming
to
the requirements of ASTM A-53 for pipe or ASTM A-500 for tubing. The
trumpet
shall
have a minimum wall thickness of 3.20mm for diameters up to 100mm
and
5.0
mm
for
larger diameter.
Water:
Water for mixing grout shall be potable.
SPL G4.3
Tendon Fabrication
The tendons can be either shop or field fabricated from prestressing steel
and materials conforming to requirements of the Materials subsection

of this Specification. The tendon shall be fabricated as shown on the
approved Drawings.
Load-carrying Capacity: Unless otherwise directed, the Contractor shall
select
the
type
of tendon to be used. The tendon shall be sized so the design load
does not exceed 60
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 194
percent of the minimum specified ultimate tensile strength of the tendon.

In addition, the tendon shall be sized so the maximum test load does
not exceed 80 percent of the minimum specified ultimate tensile strength
of the tendon.
Bond Length and Tendon Bond Length: The Contractor shall be
responsible for determining the bond length necessary to develop the
design load indicated on the Contract Drawings in accordance with the
Testing subsection of this Specification. The minimum bond length shall be
3.0m in rock and 4.60 m in soil. The minimum tendon length shall be
3.0m.
1. When the Contract Drawings require grout protected ground anchor tendons:
a. Corrosion protection of the tendon bond length shall be
provided
by
cement
grout cover.
b. Spacers shall be used along the tendon bond length of multi-
element tendons to
separate each of the individual elements of the tendon so the
prestressing steel
will bond to the grout. Spacers shall be positioned so their
center to center
spacing does not exceed 3.0m. In addition, the upper spacer shall
be located a
maximum of 1.50 m from the top of the tendon bond length and the
lower spacer
shall be located a maximum of 1.50m from the bottom of the tendon
bond length.
c. Centralizers shall be used to insure a minimum of 13mm of grout
cover over the
tendon bond length. Centralizers shall be positioned so their
center to center
spacing does not exceed 3.0m. In addition, the upper centralizer
shall be located
a maximum of 1.50m from the top of the tendon bond length
and the lower
centralizer shall be located a maximum of 0.305m from the bottom
of the tendon
bond length.
d. Centralizers are not required on pressure-injected ground anchor
tendons if the
ground anchor is installed in coarse-grained soils using grouting
pressures
greater than 150 psi.
e. Centralizers are not required on hollow-stem-augered ground anchor
tendons if
the ground anchor is grouted through the auger and the hole is
maintained full of
a stiff grout during extraction of the auger.
Unbonded Length: The minimum unbonded length of the tendon shall be
4.60m or as indicated on the Contract Drawings.
Total Anchor Length: The total anchor length shall not be less than that
indicated on the Contract Drawings.
Anchorage and Trumpet: Nonrestressable anchorage devices can be used
except where indicated on the Contract Drawings.
Restressable anchorage shall be provided on those ground anchors
designated
as
restressable on the Contract Drawings. The post-tensioning supplier
shall
provide
a
restressable anchorage compatible with the post-tensioning system
provided.
The
supplier shall also provide written recommendations concerning the
restressing
of
the
tendons.
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 195
The trumpet shall be welded to the bearing plate. The trumpet shall
have
an
inside
diameter equal to or larger than the hole in the bearing plate. The trumpet
shall
be
long
enough to accommodate movements of the structure during testing and
stressing.
SPL G4.4
Tendon Storage and Handling
Tendons shall be handled and stored in such a manner as to avoid

damage
or
corrosion.
Damage to the prestressing steel as a result of abrasions, cuts, nicks,
welds
and
weld
splatter will be cause for rejection by the Engineer. The prestressing
steel
shall
be
protected if welding is to be performed in the vicinity. Grounding of welding
leads
to
the
prestressing steel is forbidden. Prestressing steel shall be protected from
dirt,
rust
or
deleterious substances.
A light coating of rust on the steel is acceptable. If heavy corrosion or
pitting is noted, the Engineer shall reject the affected tendons.
The Contractor shall use care in handling and storing the tendons at the
site.
Prior
to
inserting a tendon in the drill hole, the Contractor and the Inspector shall
examine
the
tendon for damage and the sheathing. If, in the opinion of the
Inspector,
the
smooth
sheathing has been damaged, the Contractor shall repair it with ultra
high
molecular
weight polyethylene tape. The tape should be spiral wound around the
tendon
so
as
to
completely seal the damaged area. The pitch of the spiral shall
ensure
a
double
thickness at all points.
SPL G4.5
Installation
Unless otherwise directed, the Contractor shall select drilling method,

the grouting procedure and the grouting pressure used for the installation
of the ground anchor.
Drilling:
Unless otherwise directed, core drilling, rotary drilling,

percussion
drilling,
auger drilling or driven casing can be used. At the ground surface, the
drill
hole
shall
be
located within 0.30m of the location shown on the Contract Drawings.
The
drill
hole
shall be located so the longitudinal axis of the drill hole
and the
longitudinal
axis
of
the
tendon are parallel. In particular, the ground anchor hole shall not
be
drilled
in
a
location that requires the tendon to be bent in order to enable the
bearing
plate
to
be
connected to the supported structure. At the point of entry the ground
anchor
shall
be
0
installed within plus/minus three degrees (3 ) of the inclination from
the
horizontal
shown in the Contract Drawings. At the point of entry the horizontal angle
made
by
the
ground anchor and the structure shall be within plus/minus three degrees
(30)
of
a
line
drawn perpendicular to the plane of the structure unless otherwise
shown
on
the
Contract Drawings. The ground anchors shall not extend beyond the
right-of-way
or
easement limits shown on the Contract Drawings.
Tendon Insertion: The tendon shall be inserted into the drill hole to the
desired
depth
without difficulty. When the tendon cannot be completely inserted, the
Contractor shall
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 196
remove the tendon from the drill hole and clean or redrill the hole to
permit insertion. Partially inserted tendons shall nor be driven or forced into
the hole.
Grouting: The Contractor shall use a neat cement grout or a sand-
cement grout. The cement shall not contain lumps or other indications of
hydration. Admixtures, if used, shall be mixed in accordance with the
manufacturers recommendations.
The grouting equipment shall produce a grout free of lumps and
undispersed cement. A positive displacement grout pump shall be used.
The pump shall be equipped with a pressure gauge to monitor grout
pressures. The pressure gauge shall be capable of measuring pressures
of at least 150 psi or twice the actual grout pressures used by the
Contractor whichever is greater. The grouting equipment shall be sized to
enable the grout to be pumped in one continuous operation. The
mixer should be capable of continuously agitating the grout.
The grout shall be injected from the lowest point of the drill hole. The
grout maybe pumped through grout tubes, casing, hollow-stem-augers or drill
rods. The grout can be placed before or after insertion of the tendon. The
quantity of the grout and the grout pressures shall be recorded. The
grout pressures and grout takes shall be controlled to prevent excessive
heave or fracturing.
Except where indicated below, the grout above the top of the bond length
may
be
placed
at the same time as the bond length grout but it shall not be placed under
pressure.
The
grout at the top of the drill hole shall not contact the back of the structure
or
the
bottom
of the trumpet.
If the ground anchor is installed in a fine-grained soil using drill holes
larger
than
150mm in diameter, then the grout above the top of the bond length
shall
be
placed
after the ground anchor has been tested and stressed. The Engineer
will
allow
the
Contractor to grout the entire drill hole at the same time if the
Contractor
can
demonstrate that his particular ground anchor system does not
derive
a
significant
portion of its load-carrying capacity from the soil above the bond length
portion
of
the
ground anchor.
Upon completion of grouting, the grout tube may remain in the hole but it
shall be filled with grout.
After grouting, the tendons shall not be loaded for a minimum of three (3) days.
Installation
of
Trumpet and
surrounding
Anchorage:
The
corrosion
the
protection
unbonded length of the tendon shall extend up beyond the bottom seal of
the
trumpet.
If
the protection does not extend beyond the seal or sufficiently far
enough
into
the
trumpet, the Contractor shall extend the corrosion protection to prevent
contact.
The
corrosion protection surrounding the unbonded length of

tendon
shall
not
contact the bearing plate or the anchor head during testing
stressing. If the
Technical
Specifications:
of
the
and
protection is too long, the

protection to prevent contact.
IX - 197
Contractor
shall
trim
the
corrosion
The bearing plate and anchor head shall be placed so the axis of
the tendon is perpendicular to the bearing plate within plus/minus three
degrees (30) and the axis of the tendon shall pass through the center of
the bearing plate.
The trumpet shall be completely filled with corrosion inhibiting
grease or grout. Trumpet grease can be placed any time during
construction. Trumpet grout shall be placed after the ground anchor
has been tested and stressed. The Contractor shall demonstrate to
the Engineer that the procedures selected by the Contractor for
placement of either grease or grout will produce a completely filled
trumpet.
All
anchorage permanently exposed to the atmosphere shall be

covered
with
a
corrosion
inhibiting
grease-filled
cover.
The
Contractor
shall
demonstrate
to
the
Engineer that the procedures selected by the Contractor for placement of
either
grease
or grout will produce a completely filled cover. If the Contract
Drawings
require
restressable anchorages, corrosion inhibiting grease must be used to fill
the
anchorage
cover.
SPL G4.6
Testing and Stressing
Each ground anchor shall be tested. No load greater than ten percent of
the design load can be applied to the ground anchor prior to testing.
The maximum test load shall not exceed 80 percent of the minimum
specified ultimate tensile strength of the tendon. The test load shall be
simultaneously applied to the entire tendon. Stressing of single
elements of multi-element tendons shall not be permitted.
The testing equipment shall consist of:
1. A dial gauge or vernier scale capable of measuring to 0.25 mm shall be
used
to
measure the ground anchor movement. The movement-measuring
device shall have a minimum travel equal to the theoretical elastic
elongation of the total anchor length at the maximum test load
and it shall have adequate travel so the ground anchor movement can
be measured without resetting the device.
2. A hydraulic jack and pump shall be used to apply the test load. The
jack and pressure
gauge shall be used to measure the applied load. The jack and
pressure gauge shall
be calibrated by an independent firm as a unit. The calibration
shall have been
performed within forty-five (45) working days of the date submitted.
Testing cannot
commence until the Engineer has approved the calibration. The
pressure gauge shall
be graduated in 100-psi increments or less. The ram travel of the jack hall
not be less
than the theoretical elastic elongation of the total anchor length at the
maximum test
load.
3. A calibrated reference pressure gauge shall also be kept at the site.
The
reference
gauge shall be calibrated with the test jack and pressure gauge.
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 198
4. The Contractor shall provide an electrical resistance load cell and

readout
to
be
used
when performing a creep test.
5. The stressing equipment shall be placed over the ground anchor
tendon in such a
manner that the jack, bearing plates, load cells and stressing
anchorage are axially
aligned with the tendon and the tendon is centered within the equipment.
Performance Test: Five percent (5%) of the ground anchors or a minimum
of three (3) ground anchors, whichever is greater, shall be performance
tested in accordance with the following procedures. The Engineer
shall select the ground anchors to be performance tested. The
remaining ground anchors shall be tested in accordance with the proof
test procedures.
The performance test shall be made by incrementally loading and
unloading
the
ground
anchor in accordance with the following schedule. The load shall be
raised
from
one
increment to another immediately after recording the ground anchor
movement.
The
ground anchor movement shall be measured and recorded to the
nearest
0.025
mm
with respect to an independent fixed reference point at the alignment
load
and
at
each
increment of load. The load shall be monitored with a pressure gauge.
The
reference
pressure gauge shall be placed in series with the pressure gauge
during
each
performance test. If the load determined by the pressure gauge differ
more
than
ten
percent (10%), the jack, pressure gauge and reference pressure
gauge
shall
be
recalibrated at no expense to the Owner. At load increments other than
the
maximum
test load, the load shall be held just long enough to obtain the movement
reading.
PERFORMANCE TEST SCHEDULE
Load
AL
0.25DL*
AL
0.25DL
0.50DL*
AL
0.25DL
0.50DL
0.75DL*
AL
Load
AL
0.25DL
0.50DL
0.75DL
1.00DL
1.20DL*
AL
0.25DL
0.50DL
0.75DL
0.25DL
0.50DL
0.75DL
1.00DL*
1.00DL
1.20DL
1.33DL*
Reduce to lock-off load
Where: AL - is the alignment load

Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 199
DL - is the ground anchor design load

The maximum test load in a performance test shall be held for ten (10)
minutes. The jack shall be repumped as necessary in order to maintain a
constant load. The load-hold period shall start as soon as the maximum
test load is applied and the ground anchor movement, with respect to
a fixed reference, shall be measured and recorded at 1minute, 2, 3,
4, 5, 6 and 10 minutes. If the ground anchor movement between one
(1) minute and ten (10) minutes exceeds 1.0 mm, the maximum test
load shall be held for an additional 50 minutes. If the load hold is
extended, the ground anchor movement shall be recorded at 15 minutes,
20, 25, 30, 45 and 60 minutes.
The Contractor shall plot the ground anchor movement versus load
for
each
load
increment marked with an asterisk (*) in the performance test schedule
and
plot
the
residual movement of the tendon at each alignment load versus the
highest
previously
applied load.
Proof
Test: The proof test shall be performed by incrementally

loading
the
ground
anchor in accordance with the following schedule. The load shall be
raised
from
one
increment to another immediately after recording the ground anchor
movement.
The
ground anchor movement shall be measured and recorded to the
nearest
0.025
mm
with respect to an independent fixed reference point at the alignment
load
and
at
each
increment of load. The load shall be monitored with a pressure
gauge.
At
load
increments other than the maximum test load, the load shall be held just
long
enough
to
obtain the movement reading.
The maximum test load in a proof test shall be held for ten (10)
minutes.
The
jack
shall
be repumped as necessary in order to maintain a constant load. The
load-hold
period
shall start as soon as the maximum test load is applied and the
ground anchor
movement
with respect to a fixed reference shall be measured
and
recorded at 1 minute, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 10 minutes. If the ground
anchor movement between one (1) minute and ten (10) minutes exceeds
1.0 mm, the maximum test load shall be held for an additional 50
minutes. If the load hold is extended, the ground anchor movements shall
be recorded at 15 minutes, 20, 25, 30, 45 and 60 minutes.
PROOF TEST SCHEDULE
Load
Load
AL
1.00DL
0.25DL
1.20DL
0.50DL
1.33DL
0.75DL
Reduce to lock-off load
Where: AL - is the alignment load

DL - is the ground anchor design load
The Contractor shall plot the ground anchor movement versus load
for each load increment in the proof test.
Creep Test: The Owner shall determine if creep testing is required and
select those ground anchors that are to be creep tested.
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 200
The creep test shall be made by incrementally loading and unloading the
ground
anchor
in accordance with the performance test schedule given above. At
the
end
of
each
loading cycle, the load shall be held constant for the observation period,
the
load
shall
be held constant for the observation period indicated in the creep test
schedule
below.
The times for reading and recording the ground anchor movement
during
each
observation period shall be 1 minute, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 15, 20, 25, 39, 45,
60,
75,
90,
100,
120, 150, 180, 210, 240, 270 and 300 minutes as appropriate. Each
load-hold
period
shall start as soon
as the test load is applied. In a creep test, the
pressure
gauge
and
reference pressure gauge will be used to measure the applied load and
the
load
cell
will
be used to monitor small changes in load during a constant load-hold
period.
The
jack
shall be repumped as necessary in order to maintain a constant load.
The
Contractor shall plot the ground anchor movement and the

residual
movement
measured in a creep test as described for the performance test above.
The
Contractor
shall also plot the creep movement for each load hold as a function of
logarithm of time.
CREEP TEST SCHEDULE
Load
Observation Period (min)
AL
0.25DL
10
0.50DL
30
0.75DL
30
1.00DL
45
1.20DL
60
1.33DL
300
Ground Anchor Load Test Acceptance Criteria: A performance or proof-
tested ground anchor with a ten (10) minute load-hold is acceptable if:
1. Ground anchor carries the maximum test load with less than 1.0mm
of
movement
between one (1) minute and ten (10) minutes; and
2. Total movement at the maximum test load exceeds 80 percent of
the
theoretical
elastic elongation of the unbonded length.
A performance- or proof tested ground anchor with a 60-minute load hold is
acceptable
if the:
1. Ground anchor carries the maximum test load with a creep rate that does not
exceed
2.0mm/log cycle of time; and
2. Total movement at the maximum test load exceeds 80 percent of
the
theoretical
elastic elongation of the unbonded length.
If the total movement of the ground anchors at the maximum test load does not
exceed
80 percent of the theoretical elastic elongation of the unbonded length,
the Contractor shall replace the ground anchor at no additional cost to the
Owner.
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 201
Ground anchors which have a creep

greater than 2.0mm/log cycle
of time can be incorporated in the finished work at a load equal to one
half its failure load. The failure load is the load carried by the ground
anchor after the load has been allowed to stabilize for ten (10) minutes.
When
ground anchors fails, the Contractor may modify the

design
and/or
the
construction procedures. These modifications may include, but are
not
limited
to
installing replacement ground anchors, reducing the design load by
increasing
the
number of ground anchors, modifying the installation methods,
increasing
the
bond
length or changing the ground anchor type. Any modification which
requires
changes
to
the structure must have prior approval by the Engineer. Any modifications
of
design
or
construction procedures shall be at no change in the contract price or
contract time.
Retesting of the ground anchor shall not be allowed.
Lock Off: Upon completion of the test, the load shall be reduced to the
lock-off
load
indicated
on
the
Contract
Drawings
and
transferred
to
the
anchorage
device.
The
ground anchor may
be completely unloaded prior to lock off. After
transferring
the
load
and prior to removing the jack, a lift-off reading shall be made. The lift off
reading
shall
be within ten (10) percent of the specified lock off load. If the load is not
within
ten
(10)
percent of the specified lock off load, the anchorage shall be reset and
another
lift
off
reading shall be made. This process shall be repeated until the desired
lock
off
load
is
obtained.
SPL G4.7
Ground Anchores shall be measured per Set completed in

accordance with the Drawings, Specifications and as accepted by the
Engineer. For ground anchors that do not meet the acceptance
criteria, the original ground anchor and any required additional work
or ground anchors shall be, in sum, considered to be one ground anchor
for payment purposes. The quantity of performance and creep tests to
be paid for will be the number of tests performed. In case a creep test is
to be performed, this item shall be charge to provisional amount.
The quantified items, installed in place shall be the basis of payment,
based from the unit bid price for which prices and payments shall
constitute full compensation including labor, materials and incidentals
necessary to complete this item.
SPL G4.8
Basis of Payment

shall
be
paid
included
in
the
Bill
of
Quantities.
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 202

Pay Item
Description
SPL G4
Ground Anchor
SPL G5
Soil Nailing
SPL G5.1
Description
Unit of Measurement
Set
The work related to this item shall consist of furnishing, installing and
testing the soil nailing in accordance with details shown in the Drawings
and these Specifications or as directed by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall inspect the site, study soil investigation results and
design details before preparation and submission of the method statement
to
the
Engineer
for
prior approval (at least 7 days) before the
commencement of works.
The Contractor shall be fully responsible to provide all necessary and
suitable resources and materials to complete all the soil nails strictly
according to this specification. The Contractor shall install the trial or
preliminary soils nails and carry out the verification pull-out test at
locations selected by the Engineer.
SPL G5.2
SPL G5.2.1
General Requirements
Setting Out
Setting out shall be as shown in the drawings or as directed by

the Engineer. Immediately before drilling or installation of soil nail, the
nail head position shall be marked with suitable identifiable pegs or
markers on the slope/wall for necessary inspection by the Engineer.
SPL G5.2.2
Position
The maximum allowable deviation for drill hole entry point shall not
exceed 75 mm in any direction.
SPL G5.2.3
Alignment of Nail
The drilling machine shall be attached with suitable alignment control

devise set to attain the finished nail direction or inclination shown
on the drawings and the maximum permitted deviation of alignment
shall not exceed 1 in 20. Deviation from straight shall not exceed 20 mm
in any 3 m length of drill hole.
SPL G5.2.4
Nail Out of Position or Alignment
Technical
Specifications:
of
The Contractor shall demonstrate to

alignment of soil nails is within the
found out of the tolerable position or
Engineer shall order to add additional
SPL G5.2.5
IX - 203
the Engineer that the position and

tolerance limits specified. Any nail
alignment shall be rejected and the
nails at the Contractor's own costs.
Submittals
The Contractor shall keep records for each soil nail installation and shall
submit
one
signed copy to the Engineer not later than noon of the next working day
after
the
soil
nails have been installed. The record for each soil nail shall include soil
nail
reference
number, date/time of commencement and completion of drilling and
grouting,
names
of
supervisor and operators, plus the necessary drilling and grouting details,
etc.
Format and details of record and layout of nail shall be approved by the Engineer.
SPL G5.3
SPL G5.3.1
Reinforcement
Reinforcement for soil nails shall be high yield steel reinforcing bars
threaded and hot- dip galvanized with minimum coat thickness of 85
microns or 610 gm per meter square surface and or the reinforcement
bars shall be pre-grouted as shown on drawings. The nail bars shall be
threaded at the ends for a sufficient length (minimum 150 mm long) to
facilitate fixing of galvanized washer, overlap locking washer and nut at
the exposed end and fixing of galvanized coupler at the other end, if
required.
The tensile strength and galvanized rebar quality of the coupled nail bar
shall be not less than 410 N/mm2 or specified on drawings.
Only soil nails of more than 12 m long shall have rebars spliced or
coupled.
The
tensile
strength of the coupler shall be capable to develop at least 95 % of the
tensile
strength
of the rebar as tested and certified by the manufacturer. Test certificates
from
reputable
laboratory or accredited laboratory approved by the Engineer to show
compliance
of
the specification shall be submitted to the Engineer for verification and
approval.
SPL G5.3.2
Cement Grout
Cement for grouting shall be Ordinary Portland Cement complying with

AASHTO M 85, Type I, II, III, ov IV.
Grout shall consist of cement and water. Water cement ratio shall be 0.45
to
0.50
and
minimum cube strength of 7-day strength and 28-day strength shall be 20
MPa
and
30
MPa
respectively. Sand shall not be used unless approved by the

Engineer.
Suitable
admixtures shall be used to improve flow-ability and bleeding or
shrinkage
problem.
Grout shall be thoroughly mixed by suitable high speed colloidal mixer
(>
1000
rpm)
until a homogeneous grout free from un-dispersed cement, free
from
lumps
and
bleeding is obtained. The grout after mixing for a few minutes shall
be transferred
Technical
Specifications:
of
through a 5 mm sieve to
attached with paddle agitator.
IX - 204
remove
lumps
into
storage
tank
The following quality control tests shall be carried performed:

1. Crushing strength of 100 mm cubes at 7-days and 28-days shall be minimum 20
and
30 MPa respectively.
2. Bleeding test (<0.5 % by volume 3 hours after mixing or 2 %
(maximum) when
measured at 20 degree C in a covered glass cylinder of 100 mm
diameter and with a
grout depth of 100 mm. In addition, the water shall be re-absorbed
within 24 hours.
Free expansion shall not exceed 10 %.
3.
Flow cone efflux time test (<15 seconds, ASTM C939-87).
If any of the above results falls below the acceptable limits, at least
one or 1 % of grouted working nails whichever is greater shall be
subject to pull-out test
at the Contractor own cost.SPL G6.3.3
Centralizers
Centralizers shall be tightly fixed to the rebar at the spacing as shown
on
the
drawings.
The centralizers shall be firm and as small as possible (not more than 50
%
of
the
nail
section) so blockage of grout flow is kept to a minimum. Centralizers
shall
be
fixed
inside and outside of the protective sheath, if applicable, and shall be spaced
at
not
more
than 2m. Centralizers shall be sized to position the rebar within 25 mm
of
the
center
of
the drill holes; sized to allow tremie pipe (about 30 mm diameter)
insertion
to
the
bottom of the drill hole.
SPL G5.3.4
Corrugated HDPE Sheath
The size, shape and length of the sheath to protect the rebar shall be as
shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer. The sheath shall
consist of HDPE (high density polyethylene) with a wall thickness not less
than 1.0 mm and shall provide at least 5 mm of grout cover over the
nail rebar within the sheath. The thickness of grout between the HDPE
sheath and the sides of drill hole shall be not less than 25 mm.
SPL G5.3.5
Materials Handling and Storage
Cement shall be stored properly to prevent moisture degradation and

partial
hydration.
Cement that has been caked and lumpy shall be rejected and discard.
Rebars
shall
be
stored on firm supports to prevent the steel from contacting the ground.
Damage
to
the
rebar as a result of abrasion, cuts, nicks, welds and weld splatter shall
be
cause
for
rejection. Rebars shall be protected from dirt, rust and other
deleterious
substances
prior to installation. Heavy corrosion or pitting of rebars shall be cause
for
rejection.
Anchorage end of rebars to which bearing plate and nuts will be
attached
shall
be
protected by some protective wrap during handling, installation, grouting and
guniting.
Pregrouted rebars in HDPE sheaths shall not be moved or transported
until
the
grout
has reached sufficient strength to resist damage during handling. The
pregrouted
rebars
shall be handled with care and with sufficient supports to prevent
large deflections,
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 205
distortions or damage. Conditions of the pregrouted rebars shall be

checked first before inserting into the drill holes. Damaged pregrouted
rebars shall be rejected.
SPL G5.3.6
Drilling
The Contractor shall deploy suitable drilling machine and tools plus
skilled operator and supervisor that have adequate capacity and
experience to produce the drill hole according to the size, length and
accuracy as shown in the drawings and as specified in this specification.
Unless
otherwise directed or approved by the Engineer, only dry

rotary
percussion
method by top hammer or down-the-hole hammer shall be used. Suitable
drill
bit
of
not
less than 100 mm diameter shall be used. In ground likely to collapse,
the
drilled
shaft
shall be protected by suitable casing. Drill holes shall be flushed clean on
completion
of
drilling and the opening protected or sealed to prevent entry of water
or
any
foreign
matter.
Drilling
for
the entire design nail length shall be carried out

uninterrupted
and
completed with necessary hole cleansing within one hour. To ensure
reliable
and
effective cleansing of the drill holes, an additional drilled length of about
0.6
m
to
the
design length shall be provided so that cleansing of cuttings and debris
towards
the
bottom of the drill holes by the compressed air through the drill rods can
be
effectively
and eventually carried out. All drill rods shall be at least N size and can
be
properly
jointed without leakage. Alignment of drill hole shall not deviate more than
20
mm
in
3
m in any direction. At least 1 % of the drilled holes shall be selected for
straightness
test
by inserting 100mm diameter tube to the designed length. Drilled holes
that
cannot
pass the test shall be redrilled and the suitability of the drilling machine be
reassessed.
Adequate
temporary or permanent site drainage or temporary

tarpaulin
shall
be
provided to prevent infiltration from surface run-off into the slope where
soil
nailing
is
carried out.
SPL G5.3.7
Inserting Reinforcement
The galvanized rebar fixed with centralizers as shown on the drawing

shall be checked before inserting into the drill hole. The rebar shall be
carried by experienced workers at spacing not greater than 3 m.
After inserting about 75 % of the total design length, the rebar shall be
withdrawn to check the conditions of the centralizers and contamination of
rebar. Such pull-out check shall be carried out on at least 1 % of the
nails especially for those drill holes that have been left for more than 2
hours after completion of drilling. If collapse of drill hole is suspected,
redrilling and flushing shall be carried out as directed by Engineer.
Damaged centralizers shall be replaced immediately and rechecked.
SPL G5.3.8
Grouting
Grout
mix shall be prepared and tested according to Subsection SPL

12.3.2.
Layout
of
machine plus the capacity, etc, shall be as shown in method statement and
approved by
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 206
the
Engineer before mobilization. Grout shall be pumped into its final

position
in
drill
hole through a grouting tube of about 25 mm diameter by tremie
method
under
gravity
or low pressure (< 5 bars) as soon as possible/immediately after the
completion
of
hole
drilling and is not more than 30 minutes after mixing. Grouting shall be
carried
out
within two hours after drilling and cleansing of drill hole are completed.
Grouting
shall
be carried out promptly and continuously in one operation without
interruption
to
avoid any disturbance caused by sedimentation within the grout and
to
reduce
air
bubble entrapment. Full operation shall continue until injected grout
of
the
same
composition and consistency as that mixed emerges from the drill hole
outlet
for
at
least
one minute. Failure to comply with these requirements may result in
either
the
works
being rejected or re-cleansing plus proof pull-out test at the Contractor's own
costs.
SPL G5.3.9
Nail Head Construction
All the disturbed, loose or soft soil around nail head shall be removed
and replaced by non-shrink mortar of grade 30 strength or approved
equivalent by the Engineer.
Nail head with steel plate shall be in a plane normal to the nail axis
clamped down with galvanized nut and washers to a minimum clamping
force of 5 kN or as shown in the Drawings, using a calibrated torque
wrench. Clamping shall be carried out with a thin layer (< 25 mm) of
fresh non shrink mortar (grade 30) behind the steel plate to ensure
proper seating. Nail head construction shall only be carried out after the
grout and the mortar have reached at least 7-days strength (> 20 MPa).
SPL G5.3.10 Pull-out Tests
The
Contractor shall provide all necessary resources including all

torque
wrenches,
jacks, gauges, reaction frame, pump, load cell, bearing plates, and
other
equipment
required to carry out the pull-out test of the soil nails specified.
Measurement
of
nail
head movement shall be at least by 2 dial gauges capable of measuring
to
0.025
mm
accuracy.
The Contractor shall also present up-to-date test (not more than 1
year old) and calibration certificates to the Engineer for the equipment
that are proposed for testing the Engineer for approval before the test
commences. Method statement and layout of pull-out test as specified in
Section SPL G6.2.1 shall also be submitted. The location of soil nail to be
tested shall be selected by the Engineer.
Purpose
of pull-out test up to 2.0 times the design pull-out

resistance/load
or
as
specified on drawings is to verify the designed pull-out resistance or
designed
bond
strength between the grout and the soil/rock and also to verify the
adequacy
and
suitability
of
drilling,
installation
and
grouting
techniques.
The
design/allowable
pull-
out resistance, Qd (kN/m) shall be as shown on the drawing or
determined
by
the
Engineer at site.
Pull-out test shall be carried out at least 72 hours after grouting or at least
the
specified
7-days strength (> 20 MPa). Testing equipment including dial gauges,
gauge
supports,
jack and pressure gauge, load cell, etc., shall be sufficient rigid and
shall be protected
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 207
from sunlight and rain. The complete jacking system including hydraulic
jack,
pump,
and pressure gauge should be calibrated as a single unit before use to an
accuracy
of
not
less than 5 % of the applied load. The center and bearing plates of the
jack
system
shall
be properly arranged so that the test nail will not carry the weight
of
the
testing
equipment. The gauge used to measure the nail head movement shall be
aligned
parallel
with the axis of the nail and the support of the gauges shall be
independent
from
the
jack and the reaction frame. Load cell is important to maintain
constant
load
hold
during the creep test load hold increment. The jack and pressure gauges
shall
have
a
pressure range not exceeding twice the anticipated maximum test
pressure.
Jack
ram
travel shall be sufficient to allow the test to be done without resetting the
equipment.
At least 2 preliminary pull-out tests or verification or sacrificial tests up to
2.0 times the design pull-out resistance, Qd or as specified on
drawing shall be carried out for different soil/rock unit or for
different drilling/grouting method for each nailed slope/hill or as
specified and directed by the Engineer.
For the soil nails selected for pull-out test, the temporary unbonded
length
(Lu)
of
the
test nail shall be at least 1 m, i.e. the bonded length (Lb) of the soil nail
selected
for
pull-
out test shall be Lb = L - Lu, where L = total soil nail length. To prevent
collapse
of
the
unbonded drill hole during the test, a temporary GI pipe of about 1 m
long
near
the
slope surface shall be installed. In case the drill hole is fully grouted, a GI
pipe
of
about
at least 600 mm long and slightly larger than the grouted hole shall be
driven
to
ensure
the reaction force is not transmitting to the grouted hole near the slope
surface.
Lb
shall
be at least 3 m.
Table G5.3.11 - loading schedule for verification test
Load
(5%
0.25
0.50
0.75
1.00
1.25
1.50
1.75
Holding Time (minimum)

DTL), alignment load
DTL
DTL
DTL
DTL
DTL
DTL (Creep Test)
DTL
1 minutes
10 minutes
10 minutes
10 minutes
10 minutes
10 minutes
60 minutes
10 minutes
2.00 DTL (Max test Load)
10 minutes
DTL
= Design Test Load (kN) = Lb
x Qd
Lb = Pull-out test bonded length.
Lb = design nail length - unbonded
length
Lb shall not exceed 0.9fy As / 2.0 Qd, where fy and As are yield stress and area of
rebar
respectively. Qd = /a x pd
= Design allowable pull-out resistance (kN/m) specified in the
Drawing or by the Designer. /a = design allowable bond stress (kN/m2), d
= diameter of nail in m.
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 208
The alignment load shall be the minimum load required to align the
alignment
load
has
been applied. At least 2 calibrated dial gauges of 0.025 mm accuracy
shall
be
used
to
measure nail head movement. Each load increment shall be held for at
least
10
minutes.
Nail movement at creep test (1.50 DTL) shall be taken at 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 10,
20, 30, 50 and
60 minutes. The load during the creep test shall be maintained
within 2 % of the intended load by use of a calibrated load cell.
For working pull-out tests or proof tests, the testing procedure including
creep test is similar to verification test except that the max test load (MTL) =
1.5 x DTL.
A pull-out test is deemed satisfactory
following
criteria
met :
and acceptable when all the

are
1. For verification tests, a total creep movement less than 2 mm between the 6
and 60
minute readings measured during the creep test and the creep
rate is linear or decreasing throughout the creep test load hold
period.
2. For proof tests, total creep movement less than 1 mm is measured
between the 1
and 10 minute readings or creep movement less than 2 mm during
the 60 minute
readings and the creep rate is linear or decreasing throughout the
creep test load
hold period.
3. The total measured movement at the maximum test load (MTL)
exceeds 80% of
theoretical elastic elongation (le) of the test nail unbounded length (le
= 0.8P (Lu)
(106)/ As E, where P = max applied load (kN), Lu = length from the
back of nail to
jack connection to the top of the bond (m), As = rebar cross-sectional
area (mm2)
and E = rebar's modulus =200,000 MPa).
4. A pull-out failure does not occur at the maximum test load. Pull-out
failure is defined
as the load at which attempts to further increase the test load
simply result in
continued pull-out movement of the test nail.
The Contractor shall submit the results of pull-out tests to the
Engineer
for
final interpretation
and
necessary
design
review
immediately after the test. Full formal report of pull-out test including
all plotting, method statement, test length, photos, test certificates, etc.
shall be submitted to the Engineer within 1 week after the test.
For
verification
test
nails,
the
Engineer
shall
evaluate
the
results and
make necessary design review after consultation with the designer.

Installation methods that do not satisfy the nail testing requirements
shall be rejected and replacement test nails shall be installed and tested
at no additional cost.
SPL G5.4
Soil Nailing
accordance
Engineer.
SPL G5.5
shall
with
be measured per Linear Meter completed in

the Drawings, Specifications and as accepted by the
Basis of Payment
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 209
The accepted quantities as measured in Method of Measurement or shall

be
paid
for
at
the Contract unit price at the Pay Item listed below that is included
in
the
Bill
of
Quantities.
Payment
labour,
shall
be full compensation for Soil Nailing including all

material,
testing,
equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the
work
under
this
Item.
Pay Item
SPL G5
Description
Unit of Measurement
Soil Nailing
Technical
Specifications:
Linear Meter
of
PART H
IX - 210
MISCELLANEOUS STRUCTURES
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
ITEM 601 SP
601.5
Sidewalk
Basis of Payment

Pay Item
Description
601(1)a
Concrete Sidewalk, 100mm thk
ITEM 602 SP
Monuments, Markers and Guide Posts
602.5
Unit of Measure
Square Meter
Basis of Payment
Add the following:

Pay Item
Description
602(2)
602(3)
Maintenance Marker Post

Kilometer Post
ITEM 603 SP
Guardrail
Unit of Measurement
Each
Each
Add the following to the provisions of the Standard Specifications.

603.1
Description

This work shall also include fabrication, installation and painting of metal
pipe guardrail as specified in the drawings.
603.2 Material Requirements
Add the following after the 8th paragraph:
Steel frame for metal pipe guardrail shall be galvanized iron pipe
schedule 40 of 2 diameter with square bar metal studs of thickness as
shown on the drawings.
Technical
Specifications:
of
603.4
IX - 211
Basis of Payment
Delete the table under the second paragraph and replace with the following:
Pay Item
Description
603(3)a
603(3)b
603(5)
Metal Guardrail (Metal Beam) Including Post

Metal Beam End Pieces
Metal Pipe Guardrail
ITEM 612 SP
Form)
612.1
Unit of Measurement
Linear Meter
Each
Linear Meter
Reflective Thermoplastic Stripping Materials (Solid
Description
Add the following paragraph to this Subsection:

The traffic road markings shall be white and
Stripping Material conforming to AASHTO M-249-74.
612.2
Add
yellow
Thermoplastic
the
following
at
the
end
of
this
Subsection Characteristics:
1. Appearance in Container - in powder or blocks.
Condition
Upon Application - shall be in molten state heated to a

temperature
of
211
degrees Celsius with a tolerance of 7.0 degrees Celsius (12.5 degrees
Fahrenheit)
either
way.
Drying Time:
Set to bear traffic when applied at air temperature
Celsius (50 degrees Fahrenheit) - 2 minutes max.
of
10
Bond strength to Asphalt Concrete Pavement - 180 psi (1.2

MPa) minimum. Impact Resistance - 10 inch. Lbs. minimum.
Technical
Specifications:
of
degrees
IX - 212
Softening Point - 102.5 degrees Celsius with a

degrees Celsius (15 degrees Fahrenheit) either way.
tolerance
of
9.5
Specific Gravity - 2.15 maximum

Thermoplastic materials shall not exude fumes which are toxic, obnoxious
or injurious to persons or property when it is heated during application.
Application of additional beads by drop-on method shall be at the rate
specified by the Engineer and agreed upon by the applicator/supplier.
Primer shall be used when marking a smooth surface of concrete. Rate
of application of primer shall be at minimum of 2 grams per sq.meter.
Composition of Thermoplastic Materials
Components
White
Yellow
Binder, %
Glass Bead, %
Titanium Dioxide, %
Calcium Carbonate and
Inert Filler, %
15.0 min.
15.0 min.
8.0 min.
15.0 min.
15.0 min.
-
55.0-75.0**
Glass Beads (Premix)

1. Refractive Index - 1.5 minimum
2. Spheres, %-90.0 minimum
a. Passive Sieve #40 (0.425 mm) 95.0 min.
b. Passive Sieve #70 (0.212 mm) 15.0 min.
Thickness of Marking - 1.5 minimum
Temperature upon application is variable and shall depend on the property
of
thermoplastic material used.
Amount and type of yellow pigment, calcium carbonate and inert fillers
shall be at the option of the manufacturer provided all other
specifications are met.
612.9
Basis of Payment
Add the following:

Pay Item
Description
Technical
Specifications:
Unit of Measurement
of
612(1)
612(2)
IX - 213
Reflectorized Thermoplastic Pavement

Markings (White)
Reflectorized Thermoplastic Pavement
Markings (Yellow)
Technical
Specifications:
Square Meter
Square Meter
of
IX - 214
SPL H1
Landscaping
SPL H1.1
Description
The work related to this item shall consist of furnishing landscaping, sod,
plants and concrete marker with brass plate as shown in the drawings as
required by the Engineer. This also includes the furnishing and
planting deciduous shade, flowering trees, ornamental plants in pots
and in the arrangements approved by the Engineer.
SPL H1.2
Sod shall conform to the applicable requirements of Item 610, Sodding.

Plants furnished shall conform to the applicable provisions of Item 611,
Tree Planting. Sod, Plants and Concrete marker shall be the type and
details shown on the Drawings. Brass plate shall be of the kind and size
as shown on the Drawings.
SPL H1.3
Construction methods and other requirements shall conform to the

requirements of Item 610, Sodding and Item 611, Tree Planting.
Install concrete markers with brass plates as shown on the drawings
and as required by the Engineer.
SPL H1.4
Maintenance
Maintain sod and landscape plantings including watering for a minimum

of 3 months after acceptance by the Engineer. Replace all plants
and sod which has not been properly maintained.
SPL H1.5
The work associated with Landscaping shall be measured as a Lump

Sum completed in accordance with the Drawings, Specifications and as
SPL H1.6
Basis of Payment

shall
be
paid
included
in
the
Bill
of
Quantities.
Payment shall be full compensation for the work related to Landscaping
including all materials, labour, equipment, tools watering, maintenance and
incidentals necessary to complete the work.
Technical
Specifications:
of
Technical
Specifications:
IX - 215
of
IX - 216

Pay Item
Description
SPL H1
Landscaping
SPL H2
Seeding
SPL H2.1
Description
Unit of Measurement
Lump Sum
The work related to this item shall consist of seeding disturbed areas
along
the
roadway
shoulders and/or embankments as indicated on the drawings or as
directed
by
the
Engineer.
SPL H2.2
Seed
Mixture:
Shall
be
fast
growing
native
legominous
creeping/twining grass cover free from weeds and invasive species.
Fertilizer: Commercial grade 10-10-10 fertilizer
Ground Limestone: Ground limestone shall contain not less than 85
percent of calcium and magnesium caronates and shall be of such
fineness that 100 percent shall pass through a 2.00 mm sieve and not
less than 35 percent through a 0.150 mm sieve.
SPL H2.3
Preparation of Topsoil
1. Prepare topsoil to eliminate uneven areas and/or low spots. Blend

slopes
into
level
areas. Rake until smooth.
2. Remove
foreign materials,
roots.
contaminated soil.
weeds
and
undesirable
Remove
plants
and
in
accordance
with
the
3. Scarify soil to a depth of 50 mm.

SPL H2.4
Fertilizing and Seeding
1. Apply
fertilizer
Manufacturers
recommendations.
and
limestone
2. The rate of seed applied shall be determined by the Contractor

to
adequately
establish growth to stabilize the soil.
3. The
use of a
approved
Engineer.
hydroseeder
with
hydromulch
by
may
be
permitted
the
as
SPL H2.5
Watering and Maintenance
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 217
The Contractor shall regularly water seeded areas to establish growth

and maintain seeded areas until acceptance by the Engineer.
SPL H2.6
Seeding shall be measured per Square Meter completed in

accordance with the Drawings, Specifiations, and as accepted by the
Engineer.
SPL H2.7
Basis of Payment

shall
be
paid
included
in
the
Bill
of
Quantities.
Payment shall be full compensation for the work related to Seeding including
all
materials labour, equipment, tools, watering, maintenance and incidentals
necessary to complete the work under this Item.
Pay Item
Description
SPL H2
Seeding
SPL H3
Street Lighting (Electrical Works)
SPL H3.1
Description
Unit of Measurement
Square Meter
The work related to this item shall consist of furnishing and installing
the electrical system as required by the Drawings and in accordance
with these Specifications. The work shall include the following:
1.
Electrical services including all conduits, junction boxes, fittings, and
wiring
from
the
Local Electric Cooperative supply and meter to the lighting panel
boards.
Lighting and contactor panel
Complete street lighting
luminaires Steel poles and
foundations
Timer Switch
Grounding system
SPL H3.2
SPL H3.2.1
General Material Requirements
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 218
General: All materials and equipment to be used and to be installed

hereunder shall be new of the approved type bearing the stamp of
approval of any known International Standard (UL, etc.) or Philippine
Standard (PS).
Fungus Control: No substitute will be accepted, unless the materials
and equipment specified herein are not available. Locally manufactured
and/or any other substitute materials and equipment may be accepted,
provided that they are better or the full equivalent in design, quality
and size of materials and workmanship, and provided further, they
receive written approval of the Engineer before installed.
All electrical equipment and materials except otherwise specified shall
be treated to resist moisture and fungus. Electrical components such
as switches, breakers, fuses, contracts, and heater elements shall not be
treated.
Other materials and components which are inherently fungus-resistant or
protected by hermetically sealing need not be treated. All other
circuit elements which have a temperature rise of not more than 75
degree F when operating at full load shall be coated with a fungus-
resistant varnish. Circuit elements include but are not limited to cables,
wires, contactors, panels, terminals and terminal junction blocks.
Corrosion
washers
and for
metal or
Protection: Fasteners, hardware, conduit clamps, bolt, nuts,

and similar materials used for assembly of electrical equipment
support of conduit and equipment shall be either of a non-ferrous
coated steel.
SPL H3.2.2
Lighting Contactor Panel
Enclosure: Lighting panel shall be designed and fabricated for pole

mounting as indicated on the drawings. Enclosures shall be fabricated
in accordance with NEMA requirements and for 230 volts, 1-phase, 60
hertz application. The enclosure shall be cleaned and shop prime coated
on all surfaces with epoxy primer. The interior and exterior of the
cabinet shall be given two coats of the manufacturers standard paint,
which shall be light gray in color.
Circuit Breakers: The molded case circuit breakers shall be bolt-on and
of
thermal-
magnetic
type
having
inverse-time
tripping
characteristic
on
overload
and
instantaneous trip on short circuits, shall be equipped with arc quenchers,
shall
have
quick-make and quick-break toggle mechanism, and shall have trip-free
operating
handles. Each multiple breaker shall have a common trip so that an
overload
on
one
pole will automatically cause all poles of the breakers to open. The circuit
breakers
shall
have an interrupting rating of not less than 10,000 symmetrical amperes
at 230 volts.
Solderless-type connectors shall be furnished on

breakers for conductors size 30 sq. mm and smaller.
the
Lighting
loadside
of
Contactor: Lighting contactor shall conform to NEMA ICS 2,

electrically
held
contactor. Contacts shall be rated 230 volts, 30 amperes, and 2 poles. Coils
shall
be
rated
230 volts. Provide in NEMA 3R enclosure conforming to NEMA ICS 6.
Contactor shall
Technical
Specifications:
of
have
IX - 219
silver
alloy double-break contacts and shall require no arcing

contacts.
Provide
contactor with hand-off-automatic selector switch. Contactor shall be
hermetically
sealed.
Timer Switch: Astronomic dial type or electronic type, arranged to turn
"ON"
at
sunset,
and turn "OFF" at predetermined time between 6:00 p.m. and 6:00
a.m.
or
sunrise,
automatically changing the settings each day in accordance with
seasonal
changes
of
sunset and sunrise. Provide switch rated 230 volts, having automatically
wound
spring
mechanism or capacitor, to maintain accurate time for a minimum of
seven
(7)
hours
following power failure. Provide time switch with a manual on-off
bypass
switch.
Housing for the time switch shall be surface mounted, NEMA 3R
enclosure
conforming
to NEMA ICS 6.
SPL H3.2.3
Street Lighting Fixtures
Poles:
Provide steel poles designed for wind loading of 145 kilometers
per hour while supporting luminaires having effective projected areas
indicated. Poles shall be anchor- based type designed for use with
underground supply conductors.
Brackets and Supports:
NEMA SH 5 - Pole brackets shall be not less
than 50 mm steel secured to pole. Slip-fitter or pipe-threaded brackets may
be used, but brackets shall be coordinated to the luminaires provided,
and all brackets for use with one type of luminaire shall be
identical. Brackets for pole-mounted street lights shall correctly
position the luminaire not lower than the mounting height indicated.
Special mountings or brackets shall be as indicated and shall be of metal
which will not promote galvanic reaction with the luminaire head.
Anchor Base Assemblies: Anchor bolts
yield strength of 345 MPa; the top
galvanized per ASTM A 153. Anchor
structural quality hot rolled carbon
strength of 248 MPa.
shall be steel rod having minimum

300 mm of the rod shall be
bases for steel poles shall be
steel plate having minimum yield
Luminaires: Provide luminaires as indicated. Provide luminaires complete

with lamps of the number, type and wattage indicated. The details,
shapes and dimensions are indicative of the general type desired, but
are not intended to restrict selection to luminaires of any particular
manufacturer. Luminaires of similar designs and equipment, light
distribution and brightness characteristics, and of equal finish and
quality will be acceptable as approved.
Fluorescent Lighting Fixtures:
Fixtures shall be UL 1598 listed.
Fluorescent lighting fixture shall have electronic ballast, unless specifically
indicated otherwise.
Fluorescent Lamp Electronic Ballast:
The electronic
minimum meet the following characteristics.
ballast
1. Ballast
shall
as a
shall comply with UL 935, ANSI C82.11, and NFPA 70,

unless
specified
otherwise. Ballast shall be 100% electronic high frequency type with
no magnetic
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 220
core and coil components. Ballast shall provide transient immunity as

recommended by IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2. Ballast shall be
designed for the wattage of the lamps used in the indicated
application. Ballasts shall be designed to operate on the voltage
system to which they are connected
2. Power factor shall be 0.95 (minimum)
3. Ballast shall operate at a frequency of 20,000 Hertz (minimum);
4. Ballast shall be compatible with and not cause interference with the
operation of
occupancy sensors or other infrared control systems. Provide ballasts
operating at
or above 40,000 Hertz where available
5. Ballast shall have light regulation of plus or minus 10 percent lumen
output with a
plus or minus 10 percent input voltage regulation. Ballast shall have
10 percent
flicker (maximum) using any compatible lamp
6. Ballast factor shall be between 0.85 (minimum) and 1.00 (maximum).
Current
crest
factor shall be 1.7 (maximum)
7. Ballast shall be UL listed Class P with a sound rating of "A."
8. Ballast shall have circuit diagrams and lamp connections displayed on the
ballast;
9. Ballasts shall be instant start unless otherwise indicated. Instant start
ballasts shall
operate lamps in a parallel circuit configuration that permits the
operation of
remaining lamps if one or more lamps fail or are removed. Provide
series/parallel
wiring for programmed start ballasts where available
10. Ballast shall be capable of starting and maintaining operation at a
minimum
of
-17
degrees C (0 degrees F) unless otherwise indicated
11. Electronic ballast shall have a full replacement warranty of 5 years
from
date
of
manufacture as specified in paragraph entitled "Electronic Ballast Warranty"
herein.
T-8 Lamp Ballast:
1. Total harmonic distortion (THD) Shall be 20 percent (maximum);
2. Input wattage:
a. 32 watts (maximum) when operating two F17T8 lamp
3. Ballast efficacy factor 2.04 (minimum) when operating two F17T8 lamp;
Lamps:
Fluorescent Lamps: Fluorescent lamps shall be UL listed and

shall
be
GE,
PHILIPS, or approved equal. Average rated life is based on 3 hours
operating per start.
T-8 Instant Start Lamp: 17 watt (maximum), nominal length of 610 mm (24
inches),
1300 initial lumens, CRI of 75 (minimum), color temperature of 3500 K,
and an average rated life of 20,000 hours
Lamp Holder: Lamp holder shall be UL listed and shall be rated 600 volts.
Housing shall be polycarbonate and shall have a temperature index of 115
degree C.
Enclosure: Fluorescent lighting fixture enclosure shall be 22 gauge sheet
steel,
formed,
screwed with machine or stove bolt and/or welded. Finish shall be two (2)
coat
primer,
and baked white acrylic paint. Knockouts for starters shall be provided if
required.
Diffuser:
Prismatic acrylic diffuser 3.0 mm thickness (minimum) or as indicated.
Technical
Specifications:
of
SPL H3.2.4
IX - 221
Conduit
Rigid Steel Conduit: Conduit shall be UL 6 listed and shall be galvanized.

RSC
shall
be
polyvinyl (PVC) coated in accordance with NEMA RN 1,
where
application for
underground and in corrosive areas, or must be painted with bitumastic
coal
tar
epoxy
paint.
Fittings for rigid steel conduit shall be UL 514B listed and shall be
threaded-type. Split couplings are unacceptable.
Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit: Unplasticized Polyvinyl Chloride (uPVC) Conduit
shall be UL 651 listed and NEMA TC3 with wall thickness not less than
Schedule 40. PVC shall be PNS 14 compliant.
Fittings for Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit (uPVC) shall be UL 514B listed and
shall comply with NEMA TC3. Fittings shall be the same material as the
conduit.
SPL H3.2.5
Outlet Bodies
Outlet
bodies for pull boxes, junction boxes and convenience outlets

shall
be
cast
or
malleable iron for exposed locations and stamped galvanized steel where
embedded
in
concrete.
SPL H3.2.6
Insulated Conductors Rated 600 Volts or Less
Conductors: Conductor sizes indicated are for copper conductors

unless otherwise noted. Insulated conductors manufactured more than 12
months before deliver to the job site shall not be used.
Conductors 8.0 mm2 (8 AWG) and larger diameter shall be stranded.
Conductors 5.5 mm2 (10 AWG) and smaller diameter shall be solid,
except that conductors for remote, control, alarm and signal circuits,
classes 1, 2, and 3, shall be stranded unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
Color Coding: Provide for all service, feeder, branch, control, and
signaling circuit conductors. Color shall be green for grounding
conductors, and white for neutrals, except where neutrals of more than
one system are installed in same raceway or box, the other neutral shall
be white with a colored (not green) stripe. The color of the
ungrounded conductors in different voltage system shall be as follows:
a. 230 volt, 1-phase black and red.
Insulation: Unless otherwise indicated or specified, power and lighting
wires
and
cables
shall be 600 volts, Line-to-line and grounding wires and cable shall be
Type
THWN
conforming to UL 83. Type THWN wires and cables shall be suitable for
the type of
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 222
service where conductor temperature does not exceed 75 degree C

in dry and wet locations.
SPL H3.2.7
Tape
Insulating Tape: UL 510 listed, plastic insulating tape, capable of

performing in a continuous temperature environment of 80 degrees C.
Buried Warning and Identification Tape: Provide detectable aluminum
foil
plastic- backed
tape
or
detectable
magnetic
plastic
tape
manufactured specifically for warning and identification of buried cable and
conduit. Tape shall be detectable by an electronic detection instrument.
Provide tape in rolls, 50 mm minimum width, color coded for the utility
involved with warning and identification imprinted in bold black
letters continuously and repeatedly over entire tape length. Warning and
identification shall be CAUTION BURIED ELECTRIC.
SPL H3.2.8
Pull Rope
Pull rope shall be plastic or flat pull line (bull line) having a minimum tensile
strength of 890 N (200 pounds).
Technical
Specifications:
of
SPL H3.2.9
IX - 223
Grounding Installation
All street lighting poles and panelboards shall be effectively grounded.

Conductor and ground wires shall be bare copper as shown and sizes
as indicated in the Plans. All connections shall be by exothermic weld or
compression connector.
a. Make exothermic welds strictly in accordance with the weld
manufacturer's written
recommendations. Welds which are "puffed up" or which show
convex surfaces
indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable. Mechanical
connectors are not
required at exothermic welds;
b. Make compression connections using a hydraulic compression tool
to provide the
correct circumferential pressure. Tools and dies shall be as
recommended by the
manufacturer. An embossing die code or other standard method shall
provide visible
indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on the
ground wire.
Grounding wire shall be made of bare copper stranded, softdrawn wire
and shall be installed in one continuous length without splices or joints.
Ground rods shall be made of copper-clad steel, UL 467, and shall be
driven full length into the earth. Sizes of which shall be as indicated on the
Plans for grounding details.
SPL H3.2.10 Light Pole Concrete Footings
All electrical light pole footings shall be of reinforced concrete with
dimensions as indicated on the Plans. Concrete shall be Class A and
together with the reinforcing steel shall conform to the requirements of
Item 405 SP, Structural Concrete and Item 404(60) SP, Reinforcing Steel,
Grade 60.
SPL H3.3
SPL H3.3.1
Constuction Requirements
Codes and Regulations
All work shall be done in accordance with the requirements of the latest
edition of the PHILIPPINE
ELECTRICAL
CODE
and
the
NATIONAL
SAFETYCODE, with the applicable ordinances of the local government,
and with the requirements of the local power company that will
eventually furnish the service. Nothing contained herein or shown on the
Plans shall be construed as to conflict with the requirements of these
codes which are hereby made part of the work of the item.
SPL H3.3.2
Contractor Submittals
The Contractor shall be required to submit shop drawings in accordance

with SPL B.5 which shall include outline dimensions, mounting
connections and clearances, ratings, elementary wiring diagrams,

interconnection wiring diagrams, together with catalogs and descriptive
data for the following:
1. Lighting panels
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 224
2. Street lightings, including light poles, bracket and slip fittings for
attachment
of
bracket to light poles.
3. Timer switch
4. Manufacturers Data. When data that described more than one type,
size, model, or
items is submitted, clearly mark the data to indicate which type, size,
model, or item
is being provided. Data shall be sufficient to show conformance
to specified
requirements.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Luminaires
Poles and Brackets
Timer Switch
Ballast
Shop Drawings
Luminaires.
Include dimensions, accessories and Installation and

construction
details.
Photometric data, including zonal lumen data, average and minimum
ration
aiming
diagram and computerized candlepower distribution data shall
accompany
shop
drawings.
1. Poles. Include dimensions, wind load determined in accordance with
AASHTO LTS 1, pole deflection, pole class, and other applicable information.
Pole design
calculations.
SPL H3.3.3
Test and Guarantee
On completion the Contractor shall perform all required tests at his own
expense. The Contractor shall give the Engineer at least twenty-four (24)
hours notice of any test. The Engineer will be present for all tests.
The Contractor shall repair all defects and replace any part of the work
not meeting the requirements of the contract at no additional cost.
All apparatus, materials and labour required for making the tests shall be
supplied by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall furnish a guarantee covering all labour and
for a period of one year from the date of final acceptance of his
he shall agree to repair and make good at his expense any
defects which may develop during that time, if such defects shall
defective workmanship or materials.
SPL H3.3.4
Service Entrance
materials
work and
and all
arise from
The
service entrance posts, the lighting panels and the concrete

foundations
shall
be
constructed as shown in the Plans or as required by the Electric
Cooperative,
and
as
directed by the Electrical Engineer. The rigid steel conduit with THWN
conductors shall
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 225
run down the utility line and into the box. Electrical components shall be
mounted
to
the black panels or control panels with machine screw and wired as
shown
on
the
plans
or as directed. Forms for the footings shall not be removed until
the
concrete
has
hardened properly and not less than 24 hours after the concrete had
been placed.
SPL H3.3.5
Installations
Lighting Control Panels: The Contractor shall install the panelboards at

the
locations
indicated on the Plans. Electrical components shall be installed in the
enclosures
in
proper position and shall be complete wired and ready for operation. All
power
and
control wires and cables shall enter the control equipment enclosures through
conduits.
Conduits: Electrical conduits and fittings shall be installed in their correct
positions
and
locations as shown on the Plans. Conduit and fittings to be embedded in
concrete
shall
be held securely in position while the concrete is being placed. All
threaded
conduit
connections shall be painted with red-lead sealing compound of glyptic
varnish.
All conduit bends shall be of standard radii bent without heating and shall
be free from kinks, indentions, or other deformations which reduce the
cross-sectional area. Burrs and sharp edges at the end of each piece of
conduit shall be removed with a taper reamer. Bushings shall be
installed on the ends of conduits at boxes of cabinets to protect
conductors from abrasion, and locknuts and bondnuts shall be
installed to provide tight grounded connections between conduits and
boxes.
Conduits emerging from concrete
conduit couplings and pipe lugs.
surfaces
shall
be
terminated
with
During construction, ends of conduits shall be plugged at all outlets, or

boxes, to keep the conduits dry and to prevent the entrance of foreign matter
into the conduits.
Locknuts and bond nuts shall be installed to provide tight ground
connections
between
conduits and boxes, control board and cabinets. The ends of conduits
terminating
at
cabinets, control boards or outdoor boxes shall be sealed with an
approved
sealing
material to prevent air circulation form the conduit into the cabinet and
control
boxes.
board
Conduit under Roadway: Installation shall avoid pocket in the conduit run.
All run shall be straight as possible and shall be installed in a neat
and workmanlike manner. Conduit under roadway shall be encased in
reinforced concrete.
Electrical
Conductors and Grounding: Electrical conductors and ground

wires
shall
be
furnished and installed by the Contractor. All insulating tape and
compounds,
solder,
flux and connectors for making grounding connections shall be made
with
approved
type solderless connectors, and all connections shall be mechanically
and
electrically
tight and secure. All grounding connectors shall be furnished by the
Contractor. The
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 226
Contractor shall install electrical conductors and shall make all required
connections as shown on wiring diagrams to be furnished or as
directed by the Engineer. The conductors shall be installed so that
there will be no cuts or abrasions in the insulation or protective covering
of the conductor. No splices shall be made in conductors, except at
boxes, outlets or cabinets.
SPL H3.4
Street Lighting shall be measured per Each completed in accordance with

the
Drawings, Specifications and and as accepted by the Engineer.
SPL H3.5
Basis of Payment

Payment shall be full compensation for the work related to Street Lighting
including all materials,
labour,
equipment,
tools
and
incidentals
necessary to complete the work under this Item.
Pay Item
SPL H3
Description
Street Lighting
SPL H4
Contract Information Signs
SPL H4.1
Description
Unit of Measurement
Each
The work related to this item shall consist of furnishing and installing
and
illuminating
project information signs of the types specified in accordance with these
Specifications
and to the detail and locations shown on the Drawings or as required by the
Engineer.
Contract information signs shall be the project signs prescribed
separately by Department of Public Works and Highways (DPWH) and
Commission on Audit (COA) for Government infrastructure projects, to
inform the public of implementation of the project and to advise the
road-users of on-going construction. COA should be consulted regarding
whether project cost should be displayed in some sensitive regions within
the Republic of the Philippines.
SPL H4.2
SPL H4.2.1
Sign Panels
Technical
Specifications:
of
The sign panel for the DPWH

5-ply marine plywood, 4 x 8
frames; that for the COA signs
Both sets of project signs shall
SPL H4.2.2
IX - 227
project signs shall be of 19 mm thick

covered with plain G.I. gauge No. 32 with
shall be plain G.I. sheet suitably framed.
be painted for outdoor display.
Post and Frames
Posts and frames shall be hard wood of the species indicated on

the drawings or prescribed by the Engineer.
SPL H4.2.3
Hardware
All hardware shall be of the kind and size specified on the drawings or
as approved by the Engineer.
SPL H4.2.4
Paints
Paints for the background and legend shall be approved by the Engineer.
SPL H4.3
SPL H4.3.1
Contract
Construction Requirement
Location
information signs shall

and
the
be installed
at or
end
near the beginning

of
Project.
SPL H4.3.2
Excavation and Backfilling
Holes shall be excavated to required depths of bottom of posts as

shown on the Drawings. Backfill shall be suitable material approved
by the Engineer and shall be compacted in layers not exceeding 150
mm in depth. Surplus excavated materials shall be disposed of by the
Contractor and as directed by the Engineer.
SPL H4.3.3
Erection of Posts
Post shall be erected plumb at the locations shown on the Plans or as

SPL H4.3.4
Installation of Sign Panel
Sign panel shall be erected in accordance with the details shown on

the Plans. Any chipping or bending of the sign panel shall be considered
as sufficient cause to require replacement of the panel at the expense of
the Contractor.
Exposed portion of fastening hardware on the face of the sign shall be
painted to match the entire face of the sign.
Technical
Specifications:
of
SPL H4.3.5
IX - 228
Illumination
Project signs shall be illuminated by an attached or independently

mounted light source installed to direct adequate illumination over the
entire face of the sign.
SPL H4.4
The DPWH and COA project signs shall be measured per Each of the
specified sizes including their posts and illumination, complete in place
installed in accordance with the drawings, specifications and accepted by the
Engineer.
SPL H4.5
Basis of Payment

Payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and installing sign
including all excavation, backfilling or posts, illumination, materials,
labour, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work
under these Items.
Pay Item
Description
SPL H4(a)

(DPWH - Project Billboard)
(COA)
SPL H4(b)
Technical
Specifications:
Unit of Measurement
Each
Each
of
IX - 229
PART J
PROVISIONAL SUMS
SPL J1
Relocation of Affected Electric Power Utilities
SPL J1.1
Description
Removal and relocation of public electric power utilities essential to the

Works under the Contract are not to be executed by the Contractor but
by the respective owners of the utilities or their designated subcontractors.
No work shall commence on any parts, portions or sections of the Project
Site that may affect or disturb the functions or the original condition of
any public utility or site facility unless the Contractor has first secured
written permission from the Engineer. The Provisional Sum is included
as a fixed amount (as indicated in Section III Part VIII Bill of Quantities)
and the Bidders are not entitled to modify the figure.
SPL J1.2
The work will be measured as established in the order authorizing the work.
SPL J1.3
Basis of Payment
The Provisional Sums included and so designated in the Bill of

Quantities shall be expended in whole or in part at the direction and
discretion of the Engineer in accordance with the Conditions of Contract.
Pay Item
SPL J1
Description
Unit of Measurement
Relocation of Affected Electric Power

Utilities
Provisional Sum
SPL J2
Removal and Relocation of Existing Barangay Markers
SPL J2.1
Description
This item shall consist of removal and relocation of Barangay

Markers under the Contract. The Provisional Sum is included as a fixed
amount (as indicated in Section III Part VIII Bill of Quantities) and the
Bidders are not entitled to modify the figure.
SPL J2.2
The work will be measured as established in the order authorizing the work.
SPL J2.3
Basis of Payment
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 230
The Provisional Sums included and so designated in the Bill of

Quantities shall be expended in whole or in part at the direction and
discretion of the Engineer in accordance with the Conditions of Contract.
Pay Item
SPL J2
Description
Removal and Relocation of Barangay
Markers
SPL J3
Provisional Sum
SPL J3.1
Description
Unit of Measurement
Provisional Sum
Provisional Sum means a sum included in the Contract and so

designated in the Bill of Quantities for the execution of any part of
the Works or for the supply of goods, materials, plants or services, or
for contingencies, which sum may be used, in whole or in part, or not at
all, on the instructions of the Engineer. The Contractor shall be entitled to
only such amounts in respect of the work, supply or contingencies to
which such Provisional Sums related as the Engineer shall determine.
The Provisional Sum is included as a fixed amount (as indicated in
Section III Part VIII Bill of Quantities) and the Bidders are not entitled to
modify the figure.
The Engineer shall notify the Contractor of any determination made, with a
copy to the Employer.
The Provisional Sum may be used for the execution of additional works
beyond the limit of Dayworks. This may be due to unknown or
unforeseen underground obstruction
wherein detailed engineering cannot be possibly undertaken or for other
works like
relocation of public utilities which requires specialization and maybe
undertaken by a
nominated subcontractor.
SPL J3.2
The amount to be paid to the Contractor with respect to the work

performed shall be determined by the Engineer and submitted to the
DPWH for review and approval of proper authorities prior to extension.
Work executed under the Provisional Sum shall be valued at the rates or
prices set out in the Bid or as determined by the Engineer. The Contractor
shall submit to the
Engineer all quotations, invoices and accounts or receipts in connection
with the
expenditures on works executed under the Provisional Sum.
Technical
Specifications:
of
Pay Item
SPL J3
PART K
Description
Provisional Sum
IX - 231
Unit of Measurement
Provisional Sum
DAYWORKS
SPL K1
Dayworks
SPL K1.1
Description
This item shall consist of labor, materials, plant and equipment rates,
and
shall
be
subjected to the provisions of Clause 29 of the General Conditions of
Contract.
For minor or incidental works, the Engineer may, if in his opinion it is
necessary or desirable, instruct that a variation shall be executed on
a dayworks basis. These dayworks may include unforeseen works
necessary in the prosecution of the project, not captured in the detailed
engineering design and not described as specific items in the bill of
quantities, like:
Emergency works as a result of calamity such as landslide, flooding
and typhoons; Urgent works brought by road accidents which affect
the project;
Removal of temporary obstructions; and,
Other similar unforeseen works as determined by the Engineer.
The works shall then be valued in accordance with the Daywork
Schedule included in the Contract, plus a percentage to be entered by
the bidder representing contractors profit, overhead/contingencies, supervision
cost and other charges.
The following procedure shall then apply:
a. Before ordering goods for the works, the Contractor shall request
for
quotations
from at least 3 suppliers and submit the same to the Engineer.
b. Involves, vouchers and accounts or receipts shall be kept by the
Contractor
for
submission prior to payment.
SPL K1.2
The Contractor will be paid for dayworks carried out during the course of
the contract at the rates entered in the priced Bill of Quantities.
Daywork rates quoted for labor shall be the amounts payable, and shall include
allowances for complying with the labor law, for use and waste of hand
tools and for all ordinary non-mechanical plant including stagings,
scaffoldings, etc., where not erected especially for the execution of a
daywork item, use of electric light and all special
inducement for working.

Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 232
The rates of material used on dayworks shall include for delivery to the immediate
working area and for unloading. Should any material be required for use
on dayworks
that are not included in Section VIII, Bill of Quantities, the lowest current
net market
price shall apply, plus the cost of loading and unloading and 15%
allowance for
overhead and profit. Should the Engineer instruct that materials be
ordered from
outside the country, then the lowest current net manufacturers CIF price
shall apply,
plus the cost of customs and handling charges and transporting to the
immediate
working area and unloading and 15% allowance for overhead and profit.
All rates shall
include for adequately storing and additional handling costs and taxes if
applicable.
Plant and equipment shall include the wages of drivers, attendants and operators,
maintenance in proper working order at all times, attendance in starting up and
shutting down, all fuel and power, oils, greases and cleaning materials.
Replace and/or sharpening of tools and provision of tools, charges for
depreciation insurance, taxes and the like and all other ancillary items
including consumable stores.
Pay Item
K1
Description
Dayworks
Unit of Measurement
Provisionsal Sum
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 233
Appendix A
SUPPLEMENTAL
TESTING REQUIREMENTS
Technical
Specifications:
of
IX - 234
Appendix A Supplemental Testing Requirements

Table
A-1
outlines
supplemental
material
testing
Contractors
furnished, supplied, and/or manufactured and/or materials related to Item
Nos. 102., 103., 104., 105., 106., 202.,300.,311., and 515.
Test frequencies specified are considered minimums.
For all other material testing not listed herein refer to the DPWH standard
specifications
for Public Works and Highways, 2004 Edition: Volume II Highway, Bridges
and Airports.
All test frequencies may be increased at the Engineers discretion.
Technical
Specifications:
of
Item No.
102
103
Description
Excavation
Structure
Excavation
Item
1. Gradation
Test of Control
AASHTO T88
-OR- AASHTO T27
and AASHTO T11
2. Atterberg
Limits
AASHTO T89
AASHTO T90
3. CBR Test
AASHTO T193
4. Laboratory
Compaction
1. Gradation
AASHTO T99
2. Atterberg
Limits
3. CBR Test
104
Embankment
Materials
IX - 235
4. Laboratory
Compaction
1. Gradation
2. Atterberg
Limits
3. CBR Test
4. Laboratory
Compaction
5. Field Density
Frequency
Remarks
1 complete test per Test results must be
1500 cubic meter or submitted before
fraction thereof or excavated materials
every change in soil are incorporated into
properties.
the work as fill.
[1 complete test is
defined as
acceptable test
results for items 1
thru 4]
AASHTO T88
1 complete test per Test results will be
-OR- AASHTO T27 1500 cubic Meter or submitted before
and AASHTO T11
AASHTO T89
properties.
the work as fill.
AASHTO T90
[1 complete test is
defined as test
AASHTO T193
results for items 1
thru 4]
AASHTO T99
AASHTO T88
1 complete test per Test results will be
-OR- AASHTO T27 1500 cubic Meter or submitted before
and AASHTO T11
AASHTO T89
properties.
the work as fill.
AASHTO T90
[1 complete test is
defined as test
AASHTO T193
results for items 1
thru 4]
AASHTO T99
AASHTO T 191
Minimum of 3 per
every 500 sq.
meters of fraction
thereof per layer
Technical
Specifications:
of
A layer is considered
20cm of uncompacted
thickness. An
acceptable test is one
which meets the
stated
moisture
and compaction
requirements the
identified item no.
Item No.
Description
Item
Compacti
on
6. Shrinkage/
7. CBR Test
Swell
Factor
1. Gradation
105
Sub Grade
Preparatio
n
IX - 236
Test of Control
ASTM D4546
AASHTO T88
-OR- AASHTO T27
and AASHTO T11
AASHTO T89
2.
Atterberg
Limits
Frequency
AASHTO T90
AASHTO T193
1
complete test per
1500
cubic Meter or
fraction
thereof
or
every
change
in
soil
properties.
[1 complete test is defined
as test
results for items 1 thru 4]
3. CBR Test
4.
Laboratory
AASHTO T99
Compaction
Minimum
of
3
per
every
500
square
meters
or
fraction
thereof per layer
AASHTO T191
1
test per source or
for
every
1500
cubic
meters
or
fraction
thereof
5. Field Density
ASTM D4546
106
Aggregate
Subbase
Course
6. Shrinkage/
Swell
Factor
AASHTO T88
AASHTO T89
1. Gradation
AASHTO T90
2.
Atterberg
Limits
AASHTO T96
AASHTO T180
3. Abrasion
4.
Laboratory
202
Crushed
Aggregate
Base Course
AASHTO T193
Compaction
AASHTO T191
5. CBR Test
AASHTO T88
AASHTO T89
6. Field Density
AASHTO T90
1. Gradation
AASHTO T96
2.
Atterberg
Limits
3. Abrasion
AASHTO T104
ASTM D-5821
4. Soundness
5.
Fractured
Face
(one)
6.
Laboratory
AASHTO T180
AASHTO T193
1 test [items 1-2] for every

300 cubic
meters
1 test for every 1500 cubic
meters or
fraction thereof
1 test for every 1500 cubic
meters or
fraction thereof
1 test per every 2500 cubic
meters or
fraction thereof
3 acceptable tests per every
500 square
meters or fraction thereof
1 test [items 1-2] for every
300 cubic
meters or fraction thereof
Every
meter
thereof
1500
cubic
or
fraction
1 test per every 2500 cubic

meters or
fraction thereof
Remarks
1 test per
source or
for every
1500
cubic
meters or
fraction
thereof
Test
res
ults
will
be
sub
mitt
ed
bef
ore
exc
ava
ted
materials
are
incorporate
d into the
work as fill.
A
layer
is 20cm
of
uncomp
acted
thickness. An
acceptab
le
test
is
one
which
meets
the
stated
moistur
e
and
compac
tion
requi
reme
nts
the
identifi
ed
item
numb
er.
Technical
Specifications:
For every layer

15
cm
compacted
depth
of
of
of
Item No.
Description
Item
8.
Density
Tests
Aggregate
Surface
Course
300
Gravel
Surfacing
IX - 237
Test of Control
Field
AASHTO T-191
conformance to
project
specifications
minimum of 5
samples per lot.
Frequency
3 tests per every
500 square meters
or
fraction thereof
AASHTO T88
1. Gradation
2.
Atterberg
Limits
3. Abrasion
AASHTO
T89
AASHTO
T90
1 test [items 1-2]

for
every
300
cubic
meters
or
fraction thereof
AASHTO T96
4. Soundness
5. CBR Test
6.
Fractured
Face
(one)
7.
Laboratory
Compaction
8. CBR Test
AASHTO
T104
AASHTO
Every
cubic
meter
fraction
thereof
1500
or
T193
ASTM D-5821
AASHTO T180
AASHTO T193
9. Field Density Tests
1 test per every

2500 cubic meters
or
fraction thereof
3 tests per every
500 square meters
or
fraction thereof
AASHTO T-191
Field
Acceptanc
e Testing
311
PCCP Overlay
1st
3
delivery
vehicles
and any time there
is
a question of being
1.
Slump of
Plastic Concrete
AASHTO
T119
AASHTO
T141
within the stated

tolerance for
project.
5
additional
times per lot (to
be
coordinated
with
flexural
strength
sampling)
2. Air Entrainment
AASHTO
T152
AASHTO
T141
At the fabrication
of
the
flexural
strength
test specimens or
if
any question of
Remarks
For every layer 15 to
20 cm of compacted depth
based on
results
of
compaction
trials.
For
every
layer or 15
to 20cm of
compacted
depth
based on
results of
compactio
n trials.
1st 3
vehicles
should
meet
project
specifica
tions. If
the
concrete
slump
does
not
meet
spec
ificat
ions,
Proje
ct
Engi
neer
shall be
contact
ed and
shall
determin
e if
additiona
l samples
shall be
tested.
Project
Engin
eer
shall
deter
mine
if
paving
shall
progress
based on
consisten
cy of the
concrete
slump or
Technical
Specifications:
if additional
adjustments to the
mix
should
be
made
prior to proceeding
with paving
operations.
Prior to the start
of paving air
entrainment
shall
be tested in one of
the first 3 delivery
vehicles (in addition
to 5 other sampling
events
for
fabrication
of flexural strength
specimens).
of
Item No.
Description
Item
3. Temperature
4. Unit Weight
IX - 238
Test of Control
ASTM C 1064
AASHTO
T121
AASHTO
T141
Frequency
Every 1,500 cubic
At the fabrication
of
flexural
strength
specimens.
5
samples per lot.
At
the
same
frequency
as
fabrication
of
flexural
strength
specimens.
5 samples per lot.
5. Flexural Strength
AASHTO T97
AASHTO T23
AASHTO
T141
Minimum of 5
samples
for
single
lot
6. Thickness
Determinatio
n
AASHTO T148
7. IRI
311, 405
Cement
Quality
Quality
1. Grading
311, 405
2. Wash Loss
3. Bulk Specific
Gravity
AASHTO M85
AASHTO T27
AASHTO T11
4. Absorption
AASHTO T84
Fine Aggregate 5.
Mortar
Strength source not yet
tested
6. Soundness
5
cores
for
every
kilometer
for
one
lane or 5 cores
for
every 500 m when
2
lanes
are
poured
concurrently.
Every 2,000 bags

or
fraction
thereof
AASHTO T84
AASHTO
7. Organic Impurities
T106M
8. Unit Weight
AASHTO T104
9. % Clay Lumps
AASHTO T21
10. % Shale
AASHTO T19
311, 405
Fine Aggregate
Quality
AASHTO T112
AASHTO T113
Every
cubic
meters
fraction
thereof
1,500
or
Remarks
Temperature should be monitored
throughout the delivery.
Unit
weight
should
be
determined
from
the same sample
obtained for strength specimens.
3
(minimum)
beam
2
specimens
broken
at
28
days
and one
hold
specime
n shall
be
consider
ed at
sample.
A lot
shall be
consider
ed to
for
definition of partial
lots]
be one
shifts
productio
n;
however
a new
lot
shall
begin
when
the
mix
design is
changed.
[See SPs
Technical
Specifications:
IRI shall be
determined
both
directions.
of
for
travel
Item No.
Description
Item
Previously
1. Grading
Tested and
Passed Sources 2. Wash Loss
IX - 239
Test of Control
AASHTO T27
Frequency
meters or fraction
thereof
Remarks
AASHTO T11
3. Bulk Specific GravityAASHTO T84

4. Absorption
AASHTO T84
5. Mortar Strength
311, 405
Coarse
Aggregate
source not yet
tested
Quality
1. Grading
AASHTO T27
311, 405
3. Absorption
AASHTO T85
4. Abrasion
AASHTO T96
5. Soundness
AASHTO T104
6. Unit Weight
AASHTO T19
Coarse
Quality
Aggregate
1. Grading
AASHTO T27
Previously
Tested and
Passed Sources
3. Absorption
AASHTO T85
4. Abrasion
515
Mechanically
Stabilized
Earth Walls
1. Excavation
Elevation and
dimensions specified
Laboratory
2. Backfill
Compaction
Field Density
3. Wall Face
Line and grade
400
AASHTO T96
Concrete
Structural Piles
Micropiles
Field measured
Each foundation
AASHTO T99
stakes.
AASHTO
T180
AASHTO T191
Field measured
Not to exceed 30
mm
Horz and 30 mm
Vert. from reference
1 for each lift or

fraction thereof,
but
not less than 1 for
each installation
As determined by
the
Engineer
Lift
size
greater than
mm
loose
thickness.
soil
no
200
lift
Not to exceed 75
mm
Horiz. and 75 mm
Same test as for

Item
405
1-Quality Test Mill Test
Certificate
1-IR, Inspection Report
Technical
Specifications:
1 laboratory
compaction
curve per
type.
Vert. from reference

stakes.
of
Item No.
406
Description
Item
Concrete
Reinforcing
Steel Wire
Strand
Item
Same
IX - 240
Test of Control
Test
as
Frequency
Remarks
for
405
Same Test as for Item
404
1-Q, for every 20 tons
or fration thereof
Technical
Specifications:
of

CP2 Technical Specifications

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Исходное описание:

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

CP2 Technical Specifications

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

SECTION IX

Contract Package (CP) 2

Section IX - Technical Specifications

PART A FACILITIES FOR THE ENGINEER...................................................3

Section IX - Technical Specifications

Concrete Stair with G.I. Pipe Railings...................................137

Section IX - Technical Specifications

Section IX - Technical Specifications

in the specifications of standard work items of the

Specifications for additional items of work not covered in the

Section IX - Technical Specifications

Section IX - Technical Specifications

SECTION II Special Provisions and Supplemental Specifications

FACILITIES FOR THE ENGINEER

FACILTIES FOR THE ENGINEER

Section IX - Technical Specifications

The Contractor shall make all arrangements they deem necessary

Construct Facilities for the Engineer (Field Office, Laboratory

The Contractor shall construct one (1) combined field office/laboratory

Section IX - Technical Specifications

Contractor shall relocate, deliver and setup all equipment,

Operate and Maintain Facilities for the Engineer (Field Office,

The Contractor shall provide the following personnel to assist in the

Section IX - Technical Specifications

Provision of Office, Laboratory and Quarters Personnel

Section IX - Technical Specifications

A.1.1(c) SP Provision of Furniture, Fixtures, Office Equipment and

Schedule C - Provision of Furniture,

1. Executive Desk, 75cm x 150cm, KD tanguile dark brown,

Section IX - Technical Specifications

4. First aid kits

5. Photo copier A3 & A4 sizes, 50% - 200% reducer/enlarger

16. Waste Basket

Provision of Furniture, Appliances and Supplies for Engineers Quarters

Section IX - Technical Specifications

Dining Room and Kitchen

9. Frying Pans, Stainless Steel (Big and Small)

Bed Pillows, at least 800 mm long

All furniture and equipment listed in Schedules C and D is the property of

Provision of Office Supplies and Consumable Stores for the

Office supplies and consumable stores to be provided by the Contractor

Section IX - Technical Specifications

Schedule E - Provision of Office Supplies and Consumable Stores

Bond Paper, Long

Yellow Paper, Rule

Brown Envelope, Long

Brown Envelope, Short

Letter Envelope, white

Letter Envelope, brown

Record Book, 200 pages

10. Record Book, 100 pages

11. Mini Correction Roller, 6 m

12. Magic Tape (18 mm x 50 mm)

13. Scotch Tape (3/4)

14. Masking Tape

17. Mechanical Pencil

18. Ballpen (Black, Blue, Red)

19. Paper Clip

21. Stapler, Max HD 50, uses standard #35 staple Each

15. Glue Stick, 20 grams

22. Stapler, Max HD 12N/70, Capacity 30 to 170 sheets for Each 1

24. Staple Wire, special

25. Staple Wire Remover, ordinary